Grúa Torre Terex SKS575

PEINER
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
FEM 1001/3
US-Version
Serial no.:
Year of construction: 2000
Operating manual
TEREX PEINER GmbH

Gottbillstrae 1 - 7 D - 54294 Trier ( 0651 / 81008 - 0 FAX: 0651 / 87640 http://www.peiner.com
Table of contents
Operating manual
National
regulations
Spare parts
catalogue
Preface
Crane configurations
Crane transport
Site preparation
Crane erection
Safety equipment
Terex Germany GmbH & Co. KG
Control and crane operation
Bereich Peiner
Gottbillstrae 1-7
D-54294 Trier
++49/(0)651 / 81008-0
Fax.: ++49/(0)651 / 87640
Lubrication and maintenance

Crane dismantling
Appendix
National regulations
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.5 / 02
19.02.
00.00 1/7 Table of contents

Chapter
Edition
Safety rules for Crane Operators
Page
1
00.02
Indroduction
1.1 / 00
00.03
Preface
2.1 / 97
1 11
Type Sheet
1 / 2000
15
01
Crane configurations
01.00
Identification plate
1.1 / 00
01.01
Tower crane overview and nomenclature
1.1 / 00
01.02
Lifting capacities
2.2 / 02
1-4
01.05
Version A Hook heights (not climbable)
1.1 / 00
01.06
Version A Forces and moments (on foundation / n. climb.)
1.2 / 00
12
01.07
Version A Hook heights (climbable)
1.1 / 00
01.08
Verison A Forces and moments (on foundation / climb.)
1.2 / 00
12
01.11
Version E Hook heights (not climbable)
1.1 / 00
01.12
Version E Corner loads and horizontal forces (n. climb.)
1.1 / 00
12
01.13
Version E - Hook heights (climbable)
1.1 / 00
01.14
Version E - Corner loads and horizontal forces (climb.)
1.1 / 00
12
01.15
Version F Hook heights (not climbable)
1.1 / 00
01.16
Version F Corner loads and horizontal forces (n. climb.)
1.1 / 00
12
01.17
Version F - Hook heights (climbable)
1.1 / 00
01.18
Version F - Corner loads and horizontal forces (climb.)
1.1 / 00
12
02
Transport
02.01
Crane transport
1.2 / 00
02.02
Packing list
1.1 / 00
00.00
\\qs449331a\bier\eigene
dateien\betriebsanleitungen\sprache\englisch\sk575\inhalt\inhaltsverzeichnis
ausgabe5.doc
00.00
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.5 / 02
19.02.

Chapter
Edition
Page
03
Site preparation
03.01
Construction site and assembly preparation
4.1 / 00
12
03.04
Distance from buildings
5.1 / 98
03.22
Safety distances between cranes
2.1 / 98
03.25
Version A foundation anchorage
5.1 / 00
14
03.26
Version E preparing the crane track
2.1 / 98
13
03.27
Version E rails on concrete strip foundation
2.1 / 98
12
03.28
Version E rails on sleepers
2.1 / 98
12
03.29
Version E rails on I-beams
2.1 / 98
03.30
Version E SRS crane track system
2.1 / 98
03.31
Version E rails
4.1 / 98
12
03.32
Version E track-laying in curves
3.1 / 98
03.33
Version E crane track tolerances
3.2 / 98
12
03.34
Version E end-of-track safeguards
4.2 / 98
03.35
Version E contact rail for emergency end stop switch
2.1 / 98
12
03.36
Version E earthing of crane tracks
2.1 / 98
12
03.38
The assembly crane
1.1 / 00
03.39
Danger zone near electrical transmissions lines
1.1 / 00
03.40
Electrical connections
1.1 / 00
1-2
03.41
Drive specifications
1.1 / 00
04
Crane erection
04.01
Important instructions concerning crane erection
2.1 / 00
04.02
Usual hand signals
1.1 / 00
12
04.03
Tools and accessories
2.1 / 98
04:04
Bolt and nut conversion table
1.1 / 00
04.09
Threaded connections
4.1 / 98
1 10
04.13
Version A mounting the crane substructure
4.2 / 97
00.00
ausgabe5.doc
00.00
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.6 / 09
21.09.

Chapter
Edition
Page
04
Crane erection
04.15
Version E mounting the crane substructure
4.1 / 98
15
04.16
Attachment points and weights undercarriage
1.1 / 00
04.18
Version F mounting the crane substructure
4.1 / 98
15
04.20
Mounting the tower sections
6.1 / 00
12
04.21
Attachments points and weights tower sections
5.1 / 98
04.22
Notes on tower connecting elements
4.1 / 99
16
04.23
Mounting the turntable
1.1 / 00
14
04.26
Mounting the counterjib
1.1 / 00
14
04.28
Place erection counterweight in position
1.1 / 00
04.36
Notes on jib assembly
1.1 / 00
04.39
Pre-assembly of the rear part of the jib
1.1 / 00
19
04.45
Notes on pre-assembly of the front part of the jib
1.1 / 00
04.51
Pre-assembly of the front part of the jib L1
1.1 / 00
1 13
04.52
Pre-assembly of the front part of the jib L2 L9
1.1 / 00
15
04.53
Configuration of jib suspension
1.1 / 00
04.60
Attachment points and weights jib
1.3 / 09
1 - 10
04.72
Mounting the complete jib
1.1 / 00
1 11
04.73
Rope dimensions
1.1 / 00
12
04.74
Trolley travel rope reeving
1.1 / 00
04.76
Hoist rope reeving
1.1 / 00
12
04.78
Winding up the hoist rope
5.2 / 98
13
04.81
Completing the counterweight
1.1 / 00
12
04.99
Adjusting the crane configuration
1.2 / 98
00.00
sk575-om_chp-00.00_20090921.doc
00.00
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.5 / 02
19.02.

Chapter
Edition
Page
05
Safety equipment
05.01
Position of safety devices
1.1 / 00
05.03
Fail-safe circuits for control levers
4.2 / 99
05.05
Acoustic warning signals
5.1 / 99
05.06
Hoist limit switch
5.1 / 99
1-2
05.07
Trolley travel rope breakage safeguard
3.1 / 99
05.08
Trolley limit switch
4.1 / 02
13
05.09
Load torque limiter
3.2 / 00
1-2
05.11
Load hook
4.1 / 97
05.12
Rope retainers
2.2 / 97
05.13
Version E bogie stabilizier
2.2 / 97
05.14
Version E emergency end stop switch
3.2 / 99
05.15
Version E rails clamps
3.1 / 99
05.17
Max. load safety device (Load measureing Pin)
2.2 / 00
1-4
05.19
Mechanical wind release
2.1 / 98
05.20
Electrical wind release
3.2 / 99
12
06
06.01
Safety equipment general information
2.3 / 00
1 15
06.02
Pre-operational checks
3.1 / 00
06.03
Starting up
6.1 / 00
06.04
Taking out of service
3.3 / 98
06.05
Taking out of service in case of storm
3.2 / 97
06.06
General operating and safety instructions
3.1 / 00
06.07
Control stand
8.3 / 00
06.08
Safety rules for crane operators
1.1 / 00
00.00
ausgabe5.doc
00.00
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.5 / 02
19.02.

Chapter
Edition
Page
06
06.09
Seat of cab
1.1 / 00
06.13
Hoist winch control 28 / 37 / 66 / 76 / 102 WB
6.2 / 00
06.14
Hoist winch gear shift 28 / 37 / 66 / 76 / 102 WB
6.1 / 00
06.15
Travelling mechanism control
6.2 / 97
06.21
Trolley travelling mechanism with frequency control
3.2 / 99
06.28
Adjustement of the top pulley locking device
2.2 / 99
06.30
Nameplates
3.2 / 99
06.31
Accident prevention signs
1.1 / 00
12
06.70
PLC-system safety ruels for users
1.1 / 00
1-3
06.72
PLC-system display unit
3.2 / 00
06.74
PLC-system displays in the cab
2.2 / 00
14
06.79
PLC-system error messages (of the display in the cab)
3.2 / 99
06.80
PLC-system I/O module analog
1.1 / 00
14
06.81
PLCsystem I/O modules binary
1.1 / 00
15
06.82
PLC-system CPU module
1.1 / 00
1-3
07
07.01
General notes to maintenance
3.1 / 00
1-2
07.02
Oil-change intervalls
2.1 / 98
07.03
Lubricant recommendation
1.1 / 99
12
07.04
Lubrication schedule
2.2 / 99
07.05
Maintenance of bearings
1.1 / 00
1-2
07.06
Maintenance schedule
3.2 / 97
07.07
Motor maintenance
3.2 / 99
07.08
Eddy current brake
2.1 / 99
07.09
Slewing ring maintenance, lubrication and storage
3.2 / 99
13
00.00
ausgabe5.doc
00.00
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.5 / 02
19.02.

Chapter
Edition
Page
07
07.10
Steel structure
3.2 / 99
07.11
Monitoring of forged load hooks
2.2 / 99
07.12
FN slewing gear
1.1 / 00
18
07.13
Brake for FN slewing gear size M60
1.1 / 00
14
07.14
Hoist winch 37 / 66 / 76 / 102 WB
3.1 / 00
07.17
Hoist winch gearing (Range transmission)
3.1 / 00
07.21
Shoe brake SB technical instructions
1.1 / 00
07.22
Shoe brake SB mounting/operating instructions
1.1 / 00
18
07.23
Sheave checking
1.1 / 00
07.24
Notes on handling wire ropes
1.1 / 98
17
07.26
Electrical equipment
2.2 / 98
07.30
Slipring body
2.2 / 98
07.31
Version E Travelling mechanism gear
2.2 / 99
07.32
Version E Travelling mechanism brakes
2.2 / 99
13
07.33
Version E Cable drum motor
2.2 / 99
13
08
Crane dismantling
08.64
Dismantling of the tower sections
1.2 / 99
08.68
Version A dismantling of the crane substructure
2.2 / 99
08.72
Version E dismantling of the crane substructue
2.2 / 99
12
08.76
Version F dismantling of the crane substructure
2.2 / 99
00.00
ausgabe5.doc
00.00
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.5 / 02
19.02.

Chapter
Edition
Page
09
Accessories
09.01
Version D building anchorage
1.2 / 00
16
09.85
Weights of upper crane for climbing process
3.1 / 00
09.90
Tower section TSK (for crane climbing with SE)
1.2 / 00
09.91
Assembling the external climbing unit (SE 211 / 212 / 213)
1.2 / 97
15
09.94
Hydraulik system (of external climbing unit SE)
1.1 / 97
14
09.95
Climbing process (with external climbing unit SE)
1.1 / 97
19
09.97
Climbing down process (external climbing unit SE)
1.1 / 97
16
40
Appendix
40.10
Counterweight block BG 1.45 t ( 3 200 lbs)
1.1 / 00
12
40.11
Counterweight block BG 3.1 t ( 6 800 lbs)
1.1 / 00
13
40.17
Foundation block BF 6.6 t ( 14 550 lbs)
1.1 / 00
12
40.18
Base ballast BZ 6.6 t (14 550 lbs)
1.1 / 00
12
2.1 / 98
16
Load monitoring unit (instruction manual)

Circuit diagram
Machine card
Rope certificates
50
Current provisions and national regulations
50.01
Extract of rules for accident prevention tower cranes
00.00
ausgabe5.doc
00.00
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
14.03.
00.01 1/1 Safety rules for Crane Operators

No one but an authorized person shall enter
the crane cab.
The operator shall recognize signals only from
the person supervising the lift, or an authorized
signal man.
Do not lift bucket or load after machine has

been standing during rainy weather without
riding the brakes to evaporate moisture before
handling load.
Do not engage master clutch until you are sure
that everything is in the clear and in neutral.
If a warning signal is furnished, it shall be

sounded each time before traveling and when
load approaches near or over workmen.
Do not travel over rough ground with a high

boom.
The proper party shall be notified of the need

for adustment and repairs as soon as if
becomes known.
Do not back up with boom high without first

making sure that ground is level and free of
obstructions.
Chains and ropes used for handling the load

must be straight and free from twists and
kinks. Knots shall not be used to shorten chain
or rope.
The operator shall make sure, either by
personal observaton or from signals, that the
load is well secured and balanced before it is
lifted kore than a few inches off the ground.
Sudden starts and stops should be avoided.
When handling heavy loads, stability and
strength shall be checked by hoisting the load
a few inches and holding it off the ground with
the brake.
Swing speed shall be controlled so that the
load does not svving out beyond the radius of
which it con be handled safely.
Do not drag load sideways by swinging.
Do not travel with load swinging back and forth
as it may cause crane to tip. Use tagline to
keep swinging out of load.
Do not leave crane or shovel with bucket or
load suspended in air.
00.01
c:\eigene dateien\betriebsanleitungen\sprache\vorwort\safety rules.doc
00.01
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
Operating manual
SK / SN / SMK - US
1.1 / 00
14.03.
00.02 1/1 Indroduction

Owners, Users and Operators
Terex Peiner Cranes appreciates your choise
of our machine for your application. our
number one priority is user safety which is best
achieved by our joint efforts. We feel that you
make a major contribution to safety if you as
the equipment users and operators:
Comply with OSHA, Federal, State and

Local regulations.
Read, understand and follow the

instructions in this and other manuals
supplied with this machine.
Use good, safe work practices in

common sense way.
Only have trained operators directed

by informed and knowledgeable
supervision running the machine.
Note:
OSHA prohibits the alteration or modification of
thes crane without written manufcaturers
approval. Use only factory approved parts to
service or repair this crane.
If there is anything in this manual that is not
clear or which you believe should be added,
please send your comments to
TEREX PEINER GmbH, Gottbillstrae 1-7,
54294 Trier Germany or contact us by
telephone 0049-651-81008-0.
Thank You!
00.02
c:\eigene dateien\betriebsanleitungen\sprache\vorwort\indroduction.doc
00.02
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK, SN, SMK, SMH
2.1 / 97
18.04.
00.03 1/11 Preface

This operating manual is designed to familiarize the user with the tower crane and its designated use.
The operating manual contains important information on how to operate the tower crane safely,
properly and most efficiently. Observing the instructions of the operating manual helps to avoid
danger, to reduce repair costs and downtimes and to increase the reliability and life of the tower
crane.
The operating manual is to be supplemented by the respective national rules and regulations for
accident prevention and environmental protection.
The operating manual must always be available wherever the tower crane is in use.
This operating manual must be read and applied by any person in charge of carrying out work with
and on the tower crane, such as
erection and dismantling including setting the safety equipment
operation
maintenance (servicing, inspection, repair)
In addition to the operating manual to the mandatory rules and regulations for accident prevention and
environmental protection in the country and place of use of the tower crane, the generally recognized
technical rules for safe and proper working must also be observed.
Fundamental safety instructions

Warnings and symbols
The following signs and designations are used in the manual to designate instructions of particular
importance.
Danger
refers to orders and prohibitions designed to prevent injury or extensive damage.
! Attention
refers to special information and/or orders + prohibitions directed towards preventing

damage.
Note:
refers to special information on how to use the tower crane.
Chapter (...)
refers to further information given in the chapter which is named just behind (...).
00.03
c:\eigene dateien\betriebsanleitungen\sprache\vorwort\vorwort_e1.doc
00.03
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
Operating manual
SK, SN, SMK, SMH
2.1 / 97
18.04.
00.03 2/11 Preface

Basic operation and designated use
Check / revision note *
***
The tower crane has been built in accordance with state-of-the-art

standards and the recognized safety rules. Nevertheless, its use may
constitute a risk to life and limb of the user or of third parties, or cause
damage to the machine and to other material property.
***
The tower crane must only be used in technically perfect condition in

accordance with its designated use and the instructions set out in the
operating manual, and only by safety-conscious persons who are fully
aware of the risks involved in operation. Any functional disorders,
especially those affecting safety, should therefore be rectified
immediately.
The tower crane is designed exclusively for the lifting and lowering
and the horizontal transport of loads freely suspended from the load
hook. The load may be picked up only from a firm base.
Operating the machine within the limits of its designated use also
involves observing the instructions set out in the operating manual
and complying with the inspection and maintenance directives.
Organizational measures
The operating manual must always be at hand at the place of use of
the tower crane (in the tool compartment or tool-box provided for that
purpose).
**
***
**
In addition to the operating manual, observe and instruct the user in

all other generally applicable legal and other mandatory regulations
relevant to accident prevention and environment protection.
These compulsory regulations may also deal with the handling of
hazardous substances, issuing and/or wearing of personal protective
equipment, or traffic regulations.
**
*
**
***
The operating manual must be supplemented by instructions

covering the duties involved in supervising and notifying special
organizational features, such as job organization, working sequences
or the personnel entrusted with the work.
Product-relevant / Repetition essential as special safety warning/concrete safety warning

Information for the user enterprise and its personnel authorized to give instructions
Instructions for the operating personnel
00.03
00.03
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
Operating manual
SK, SN, SMK, SMH
2.1 / 97
18.04.
00.03 3/11 Preface

Organizational measures (continuation)
Personnel entrusted with work on the tower crane must have read the
operating manual and in particular the chapter on safety before
beginning work. Reading this manual after work has begun is too late.
This applies especially to persons working only occasionally on the
machine.
**
***
**
Check constantly that the personnel is carrying out the work in

compliance with the operating manual and paying attention to risks
and safety factors.
***
***
Observe all safety instructions and warnings attached to the tower

crane.
**
***
In the event of safety-relevant modifications to the tower crane or

changes in its behaviour during operation, stop the tower crane
immediately and report the malfunction to the competent
authority/person.
**
Never make any modifications, additions or conversions which might

affect safety without the approval of the supplier/manufacturer. This
also applies to the installation and adjustment of safety devices as
well as to welding work on lead-bearing elements.
Spare parts must comply with the technical requirements specified
by the supplier/manufacturer. Spare parts from original equipment
manufacturers can be relied upon to do so. The user must compare
the data in the spare parts catalogue prior to installation of a spare
part.
**
Replace hydraulic hoses and pneumatic lines within stipulated and

appropriate intervals even if no safety-relevant defects have been
detected.
**
Prescribed intervals for routine checks and inspections must be

adhered to (cf. operating manual).
For the execuition of maintenance work, tools and workshop
equipment adapted to the task on hand are absolutely indispensable.
*
**
***

00.03
00.03
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
Operating manual
SK, SN, SMK, SMH
2.1 / 97
18.04.
00.03 4/11 Preface

Selection and qualification of personnel - basic responsibilities
Any work on/with the tower crane must be executed by reliable
personnel only.
Statutory minimum age limits must be observed.
**
Employ only trained or instructed staff and set out clearly the
individual responsibilities of the personnel for operation, transport,
assembly, inspection, maintenance, repair and dismantling.
**
Make sure that only authorized personnel works on the tower crane.
**
Define the crane operators responsibilities - also with regard to

observing traffic regulations - giving the operator the authority to
refuse instructions by third parties that are contrary to safety.
**
Do not allow persons to be trained or instructed or persons taking

part in a general training course to work on or with the tower crane
without being permanently supervised by an experienced person.
**
***
Work on the electrical system and equipment of the tower crane

must be carried out only by a skilled electrician or by instructed
persons under the supervision and guidance of a skilled electrician
and in accordance with electrical engineering rules and regulations.
Work on mechanical components, such as gearboxes, chassis,
braking and steering systems, may be carried out by specially trained
personal only.
**
***
Work on hydraulic systems must be carried out only by personnel

with special knowledge and experience of hydraulic or pneumatic
equipment.
*
Product-relevant /
Repetition essential as special safety warning/concrete safety warning
**
*** Instructions for the operating personnel
00.03
00.03
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
Operating manual
SK, SN, SMK, SMH
2.1 / 97
18.04.
00.03 5/11 Preface

Safety instructions governing specific operational phases
Operation
Observe the regulations applicable to the respective location.
Prior to starting work, get to know the on-site working environment
includes, for example, obstructions in the working and driving range,
the load capacity of the soil and any barriers needed to separate the
site from the area accessible to the general public.
Take the necessary precautions to ensure that the tower crane is
used only when in a safe and reliable state.
**
***
Before starting up or setting the tower crane in motion, make sure

that nobody is at risk.
Operate the tower crane only if all protective and safety-oriented
devices, emergency shut-off equipment are in place and fully
functional.
**
***
Never operate the crane in any way that might be prejudicial to safety.
During start-up and shut-down procedures always watch the
indicators in accordance with the operating manual.
The crane operator must always have a good view of the working
range and the load. In poor visibility of darkness, adequate lighting
must be provided on the site.
Never work in any way that might prejudice the stability of the tower
crane. The crane steering system must not be switched off when a
load is suspended from the hook.
**
***
The fastening of loads and the instructing of crane operators should

be entrusted to experienced persons only. The marshaller giving the
instructions must be within sight or sound of the operator.#
***
*
**
***
Check the tower crane at least once per working shift for obvious
damage and defects. Report any changes (incl. changes in working
behaviour) to the competent organization/person immediately and
lock it.
00.03
00.03
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
Operating manual
SK, SN, SMK, SMH
2.1 / 97
18.04.
00.03 6/11 Preface

(continuation)

Operation
In the event of malfunctions, stop the tower crane immediately and
lock it. Have any defects rectified immediately.
***
Always keep tools and loose objects in a safe place.

Keep all handles, steps, handrails, platforms, landings and ladders
free from dirt, snow and ice.
Crane operation must be stopped whenever wind forces are
prejudicial to safety. The maximum wind velocity at which the tower
crane may be operated is 20 m/s (66 ft/s) or 72 km/h (45 mph),
corresponding to wind force 8. It should be borne in mind that gusts of
wind may reach as much as
20 m/s (66 ft/s) even with a moderate wind velocity of 12 to 13 m/s
(39 to 43 ft/s), corresponding to wind force 6).
When leaving the tower crane, always secure it against inadvertent
and unauthorized use and ensure that it is left in the state specified in
the operating manual.
Any other or farther-reaching use, such as:
pulling away loads that are not standing free,
horizontal movement of loads that are not freely suspended,
increasing the load after it has already been lifted from the firm
ground,
swinging or vibrating the load,
any loading beyond the authorized load rating,
oblique pulling,
carrying persons on the load or on the load-holding device
is not a designated use and is accordingly prohibited.
*
**
***

00.03
00.03
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK, SN, SMK, SMH
2.1 / 97
18.04.
00.03 7/11 Preface

(continuation)

Transporting the tower
crane
Maintenance of the
tower crane
***
Prior to transport, check that the transport devices (self-erecting crane), such
as axles, brakes, steering, signal and lighting systems, are in working order.
Prior to transporting the tower crane always check that the accessories are
safely stowed away and that all loose parts are fixed.
When driving on any public highways, tracks or places, observe the valid
regulations and ensure in advance that the tower crane complies with
regulations authorizing the use of vehicles for road traffic.
When driving through underpasses, bridges or tunnels or below overhead

power lines, always ensure that there is adequate clearance (headroom).
Never drive with the suspension mechanism transversely positioned.

Always keep well clear of building pits and slopes.
Special work in conjunction with utilizationof the slewing tower crane and
maintenance and repairs during operation; disposal of parts and
consumables.
Observe the adjusting, maintenance and inspection activities and intervals set
out in the operating manual, including information on the replacement of parts
and equipment. These activities may be executed by skilled personnel only.
Brief operating personnel before beginning special operations and

maintenance work, and appoint a person to supervise the activities.
In any work concerning the operation, conversion or adjustment of the tower

crane and its safety-oriented devices or any work related to inspection,
maintenance and repair, always observe the start-up and shut-down
procedures set out in the operating manual and the information on
maintenance work.
**
***
*
**
***

00.03
00.03
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
Operating manual
SK, SN, SMK, SMH
2.1 / 97
18.04.
00.03 8/11 Preface

(continuation)

Maintenance of the tower crane (continuation)
Ensure that the maintenance area is adequately secured.
**
***
If the tower crane is completely shut down for maintenance and repair
work, it must be secured against inadvertent starting by:
locking the principal control elements and removing the ignition
key
and/or
attaching a warning sign to the main switch.
For carrying out overhead assembly and maintenance work always
use specially designed or otherwise safety-oriented ladders and
working platforms. Never use machine parts as a climbing aid.
If safety devices have to be dismantled in assembly, maintenance or
repair work, they must be reinstalled and checked immediately on
conclusion of the work.
***
To avoid the risk of accidents, individual parts and large assemblies

being moved for replacement purposes should be carefully attached
to lifting tackle and secured. Use only suitable and technically perfect
lifting gear and suspension systems with adequate lifting capacity.
Never work or stand under suspended loads.
***
Always tighten any screwed connections that have been loosened

during maintenance and repair.
***
Before cleaning the tower crane with water, steam-jet (high-pressure

cleaning) or detergents, cover or tape up all openings which - for
safety and functional reasons - must be protected against water,
steam or detergent penetration. Special care must be taken with
electric motors and switchgear cabinets, limit switches, ball bearings
and slewing ring.
***
After cleaning, remove all covers and tapes applied for that purpose.
*
**
***

00.03
00.03
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
Operating manual
SK, SN, SMK, SMH
2.1 / 97
18.04.
00.03 9/11 Preface

(continuation)

Maintenance of the tower crane (continuation)
Rectify any defects immediately. Check that all safety devices are in
working order. Check that hydraulic and pneumatic lines are not
leaking.
After cleaning, examine all electrical, hydraulic and pneumatic lines
for chafe marks and damage.
**
***
Ensure that all consumables and replaced parts are disposed of

safely and with minimum environmental impact.
Warning of special dangers

Electric energy
**
***
Use only original fuses with the specified current rating.

Keep an adequate distance from overhead power lines with the tower
crane. When working close to overhead power lines, the tower crane
and its load must not come close to the lines. Keep informed of
prescribed safety clearances.
After contacting power lines:
remain in the tower crane,
drive the tower crane out of the danger zone
warn uninvolved persons not to come nearer or touch the tower
crane,
have the voltage switched off,
never leave the tower crane until the contacted/damaged line has
been
switched off with absolute certainty.
**
***
*
**
***
Work on electrical systems or equipment may only be carried out by

a skilled electrician himself or by specially instructed personnel under
the control and supervision of such an electrician and in accordance
with the applicable electrical engineering rules.

00.03
00.03
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK, SN, SMK, SMH
2.1 / 97
18.04.
00.03 10/11 Preface

Warning of special dangers (continuation)
Electric energy (continuation)
If provided for in the regulations, the power supply to parts of
machines and plants, on which maintenance work is to be carried out
must cut off.
***
Before starting work, check the de-energized parts for the presence
of power and ground or short-circuit them in addition to insulating
adjacent live parts and elements.
**
***
The electrical equipment of a tower crane is to be inspected at

regular intervals. Defects, such as loose connections or damaged
cables, must be rectified immediately.
Necessary work on live parts and elements must be carried out only
in the presence of a second person - with whom constant visual and
verbal contact must be ensured - who can cut off the power supply in
case of danger by actuating the emergency shut-off or main power
switch. Secure the working area with a red-and-white safety chain
and a warning sign. Use insulated tools only.
**
***
Before starting work on high-voltage assemblies and after cutting out

the power supply, the feeder cable must be grounded and
components, such as capacitors, short-circuited with a grounding
rod.
Hydraulic and pneumatic equipment

Work on hydraulic and pneumatic equipment may be carried out only
by persons with special know-how and experience in hydraulic
systems.
**
***
**
***
Check all lines, hoses and screwed connections regularly for leaks
and obvious damage. Repair damage immediately. Splashed oil may
cause injury, environmental pollution and fire.
***
*
**
***
Depressurize all system sections and pressure pipes (hydraulic

system, compressed air system) to be removed in accordance with
the specific instructions for the unit concerned before carrying out any
repair work.
00.03
00.03
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK, SN, SMK, SMH
2.1 / 97
18.04.
00.03 11/11 Preface

Warning of special dangers (continuation)
Hydraulic and pneumatic equipment (continuation)
Hydraulic and compressed-air lines must be laid and fitted properly.
Ensure that no connections are interchanged. The fittings, lengths
and quality of the hoses must comply with the technical
requirements.
***
Noise
During operation, all sound baffles on the tower crane must be
closed.
***
Oil, grease and other chemical substances

**
***
When handling oil, grease and other chemical substances, observe

the product-related safety and environmental protection regulations.
***
Be careful when handling hot consumables (risk of burning or

scalding).
*
**
***

00.03
00.03
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
Operating manual
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
23.03.
01.00 1/1 Identification plate

When making technical inquires as well as
when ordering spare parts, refer to the crane
model, the serial number of the crane and the
year of manufacture.
All these datas you can see on the
identification plate in the operator's cab.
01.00
c:\eigene dateien\betriebsanleitungen\sprache\englisch\sk_sn\kp01\kp0100.doc
01.00
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
12.12.
01.01 1/1 Tower crane overview and nomenclature
1
2
3
4
5
6
Version: A
01.01
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Foundation anchors FF
Spread foundation
Undercarriage U
Foundation block BF
Movable undercarriage UF
Travel bogies (driven and nondriven)
with rail-clamps
Tower section TSV
Central ballast BZ
Tower section TS
Climbing section SE
Climbing traverse
Climbing hydraulic
Slewing ring
Slewing gear
Turntable
Counterjib I
Counterjib II
Counterweight BG
Hoisting gear
Electrical panels
Counterjib suspension
Tower top
Operator's cab
Rear jib suspension
A-frame
Front jib suspension
Jib section I VIII
Jib tip X
Inner / Outer trolley
Load hook
Trolley traveling gear
Gearstep monitoring
Load torque limiter
d:\eigene dateien\betriebsanleitungen\sprache\englisch\sk575\kp01\kp0101.doc
01.01
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
2.2 / 02
19.02.
01.02 1/4 Lifting capacities

4-part double trolley max. capacity 32.0 t / 70.5 kips
Jib
L9
L8
70.5
32.0
70.5
32.0
70.5 32.0
70.5
32.0
70.5
32.0
70.5
32.0
70.5
32.0
70.5
32.0
70.5
28.9
63.7
29.9
66.0
32.0
70.5 32.0
70.5
32.0
70.5
32.0
70.5
32.0
70.5
32.0
70.5
32.0
70.5
18.0
59'-1''
23.1
50.9
24.0
52.8
28.1
61.9 30.2
66.6
32.0
70.5
32.0
70.5
32.0
70.5
32.0
70.5
32.0
70.5
21.0
68'-11''
19.1
42.0
19.8
43.6
23.3
51.3 25.1
55.3
27.2
59.9
28.8
63.4
29.3
64.6
30.2
66.6
30.9
68.0
23.0
75'-6''
17.0
37.4
17.7
38.9
20.8
45.9 22.5
49.5
24.3
53.7
25.8
56.9
26.3
58.0
27.1
59.8
27.7
61.1
25.0
82'-0''
15.3
33.6
15.9
35.0
18.8
41.4 20.3
44.7
22.0
48.5
23.3
51.4
23.8
52.5
24.5
54.1
25.1
55.3
28.0
91'-10''
13.2
29.1
13.7
30.3
16.3
36.0 17.7
38.9
19.2
42.3
20.4
44.9
20.8
45.8
21.4
47.3
21.9
48.3
30.0
98'-5''
12.0
26.5
12.6
27.7
15.0
33.0 16.2
35.7
17.6
38.9
18.7
41.3
19.1
42.2
19.7
43.5
20.2
44.5
34.0
38.2
kips
L1
32.0
kips
L2
49'-2''
kips
L3
39'-4''
kips
L4
15.0
kips
L5
12.0
kips
L6
[ft]
kips
L7
[m]
kips
kips
111'-7''
10.2
22.4
10.6
23.4
12.7
28.1 13.8
30.5
15.1
33.3
16.1
35.4
16.4
36.1
16.9
37.3
17.3
35.0 114'-10''
9.8
21.5
10.2
22.5
12.3
27.0 13.3
29.4
14.5
32.1
15.5
34.1
15.8
34.9
16.3
36.0
16.7
36.9
121'-5''
9.0
19.9
9.5
20.8
11.4
25.1 12.4
27.3
13.6
29.9
14.4
31.8
14.7
32.5
15.2
33.6
15.6
34.4
14.6
32.2
37.0
39.0 127'-11''
8.4
18.5
8.8
19.3
10.6
23.4 11.6
25.5
12.7
27.9
13.5
29.7
13.8
30.4
14.3
31.4
40.0
131'-3''
8.1
17.8
8.5
18.6
10.3
22.6 11.2
24.6
12.2
27.0
13.1
28.8
13.4
29.4
13.8
30.4
43.0
141'-1''
7.3
16.0
7.6
16.8
9.3
20.4 10.1
22.3
11.1
24.5
11.9
26.2
12.2
26.8
12.6
27.7
44.0
144'-4''
7.0
15.4
7.4
16.2
9.0
19.8
9.8
21.6
10.8
23.8
11.5
25.4
11.8
26.0
12.2
26.9
45.0
147'-8''
6.8
14.9
7.1
15.7
8.7
19.2
9.5
21.0
10.5
23.1
11.2
24.7
11.4
25.2
47.0
154'-2''
6.3
13.9
6.6
14.6
8.2
18.0
9.0
19.7
9.9
21.7
10.6
23.3
10.8
23.8
49.0
160'-9''
5.9
13.0
6.2
13.7
7.7
16.9
8.4
18.6
9.3
20.5
10.0
22.0
10.2
22.5
50.0
164'-0''
5.7
12.6
6.0
13.3
7.5
16.4
8.2
18.1
9.0
19.9
9.7
21.4
53.0 173'-11''
5.2
11.4
5.5
12.1
6.8
15.0
7.5
16.6
8.3
18.3
8.9
19.7
54.0
177'-2''
5.0
11.1
5.3
11.7
6.6
14.6
7.3
16.1
8.1
17.9
8.7
19.2
55.0
180'-5''
4.9
10.7
5.1
11.3
6.4
14.2
7.1
15.7
7.9
17.4
57.0
187'-0''
4.6
10.1
4.8
10.7
6.1
13.4
6.7
14.8
7.5
16.5
59.0
193'-7''
4.3
9.5
4.6
10.0
5.8
12.7
6.4
14.1
7.1
15.7
60.0 196'-10''
4.2
9.2
4.4
9.7
5.6
12.3
6.2
13.7
62.0
203'-5''
3.9
8.6
4.2
9.2
5.3
11.7
5.9
13.0
64.0
210'-0''
3.7
8.1
3.9
8.6
5.0
11.1
5.6
12.3
65.0
213'-3''
3.6
7.9
3.8
8.4
4.9
10.8
68.0
223'-1''
3.3
7.2
3.5
7.6
4.5
10.0
69.0
226'-5''
3.2
6.9
3.4
7.4
4.4
9.7
70.0
229'-8''
3.1
6.7
3.3
7.2
72.0
236'-3''
2.9
6.3
3.1
6.8
74.0
242'-9''
2.7
6.0
2.9
6.4
75.0
246'-1''
2.6
5.8
77.0
252'-7''
2.5
5.4
79.0
259'-2''
2.3
5.1
80.0
262'-6''
01.02
dateien\betriebsanleitungen\sprache\englisch\sk575\kp01\kp0102.doc
01.02
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
2.2 / 02
19.02.

2-part single trolley max. capacity 16.0 t / 35.3 kips
Jib
L9
L8
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
18.0
59'-1''
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
21.0
68'-11''
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
23.0
75'-6''
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
25.0
82'-0''
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
28.0
91'-10''
14.9
32.8
15.2
33.4
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
30.0
98'-5''
13.7
30.2
14.0
30.9
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
34.0
111'-7''
11.9
26.1
12.1
26.7
14.5
31.9
15.2
33.6
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
35.0 114'-10''
11.5
25.2
11.7
25.8
14.0
30.9
14.7
32.5
15.9
35.0
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
121'-5''
10.7
23.6
10.9
24.1
13.1
29.0
13.8
30.5
14.9
32.8
15.9
35.0
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
16.0
35.3
39.0 127'-11''
10.1
22.2
10.3
22.7
12.4
27.2
13.0
28.7
14.0
30.9
15.0
33.0
15.1
33.2
15.3
33.8
16.0
35.3
40.0
131'-3''
9.8
21.5
10.0
22.0
12.0
26.4
12.6
27.8
13.6
30.0
14.5
32.0
14.7
32.3
14.9
32.8
16.0
35.3
43.0
141'-1''
8.9
19.7
9.1
20.1
11.0
24.3
11.6
25.6
12.5
27.6
13.4
29.5
13.5
29.7
13.7
30.2
44.0
144'-4''
8.7
19.1
8.9
19.6
10.7
23.6
11.3
24.9
12.2
26.9
13.0
28.7
13.1
28.9
13.3
29.4
45.0
147'-8''
8.4
18.6
8.6
19.0
10.4
23.0
11.0
24.3
11.9
26.2
12.7
28.0
12.8
28.2
13.0
28.7
47.0
154'-2''
8.0
17.6
8.2
18.0
9.9
21.8
10.4
23.0
11.3
24.9
12.1
26.6
12.2
26.8
49.0
160'-9''
7.6
16.7
7.8
17.1
9.4
20.7
9.9
21.9
10.7
23.7
11.5
25.3
11.6
25.5
50.0
164'-0''
7.4
16.3
7.6
16.7
9.2
20.3
9.7
21.4
10.5
23.1
11.2
24.7
11.3
24.9
53.0 173'-11''
6.9
15.1
7.0
15.5
8.6
18.8
9.0
19.9
9.8
21.5
10.5
23.0
54.0
177'-2''
6.7
14.8
6.9
15.1
8.4
18.4
8.8
19.5
9.6
21.1
10.2
22.5
55.0
180'-5''
6.6
14.4
6.7
14.8
8.2
18.0
8.6
19.0
9.3
20.6
10.0
22.0
57.0
187'-0''
6.3
13.8
6.4
14.1
7.8
17.2
8.3
18.2
9.0
19.7
59.0
37.0
193'-7''
6.0
13.2
6.1
13.5
7.5
16.5
7.9
17.4
8.6
18.9
60.0 196'-10''
5.8
12.9
6.0
13.2
7.3
16.1
7.8
17.1
8.4
18.5
62.0
203'-5''
5.6
12.3
5.7
12.6
7.0
15.5
7.4
16.4
64.0
210'-0''
5.4
11.8
5.5
12.1
6.7
14.9
7.1
15.7
65.0
213'-3''
5.2
11.6
5.4
11.8
6.6
14.6
7.0
15.4
68.0
223'-1''
4.9
10.9
5.1
11.1
6.2
13.7
69.0
226'-5''
4.8
10.6
5.0
10.9
6.1
13.5
70.0
229'-8''
4.7
10.4
4.9
10.7
6.0
13.2
72.0
236'-3''
4.6
10.0
4.7
10.3
74.0
242'-9''
4.4
9.6
4.5
9.9
75.0
246'-1''
4.3
9.5
4.4
9.7
77.0
252'-7''
4.1
9.1
79.0
259'-2''
4.0
8.8
80.0
262'-6''
3.9
8.6
01.02
kips
L1
16.0
kips
L2
49'-2''
kips
L3
39'-4''
kips
L4
15.0
kips
L5
12.0
kips
L6
[ft]
kips
L7
[m]
kips
kips
01.02
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
2.2 / 02
19.02.

4-part double trolley max. capacity 20.0 t / 44.1 kips
Jib
[m]
L9
[ft]
L8
kips
L7
kips
L6
kips
L5
kips
L4
kips
L3
kips
L2
kips
L1
kips
kips
18.0
59'-1''
20.0
44.1
20.0
44.1
20.0
44.1 20.0
44.1
20.0
44.1
20.0
44.1
20.0
44.1
20.0
44.1
20.0
44.1
32.0
105'-0''
10.4
22.9
12.2
26.9
14.1
31.1 15.2
33.5
16.5
36.4
17.4
38.4
18.2
40.1
18.8
41.5
19.4
42.8
33.0
108'-3''
10.0
22.0
11.8
26.0
13.6
30.0 14.7
32.4
16.0
35.3
16.8
37.0
17.6
38.8
18.2
40.1
18.8
41.5
34.0
111'-7''
9.7
21.4
11.4
25.1
13.2
29.1 14.2
31.3
15.4
34.0
16.2
35.7
17.0
37.5
17.6
38.8
18.2
40.1
35.0 114'-10''
9.4
20.7
11.0
24.3
12.8
28.2 13.8
30.4
14.9
32.9
15.7
34.6
16.5
36.4
17.0
37.5
17.6
38.8
121'-5''
8.8
19.4
10.3
22.7
12.0
26.5 13.0
28.7
14.0
30.9
14.8
32.6
15.5
34.2
16.0
35.3
16.5
36.4
39.0 127'-11''
8.2
18.1
9.7
21.4
11.3
24.9 12.2
26.9
13.2
29.1
13.9
30.6
14.6
32.2
15.1
33.3
15.6
34.4
40.0
131'-3''
8.0
17.6
9.4
20.7
11.0
24.3 11.8
26.0
12.9
28.4
13.5
29.8
14.2
31.3
14.7
32.4
43.0
141'-1''
7.3
16.1
8.7
19.2
10.1
22.3 10.9
24.0
11.8
26.0
12.5
27.6
13.1
28.9
13.6
30.0
44.0
144'-4''
7.1
15.7
8.4
18.5
9.8
21.6 10.6
23.4
11.5
25.5
12.2
26.9
12.8
28.2
13.2
29.1
45.0
147'-8''
6.9
15.2
8.2
18.1
9.6
21.2 10.3
22.7
11.2
24.7
11.8
26.0
12.5
27.6
47.0
154'-2''
6.6
14.6
7.8
17.2
9.1
20.1
9.8
21.6
10.7
23.6
11.3
24.9
11.9
26.2
49.0
160'-9''
6.2
13.7
7.4
16.3
8.7
19.2
9.4
20.7
10.2
22.5
10.7
23.6
11.3
24.9
50.0
37.0
164'-0''
6.1
13.5
7.2
15.9
8.4
18.5
9.1
20.1
10.0
22.1
10.5
23.2
53.0 173'-11''
5.6
12.3
6.7
14.8
7.9
17.4
8.5
18.7
9.3
20.5
9.8
21.6
54.0
177'-2''
5.5
12.1
6.6
14.6
7.7
17.0
8.3
18.3
9.1
20.1
9.6
21.2
55.0
180'-5''
5.4
11.9
6.4
14.1
7.5
16.5
8.2
18.1
8.9
19.6
57.0
187'-0''
5.1
11.3
6.2
13.7
7.2
15.9
7.8
17.2
8.5
18.7
59.0
193'-7''
4.9
10.8
5.9
13.0
6.9
15.2
7.5
16.5
8.2
18.1
60.0 196'-10''
4.8
10.6
5.8
12.8
6.8
15.0
7.4
16.3
62.0
203'-5''
4.6
10.1
5.5
12.1
6.5
14.3
7.1
15.7
64.0
210'-0''
4.4
9.7
5.3
11.7
6.3
13.9
6.8
15.0
65.0
213'-3''
4.3
9.5
5.2
11.5
6.1
13.5
68.0
223'-1''
4.1
9.0
4.9
10.8
5.8
12.8
69.0
226'-5''
4.0
8.8
4.8
10.6
5.7
12.6
70.0
229'-8''
3.9
8.6
4.7
10.4
72.0
236'-3''
3.8
8.4
4.6
10.1
74.0
242'-9''
3.6
7.9
4.4
9.7
75.0
246'-1''
3.5
7.7
77.0
252'-7''
3.4
7.5
79.0
259'-2''
3.3
7.3
80.0
262'-6''
01.02
01.02
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
2.2 / 02
19.02.

2-part single trolley max. capacity 10.0 t / 22.0 kips
Jib
[m]
L9
[ft]
L8
kips
L7
kips
L6
kips
L5
kips
L4
kips
L3
kips
L2
kips
L1
kips
kips
18.0
59'-1''
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0 10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
32.0
105'-0''
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0 10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
33.0
108'-3''
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0 10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
34.0
111'-7''
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0 10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
35.0 114'-10''
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0 10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
22.0
121'-5''
9.8
21.6
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0 10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
39.0 127'-11''
9.2
20.3
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0 10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
40.0
131'-3''
9.0
19.8
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0 10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
43.0
141'-1''
8.3
18.3
9.7
21.4
10.0
22.0 10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
44.0
144'-4''
8.1
17.9
9.4
20.7
10.0
22.0 10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
45.0
147'-8''
7.9
17.4
9.2
20.3
10.0
22.0 10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
47.0
154'-2''
7.5
16.5
8.8
19.4
9.9
21.8 10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
49.0
160'-9''
7.2
15.9
8.4
18.5
9.5
20.9 10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
50.0
10.0
22.0
37.0
164'-0''
7.0
15.4
8.2
18.1
9.3
20.5 10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
53.0 173'-11''
6.6
14.6
7.7
17.0
8.7
19.2
9.6
21.2
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
54.0
177'-2''
6.4
14.1
7.5
16.5
8.5
18.7
9.4
20.7
10.0
22.0
10.0
22.0
55.0
180'-5''
6.3
13.9
7.4
16.3
8.4
18.5
9.3
20.5
9.8
21.6
10.0
22.0
57.0
187'-0''
6.1
13.5
7.1
15.7
8.0
17.6
8.9
19.6
9.4
20.7
59.0
193'-7''
5.8
12.8
6.8
15.0
7.7
17.0
8.6
19.0
9.1
20.1
60.0 196'-10''
5.7
12.6
6.7
14.8
7.6
16.8
8.4
18.5
8.9
19.6
62.0
203'-5''
5.5
12.1
6.5
14.3
7.3
16.1
8.1
17.9
64.0
210'-0''
5.3
11.7
6.2
13.7
7.1
15.7
7.8
17.2
7.7
17.0
65.0
213'-3''
5.2
11.5
6.1
13.5
7.0
15.4
68.0
223'-1''
5.0
11.0
5.8
12.8
6.6
14.6
69.0
226'-5''
4.9
10.8
5.7
12.6
6.5
14.3
70.0
229'-8''
4.8 10.69
5.6
12.3
6.4
14.1
72.0
236'-3''
4.6
10.1
5.5
12.1
74.0
242'-9''
4.5
9.9
5.3
11.7
75.0
246'-1''
4.4
9.7
5.2
11.5
77.0
252'-7''
4.3
9.5
79.0
259'-2''
4.2
9.3
80.0
262'-6''
4.1
9.0
01.02
01.02
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
12.12.
01.05 1/1 Version A Hook heights

Crane on spread foundation
TS 213 (not climbable)
5900 / 19'-4 1/4''
TS 213.1
2150 / 7'-0 5/8''
HH
4.0 m
9.9 m
15.8 m
21.7 m
27.6 m
33.5 m
39.4 m
45.3 m
51.2 m
57.1 m
63.0 m
68.9 m
01.05
Tower elements
13'-1''
32'-6''
51'-10''
71'-2''
90'-6''
109'-11''
129'-3''
148'-7''
168'-0''
187'-4''
206'-8''
226'-1''
1 x TS 213.1
2 x TS 213.1
3 x TS 213.1
4 x TS 213.1
5 x TS 213.1
6 x TS 213.1
7 x TS 213.1
8 x TS 213.1
9 x TS 213.1
10 x TS 213.1
11 x TS 213.1
12 x TS 213.1
01.05
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.2 / 00
12.12.
01.06 1/2 Version A Forces and moments (on foundation)

102 WB 32.0 t / 70.5 kips (4-part)
CRANE REACTING FORCES
Tower
elements
IN OPERATION
CRANE LOAD
OUT OF OPERATION
CORNER POST LOAD
CRANE LOAD
CORNER POST LOAD
SIZE OF
FOUNDATION
HH
MX
MX
hF
[m]
[kNm]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kNm]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[m]
[m]
[ft kips]
[kips]
[kips]
[kips]
[kips]
[kips]
[ft kips]
[kips]
[kips]
[kips]
[kips]
[kips]
[ft]
[ft]
TS 213.1
[ft]
4.0
13'-1''
9.9
32'-6''
15.8
51'-10''
21.7
71'-2''
27.6
90'-6''
33.5
109'11''
39.4
129'-3''
45.3
148'-7''
51.2
168'-0''
57.1
187'-4''
63.0
206'-8''
68.9
226'-1''
1x
2x
3x
4x
5x
6x
7x
8x
9x
10 x
11 x
12 x
4339
759
10
151
-1617
1237
-4158
759
20
-1557
3200
806
34
-364
278
-3067
171
-350
4425
806
13
152
-1665
1254
-3909
806
36
-1487
3264
901
34
-374
282
-2883
181
-334
4538
854
16
152
-1743
1279
-3670
854
44
11
-1420
3347
1409
34
-392
288
-2707
192
10
-319
4681
901
18
153
-1834
1314
-3128
901
64
16
-1254
3452
203
34
-412
295
-2307
203
14
-282
4860
1362
34
154
-1939
1360
-2663
948
75
19
-1113
3584
306
35
-436
306
-1964
213
17
5188
1409
37
154
-2059
1417
-2131
995
87
3826
317
35
-463
319
-1572
224
5569
1456
39
155
-2195
1487
-1526
4107
327
35
-493
334
-1125
6010
1503
42
156
-2352
1601
4432
338
35
-529
360
6523
1551
45
156
-2533
4811
349
10
35
-569
7123
5253
1598
359
47
11
157
35
7829
1645
50
5774
370
11
8669
1692
6394
380
804
9.1
1.7
181 29'-10''
5'-7''
9.1
1.7
20
-214
102 29'-10''
5'-7''
1043
99
25
-763
241
234
22
-172
1785
1245
112
28
-898
1316
280
25
-202
1758
2636
1293
124
31
-1190
395
1944
291
28
-268
-2742
-616
1943
437
3597
2653
1340
301
135
30
34
8
158
-2986
2164
4685
1387
147
36
-671
486
3455
312
33
53
158
-3274
2428
5918
1434
12
36
-736
546
4365
322
Q/4
01.06
1.7
5'-7''
452
2.15 m (7'- 0 5/8'')
994
-950
HQ
9.1
223 29'-10''
22
I I N/4 I - I MX / (a !2) I I
1.7
5'-7''
1.7
HQ + HMT
9.1
244 29'-10''
5'-7''
1084
144 29'-10''
I N/4 I + I MX /(a !2) I
1.7
5'-7''
-250
MT /(2 a !2)
9.1
265 29'-10''
9.1
HMT =
1178
639
9.1
1.7
54 29'-10''
5'-7''
-289
9.1
1.7
-65 29'-10''
5'-7''
544
9.1
1.7
122 29'-10''
5'-7''
-1518
-341
848
191
1.7
5'-7''
37
-1887
1194
9.2
1.7
-424
268
30'-2''
5'-7''
159
40
-2305
1588
9.4
1.7
36
-518
357 30'-10''
5'-7''
9.2
30'-2''
MT = 420 kNm / 310 ft kips (L1 L4)

MT = 630 kNm / 465 ft kips (L5 L9)
01.06
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.2 / 00
12.12.

The jib must rotate freely when out of
operation.
Foundation Dimensions:
The minimum dimensions of the foundation
must ensure adequate stability.
Criterion: wide joint (uneven load
distribution).
= 5'-7'' (1.7 m)
hFmin
e
" b/3
(e = eccentricity)
e
= (Mx + (Q hF)) / (N + GF)
2
GF = hF b # g
3
3
2
(# = 2400 kg/m = 0.15 kips/ft ; g = 9.81 m/s
2
= 32.2 ft/s )
CAUTION!
The national regulations must be noticed
like the german DIN 1054. The maximum
permissible soil pressure must not be
exceeded. Also take care of ground
seepage danger!
Concrete quality: B 25
The reinforcement requirements for the
foundation of maximum size are shown in the
drawing:
"Foundation TS 213", in the appendix.
01.06
01.06
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
12.12.
01.07 1/1 Version A Hook heights

TS 213 (climbable)
TS 213.1
1980 / 6'-6''
5900 / 19'-4 1/4''
TSK 213
2150 / 7'-0 5/8''
2150 / 7'-0 5/8''
HH
01.07
Tower elements
6.0 m
19'-8''
11.9 m
39'-0''
17.8 m
58'-5''
23.7 m
77'-9''
29.6 m
97'-1''
35.5 m
116'-5''
41.4 m
135'-10''
47.3 m
155'-2''
53.2 m
174'-6''
59.1 m
193'-11''
65.0 m
213'-3''
70.9 m
232'-7''
1 x TS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
2 x TS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
3 x TS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
4 x TS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
5 x TS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
6 x TS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
7 x TS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
8 x TS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
9 x TS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
10 x TS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
11 x TS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
12 x TS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
01.07
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.2 / 00
12.12.

TS 213 (climbable) without climbing unit
102 WB 32.0 t / 70.5 kips (4-part)
CRANE REACTING FORCES
IN OPERATION
Tower
elements
CRANE LOAD
OUT OF OPERATION
CORNER POST LOAD
CRANE LOAD
CORNER POST LOAD
SIZE OF
FOUNDATION
HH
MX
MX
hF
[m]
[kNm]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kNm]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[m]
[m]
[ft kips] [kips]
[kips]
[kips]
[kips]
[kips] [ft kips] [kips]
[kips]
[kips]
[kips]
[kips]
[ft]
[ft]
TS 213
[ft]
6.0
19'-8''
1 x TS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
4366
791
11
151
-1633
1238
-4014
791
30
-1527
3220
178
34
-367
278
-2960
178
-343
11.9
39'-0''
2xTS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
4461
838
14
152
-1694
1258
-3832
838
39
10
-1470
3290
188
34
-381
283
-2826
188
-330
17.8
58'-5''
3xTS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
4585
885
16
152
-1777
1286
-3397
885
56
14
-1339
3382
199
34
-399
289
-2505
199
13
-301
23.7
77'-9''
4xTS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
4739
932
19
153
-1873
1326
-2977
932
68
17
-1212
746
9.0
1.7
3495
210
34
-421
298
-2196
210
15
-272
168
29'-6''
5'-7''
29.6
97'-1''
5xTS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
4970
1393
35
154
-1983
1375
-2490
980
79
20
-1064
574
9.0
1.7
3665
313
35
-446
309
-1836
220
18
-239
129
29'-6''
5'-7''
35.5
116'-5''
6xTS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
5316
1440
38
154
-2109
1437
-1933
1027
91
23
-892
379
9.1
1.7
3921
324
35
-474
323
-1426
231
20
-201
85 29'-10''
5'-7''
41.4
135'-10''
7xTS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
5719
1488
40
155
-2253
1512
-1303
1074
103
26
-729
9.1
1.7
4218
335
35
-506
340
-961
241
23
-164
-60 29'-10''
5'-7''
47.3
155'-2''
8xTS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
6186
1535
43
156
-2418
1651
2067
1277
116
29
-999
361
4562
345
10
35
-544
371
1524
287
26
-225
53.2
174'-6''
9xTS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
6731
1582
45
156
-2609
1818
2956
1324
128
32
-1303
4964
356
10
35
-587
409
2180
298
29
-293
59.1
193'-11''
10xTS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
7370
1629
48
157
-2831
2017
3961
1371
139
35
-1645
960
9.2
1.7
5436
366
11
35
-636
453
2921
308
31
-370
216
30'-2''
5'-7''
65.0
213'-3''
11xTS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
8125
1677
51
158
-3091
2253
5099
1419
151
38
-2032
1322
9.3
1.7
5992
377
11
36
-695
506
3761
319
34
-457
297
30'-6''
5'-7''
70.9
232'-7''
12xTS 213.1
1 x TSK 213
9029
1724
53
158
-3400
2538
6393
1466
163
41
-2469
1736
9.5
1.7
6659
388
12
36
-764
571
4715
330
37
-555
390
31'-2'
5'-7''
I N/4 I + I MX /(a !2) I
I I N/4 I - I MX / (a !2) I I
HQ
Q/4
HMT =
MT /(2 a !2)
HQ + HMT
2.15 m (7'- 0 5/8'')
01.08
1131
9.1
1.7
254 29'-10''
5'-7''
1051
9.1
1.7
236 29'-10''
5'-7''
896
9.1
1.7
201 29'-10''
5'-7''
-267
9.1
1.7
81 29'-10''
5'-7''
641
9.1
1.7
144 29'-10''
5'-7''
MT = 420 kNm / 310 ft kips (L1 L4)

MT = 630 kNm / 465 ft kips (L5 L9)
01.08
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.2 / 00
12.12.

The jib must rotate freely when out of
operation.
Foundation Dimensions:
The minimum dimensions of the foundation
must ensure adequate stability.
Criterion: wide joint (uneven load
distribution).
= 5'-7'' (1.7 m)
hFmin
e
" b/3
(e = eccentricity)
e
= (Mx + (Q hF)) / (N + GF)
2
GF = hF b # g
3
3
2
(# = 2400 kg/m = 0.15 kips/ft ; g = 9.81 m/s
2
= 32.2 ft/s )
CAUTION!
The national regulations must be noticed
like the german DIN 1054. The maximum
permissible soil pressure must not be
exceeded. Also take care of ground
seepage danger!
Concrete quality: B 25
The reinforcement requirements for the
foundation of maximum size are shown in the
drawing:
"Foundation TS 213", in the appendix.
01.08
01.08
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
12.12.
01.11 1/1 Version E Hook heights

Crane on rail mounted undercarriage UF 1021
TSV 213
9900 / 32'-6''
5900 / 19'-4 1/4''
TS 213.1
2150 / 7'-0 5/8''
2150 / 7'-0 5/8''
HH
01.11
9.1 m
29'-10''
15.0 m
49'-3''
20.9 m
68'-7''
26.8 m
87'-11''
32.7 m
107'-3''
38.6 m
126'-8''
44.5 m
146'-0''
50.4 m
165'-4''
56.3 m
184'-9''
62.2 m
204'-1''
68.1 m
223'-5''
Tower
elements
1 x TSV 213
1 x TS 213.1
1 x TSV 213
2 x TS 213.1
1 x TSV 213
3 x TS 213.1
1 x TSV 213
4 x TS 213.1
1 x TSV 213
5 x TS 213.1
1 x TSV 213
6 x TS 213.1
1 x TSV 213
7 x TS 213.1
1 x TSV 213
8 x TS 213.1
1 x TSV 213
9 x TS 213.1
1 x TSV 213
10 x TS 213.1
1 x TSV 213
Central ballast
Ballast blocks
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
66.0 t
145.5 kips
8 x 6.6 t
8 x 14.55 kips
8 x 6.6 t
8 x 14.55 kips
8 x 6.6 t
8 x 14.55 kips
8 x 6.6 t
8 x 14.55 kips
8 x 6.6 t
8 x 14.55 kips
8 x 6.6 t
8 x 14.55 kips
8 x 6.6 t
8 x 14.55 kips
8 x 6.6 t
8 x 14.55 kips
8 x 6.6 t
8 x 14.55 kips
8 x 6.6 t
8 x 14.55 kips
10 x 6.6 t
10 x 14.55 kips
01.11
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
12.12.
01.12 1/2 Version E Corner loads and horizontal forces

10.0 m / 32'-10''

102 WB 32.0 t / 70.5 kips (4-part)
10.0 m / 32'-10''
III
90
A
B
I
II
in operation
HH
Tower
elements
Corner
kN
9.1
29'-10''
15.0
49'-3''
20.9
68'-7''
26.8
87'-11''
32.7
107'-3''
38.6
126'-8''
44.5
146'-0''
1xTSV213
TS 213.1
1xTSV213
2xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
3xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
4xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
5xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
6xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
01.12
II
kips
kN
out of operation
III
kips
kN
HF
kips
kN
kips
kN
II
kips
kN
III
kips
kN
HF
kips
488
110
677
152
621
140
379
85
206
46
564
127
740
166
627
141
693
156
118
27
206
46
206
46
499
112
311
70
366
82
379
85
564
127
206
46
247
56
361
81
295
66
639
144
564
127
564
127
91
20
497
112
702
158
618
139
379
85
206
46
564
127
765
172
626
141
725
163
118
27
206
46
206
46
513
115
308
69
392
88
379
85
564
127
206
46
245
55
384
86
285
64
639
144
564
127
564
127
506
114
728
164
615
138
379
85
206
46
564
127
791
178
625
141
758
170
118
27
206
46
206
46
526
118
304
68
418
94
379
85
564
127
206
46
241
54
408
92
274
62
639
144
564
127
564
127
379
85
206
46
564
127
118
27
206
46
206
46
379
85
564
127
206
46
639
144
564
127
564
127
515
116
755
170
610
137
818
184
623
140
792
178
540
121
300
67
445
100
237
53
432
97
263
59
92
94
95
21
21
21
524
118
782
176
605
136
379
85
206
46
564
127
847
190
620
139
827
186
118
27
206
46
206
46
554
125
295
66
473
106
379
85
564
127
206
46
231
52
458
103
250
56
639
144
564
127
564
127
96
22
532
120
810
182
599
135
379
85
206
46
564
127
876
197
616
138
863
194
118
27
206
46
206
46
568
128
290
65
501
113
379
85
564
127
206
46
127
98
22
224
50
484
109
237
53
639
144
564
127
564
541
122
839
189
592
133
379
85
575
129
391
88
907
204
612
138
900
202
118
27
575
129
575
129
582
131
283
64
531
119
379
85
391
88
575
129
215
48
510
115
222
50
639
144
391
88
391
88
99
22
kN
kips
24
28
38
44
10
50
11
56
13
62
14
01.12
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
12.12.

10.0 m / 32'-10''

102 WB 32.0 t / 70.5 kips (4-part)
10.0 m / 32'-10''
III
90
A
B
I
II
in operation
HH
Tower
elements
Corner
kN
50.4
165'-4''
56.3
184'-9''
62.2
204'-1''
68.1
223'-5''
7xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
8xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
9xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
10xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
II
kips
kN
out of operation
III
kips
kN
HF
kips
kN
kips
kN
II
kips
kN
III
kips
kN
HF
kips
582
131
901
203
617
139
528
119
658
148
397
89
972
219
640
144
971
218
712
160
658
148
658
148
629
141
310
70
594
134
528
119
397
89
658
148
239
54
571
128
240
54
343
77
397
89
397
89
100
22
591
133
932
210
609
137
539
121
712
160
366
82
1006
226
635
143 1010
227
783
176
712
160
712
160
643
145
302
539
121
366
82
712
160
82
68
625
141
102
23
228
51
599
135
223
50
294
66
366
82
366
599
135
962
216
599
135
550
124
769
173
331
74
1040
234
629
141 1050
236
859
193
769
173
769
173
657
148
294
550
124
331
74
769
173
216
49
241
54
331
74
331
74
607
136
561
126
829
186
293
66
1076
940
211
829
186
829
186
672
561
126
293
66
829
186
203
182
41
293
66
293
66
66
657
148
627
141
206
46
994
223
589
132
242
622
140 1091
245
151
285
64
689
155
46
657
148
187
42
103
104
23
23
kN
kips
67
15
73
16
79
18
85
19
HF = max. horizontal force per corner
01.12
01.12
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
12.12.
01.13 1/1 Version E Hook heights

TS 213 (climbable)
TSK 213.1
9900 / 32'-6''
1 9 8/ 06 ' - 6 ' '
TSV 213
5900 / 19'-4 1/4''
TS 213.1
2 1 5 0 / 7 '- 0 5 /8 ''
/ 7' 0 5/8''
2150 / 7'-0 5/8''
Tower
elements
HH
Central ballast
Ballast blocks
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
66.0 t
145.5 kips
66.0 t
145.5 kips
66.0 t
145.5 kips
8 x 6.6 t
8 x 14.55 kips
8 x 6.6 t
8 x 14.55 kips
8 x 6.6 t
8 x 14.55 kips
8 x 6.6 t
8 x 14.55 kips
8 x 6.6 t
8 x 14.55 kips
8 x 6.6 t
8 x 14.55 kips
8 x 6.6 t
8 x 14.55 kips
8 x 6.6 t
8 x 14.55 kips
10 x 6.6 t
10 x 14.55 kips
10 x 6.6 t
10 x 14.55 kips
10 x 6.6 t
10 x 14.55 kips
1 x TSV 213
1xTSK213.1
01.13
11.1 m
36'-5''
17.0 m
55'-9''
1 x TS 213.1
22.9 m
75'-2''
2 x TS 213.1
28.8 m
94'-6''
3 x TS 213.1
34.7 m
113'10''
4 x TS 213.1
40.6 m
133'-2''
5 x TS 213.1
46.5 m
152'-7''
6 x TS 213.1
52.4 m
171'11''
7 x TS 213.1
58.3 m
191'-3''
8 x TS 213.1
64.2 m
210'-8''
9 x TS 213.1
70.1 m
230'-0''
10 x TS 213.1
01.13
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
12.12.

10.0 m / 32'-10''

102 WB 32.0 t / 70.5 kips (4-part)
10.0 m / 32'-10''
III
90
A
B
I
II
in operation
HH
Tower
elements
Corner
kN
11.1
36'-5''
17.0
55'-9''
22.9
75'-2''
26.8
94'-6''
34.7
113'-10''
40.6
133'-2''
46.5
152'-7''
1xTSV213
1xTSK213.1
TS 213.1
1xTSV213
1xTSK213.1
2xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
1xTSK213.1
3xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
1xTSK213.1
4xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
1xTSK213.1
5xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
1xTSK213.1
6xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
1xTSK213.1
01.14
II
kips
kN
out of operation
III
kips
kN
HF
kips
kN
kips
kN
II
kips
kN
III
kips
HF
kN
kips
495
111
689
155
624
140
386
87
217
49
568
128
752
169
630
142
707
159
131
29
217
49
217
49
507
114
314
71
378
85
386
87
568
128
217
49
250
56
372
84
295
66
641
144
568
128
568
128
92
21
504
113
714
161
621
140
386
87
217
49
568
128
778
175
629
141
740
166
131
29
217
49
217
49
521
117
311
70
404
91
386
87
568
128
217
49
247
56
396
89
285
64
641
144
568
128
568
128
513
115
741
167
617
139
386
87
217
49
568
128
804
181
628
141
774
174
131
29
217
49
217
49
535
120
307
69
431
97
386
87
568
128
217
49
243
55
420
94
274
62
641
144
568
128
568
128
521
117
768
173
612
138
386
87
217
49
568
128
832
187
626
141
808
182
549
123
302
68
458
103
238
54
444
100
262
59
93
94
96
21
21
22
131
29
217
49
217
49
386
87
568
128
217
49
641
144
568
128
568
128
128
530
119
795
179
606
136
386
87
217
49
568
861
194
623
140
844
190
131
29
217
49
217
49
562
126
297
67
486
109
386
87
568
128
217
49
232
52
470
106
249
56
641
144
568
128
568
128
128
97
22
539
121
823
185
600
135
386
87
217
49
568
891
200
619
139
880
198
131
29
217
49
217
49
576
129
292
66
515
116
386
87
568
128
217
49
224
50
496
112
235
53
641
144
568
128
568
128
547
123
852
192
593
133
386
87
596
134
386
87
922
207
615
138
917
206
131
29
596
134
596
134
590
133
285
64
545
123
386
87
386
87
596
134
215
48
523
118
220
49
641
144
386
87
386
87
98
100
22
22
kN
kips
25
29
40
46
10
52
12
58
13
64
14
01.14
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
12.12.

10.0 m / 32'-10''

102 WB 32.0 t / 70.5 kips (4-part)
10.0 m / 32'-10''
III
90
A
B
I
II
in operation
HH
Tower
elements
Corner
kN
52.4
171'-11''
58.3
191'-3''
64.2
210'-8''
70.1
230'-0''
7xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
1xTSK213.1
8xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
1xTSK213.1
9xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
1xTSK213.1
10xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
1xTSK213.1
II
kips
kN
out of operation
III
kips
kN
HF
kips
kN
kips
kN
II
kips
kN
III
kips
kN
HF
kips
555
125
882
198
585
132
502
113
647
145
357
80
955
215
610
137
956
215
707
159
647
145
647
145
605
136
278
62
575
129
502
113
357
80
647
145
205
46
550
124
204
46
297
67
357
80
357
80
134
945
212
546
123
735
165
358
80
230
637
813
183
735
165
735
165
147
303
609
102
143
8
68 639
137
597
102
1
652
144
546
123
358
80
735
165
227
51
612
138
220
49
280
63
358
80
358
80
136
976
219
558
125
793
178
322
72
237
630
890
200
793
178
793
178
150
295
600
106
142
8
66 671
135
605
105
6
666
151
558
125
322
72
793
178
215
48
641
144
203
46
225
51
322
72
322
72
613
138
100
8
227
589
132
569
128
854
192
283
64
973
219
854
192
854
192
158
569
128
283
64
854
192
41
165
37
283
64
283
64
109
2
681
153
285
111
140
0
64 704
201
45
670
151
245
623
184
231
240
250
101
102
104
105
23
23
23
24
kN
kips
69
16
75
17
81
18
87
20
HF = max. horizontal force per corner
01.14
01.14
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
12.12.
01.15 1/1 Version F Hook heights

Crane on stationary undercarriage U 1021
TSV 213
9900 / 32'-6''
5900 / 19'-4 1/4''
TS 213.1
2150 / 7'-0 5/8''
2150 / 7'-0 5/8''
Tower
elements
HH
01.15
1xTSV213
8.9 m
29'-2''
14.8 m
48'-7''
TS 213.1
1xTSV213
20.7 m
67'-11''
2xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
26.6 m
87'-3''
3xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
32.5 m
106'-8''
4xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
38.4 m
126'-0''
5xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
44.3 m
145'-4''
6xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
50.2 m
164'-8''
7xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
56.1 m
184'-1''
8xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
Ballast
BZ + BF
52.8 t
116.4
kips
52.8 t
116.4
kips
52.8 t
116.4
kips
52.8 t
116.4
kips
52.8 t
116.4
kips
52.8 t
116.4
kips
52.8 t
116.4
kips
52.8 t
116.4
kips
52.8 t
116.4
kips
BZ
BF
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
01.15
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
12.12.
01.16 1/2 Version F Corner loads and horizontal forces

10.0 m / 32'-10''

102 WB 32.0 t / 70.5 kips (4-part)
10.0 m / 32'-10''
III
90
A
B
I
II
HH
[m]
[ft]
8.9
29'-2''
14.8
48'-7''
20.7
67'-11''
26.6
87'-3''
32.5
106'-8''
38.4
126'-0''
44.3
145'-4''
in operation
Tower
elements
Corner
II
out of operation
III
HIO
II
III
HOO
[kN] [kips] [kN] [kips] [kN] [kips] [kN] [kips] [kN] [kips] [kN] [kips] [kN] [kips]
1xTSV213
TS 213.1
1xTSV213
2xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
3xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
4xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
5xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
6xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
01.16
509
114
697
157
637
143
394
89
220
49
580
130
749
168
637
143
697
157
133
30
220
49
220
49
509
114
321
72
381
86
394
89
580
130
220
49
35
268
60
381
86
321
72
655
147
580
130
580
130
520
117
724
163
634
143
394
89
220
49
580
130
772
174
634
143
724
163
133
30
220
49
220
49
520
117
316
71
406
91
394
89
580
130
220
49
268
60
406
91
316
71
655
147
580
130
580
130
520
117
724
163
634
143
394
89
220
49
580
130
772
174
634
143
724
163
133
30
220
49
220
49
520
117
316
71
406
91
394
89
580
130
220
49
268
60
406
91
316
71
655
147
580
130
580
130
36
37
510
115
749
168
593
133
394
89
220
49
580
130
787
177
593
133
749
168
133
30
220
49
220
49
510
115
270
61
426
96
394
89
580
130
220
49
232
52
426
96
270
61
655
147
580
130
580
130
37
521
117
779
175
587
132
394
89
220
49
580
130
813
183
587
132
779
175
133
30
220
49
220
49
521
117
263
59
454
102
394
89
580
130
220
49
228
51
454
102
263
59
655
147
580
130
580
130
38
532
120
809
182
581
131
394
89
220
49
580
130
840
189
581
131
809
182
133
30
220
49
220
49
532
120
255
57
483
109
394
89
580
130
220
49
39
224
50
483
109
255
57
655
147
580
130
580
130
543
122
841
189
574
129
394
89
220
49
580
130
868
195
574
129
841
189
133
30
220
49
220
49
543
122
246
55
512
115
394
89
580
130
220
49
218
49
512
115
246
55
655
147
580
130
580
130
39
[kN]
[kips]
10
12
17
20
23
26
29
01.16
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
12.12.

10.0 m / 32'-10''

102 WB 32.0 t / 70.5 kips (4-part)
10.0 m / 32'-10''
III
90
A
B
I
II
HH
[m]
[ft]
50.2
164'-8''
56.1
184'-1''
62.0
203'-5''
67.9
222'-9''
73.8
242'-2''
79.7
261'-6''
in operation
Tower
elements
Corner
II
out of operation
III
II
III
7xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
8xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
9xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
10xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
11xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
12xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
01.16
555
125
873
196
567
127
477
107
606
136
347
78
897
202
567
127
873
196
660
148
606
136
606
136
555
125
236
53
542
122
477
107
347
78
606
136
40
212
48
542
122
236
53
293
66
347
78
347
78
599
135
939
211
591
133
521
117
693
156
349
78
961
216
591
133
939
211
764
172
693
156
693
156
599
135
258
58
606
136
521
117
349
78
693
156
41
237
53
606
136
258
58
278
62
349
78
349
78
610
137
973
219
582
131
532
120
749
168
315
71
992
223
582
131
973
219
839
189
749
168
749
168
610
137
247
56
638
143
532
120
315
71
749
168
228
51
638
143
247
56
225
51
315
71
315
71
41
621
140 1008
227
572
129
543
122
810
182
277
62
1025
230
572
129 1008
227
920
207
810
182
810
182
621
140
235
53
670
151
543
122
277
62
810
182
218
49
670
151
235
53
166
37
277
62
277
62
42
666
150 1076
242
594
134
588
132
907
204
268
60
1091
245
594
134 1076
242
1039
234
907
204
907
204
666
150
255
57
737
166
588
132
268
60
907
204
240
54
737
166
255
57
136
31
268
60
268
60
43
10
710
160 1145
257
616
138
632
142 1007
226
257
58
1159
261
616
138 1145
257
1162
261 1007
226 1007
226
710
160
274
62
804
181
226
260
58
804
181
274
62
43
10
632
142
257
58 1007
101
23
257
58
257
[kN]
[kips]
32
35
38
41
44
10
46
10
58
01.16
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
12.12.
01.17 1/1 Version F Hook heights

TS 213 (climbable)
TSK 213.1
9900 / 32'-6''
1 9 8/ 06 ' - 6 ' '
TSV 213
5900 / 19'-4 1/4''
TS 213.1
2 1 5 0 / 7 '- 0 5 /8 ''
2150 / 7'-0 5/8''
2150 / 7'-0 5/8''
Tower
elements
1xTSV213
1xTSK213.1
HH
01.17
10.9 m
35'-9''
16.8 m
55'-1''
TS 213.1
22.7 m
74'-6''
2xTS 213.1
28.6 m
93'-10''
3xTS 213.1
34.5 m
113'-2''
4xTS 213.1
40.4 m
132'-7''
5xTS 213.1
46.3 m
151'-11''
6xTS 213.1
52.2 m
171''-3''
7xTS 213.1
58.1 m
190'-7''
8xTS 213.1
64.0 m
210'-0''
9xTS 213.1
69.9 m
229'-4''
10xTS 213.1
75.8 m
248'-8''
11xTS 213.1
Ballast
BZ + BF
BZ
BF
66.0 t
145.5 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
52.8 t
116.4 kips
66.0 t
145.5 kips
66.0 t
145.5 kips
79.2 t
174.6 kips
6 x 6.6 t t
6 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
6 x 6.6 t t
6 x 14.55 kips
6 x 6.6 t t
6 x 14.55 kips
8 x 6.6 t t
8 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
4 x 6.6 t t
4 x 14.55 kips
01.17
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
12.12.

10.0 m / 32'-10''

102 WB 32.0 t / 70.5 kips (4-part)
10.0 m / 32'-10''
III
90
A
B
I
II
HH
[m]
[ft]
in operation
Tower
elements
II
out of operation
III
HIO
II
III
HOO
10.9 1xTSV213
35'-9'' 1xTSK213.1
TS 213.1
16.8
1xTSV213
55'-1''
1xTSK213.1
2xTS 213.1
22.7
1xTSV213
74'-6''
1xTSK213.1
28.6
93'-10''
Corner
3xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
1xTSK213.1
4xTS 213.1
34.5
1xTSV213
113'-2''
1xTSK213.1
5xTS 213.1
40.4
1xTSV213
132'-7''
1xTSK213.1
6xTS 213.1
46.3
1xTSV213
151'-11''
1xTSK213.1
01.18
516
116
710
160
640
144
401
90
232
52
583
131
761
171
640
144
710
160
146
33
232
52
232
52
516
116
323
73
393
88
401
90
583
131
232
52
272
61
393
88
323
73
657
148
583
131
583
131
516
116
710
160
640
144
401
90
232
52
583
131
761
171
640
144
710
160
146
33
232
52
232
52
516
116
323
73
393
88
401
90
583
131
232
52
272
61
393
88
323
73
657
148
583
131
583
131
506
114
733
165
599
135
401
90
232
52
583
131
775
174
599
135
733
165
146
33
232
52
232
52
506
114
278
62
412
93
401
90
583
131
232
52
237
53
412
93
278
62
657
148
583
131
583
131
36
36
37
517
116
762
171
595
134
401
90
232
52
583
131
800
180
595
134
762
171
146
33
232
52
232
52
517
116
272
61
439
99
401
90
583
131
232
52
234
53
439
99
272
61
657
148
583
131
583
131
38
528
119
793
178
589
132
401
90
232
52
583
131
826
186
589
132
793
178
146
33
232
52
232
52
528
119
264
59
468
105
401
90
583
131
232
52
230
52
468
105
264
59
657
148
583
131
583
131
38
540
121
824
185
583
131
401
90
232
52
583
131
853
192
583
131
824
185
146
33
232
52
232
52
540
121
255
57
496
112
401
90
583
131
232
52
226
51
496
112
255
57
657
148
583
131
583
131
551
124
855
192
575
129
401
90
232
52
583
131
882
198
575
129
855
192
146
33
232
52
232
52
551
124
246
55
526
118
401
90
583
131
232
52
220
49
526
118
246
55
657
148
583
131
583
131
39
40
[kN]
[kips]
11
13
18
21
24
27
30
01.18
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
12.12.

10.0 m / 32'-10''

102 WB 32.0 t / 70.5 kips (4-part)
10.0 m / 32'-10''
III
90
A
B
I
II
in operation
HH
[m]
[ft]
Tower
elements
52.2
171'-3''
7xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
1xTSK213.1
58.1
190'-7''
64.0
210'-0''
69.9
229'-4''
75.8
248'-8''
Corner
II
out of operation
III
II
III
8xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
1xTSK213.1
9xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
1xTSK213.1
10xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
1xTSK213.1
11xTS 213.1
1xTSV213
1xTSK213.1
01.18
562
126
888
200
568
128
484
109
628
141
340
76
911
205
568
128
888
200
687
154
628
141
628
141
562
126
236
53
556
125
484
109
340
76
628
141
213
48
556
125
236
53
281
63
340
76
340
76
573
129
921
207
559
126
495
111
682
153
308
69
942
212
559
126
921
207
760
171
682
153
682
153
573
129
225
51
588
132
495
111
308
69
682
153
204
46
588
132
225
51
231
52
308
69
308
69
618
139
988
222
582
131
540
121
773
174
306
69
1007
226
582
131
988
222
870
196
773
174
773
174
618
139
247
56
653
147
540
121
306
69
773
174
228
51
653
147
247
56
209
47
306
69
306
69
40
41
42
629
141 1023
230
572
129
551
124
835
188
266
60
1040
234
572
129 1023
230
953
214
835
188
835
188
629
141
234
53
685
154
551
124
266
60
835
188
218
49
685
154
234
53
149
33
266
60
266
60
42
673
151 1092
245
594
134
595
134
933
210
257
58
1107
249
594
134 1092
245
1073
241
933
210
933
210
673
151
254
57
752
169
595
134
257
58
933
210
239
54
752
169
254
57
117
26
257
58
257
58
43
10
[kN]
[kips]
33
36
39
42
45
10
01.18
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.2 / 00
10.02.
02.01 1/1 Crane transport

The crane componets have been constructed
to be broken into modules to simplify packing
and handling for different means of transport
(railway carriages, containers, trucks etc.)
1. All components must be well secured to
the means of transportation.
2. Light modules must be placed on the top of
heavy ones.
3. To prevent damages to the painted
surfaces, place padded or wooden
separating material between the elements.
4. Make sure the crane components are not in
direct contact with the ground during the
unloading phases to prevent impurities
(sand, earth etc.) from entering the
mounting holes.
5. Do not use unsuitable means of transport
to move the crane parts, such as
bulldozers or lift trucks.
A detailed description of the weights and
dimensions of the TEREX PEINER crane
components is given in the following pages.
Before transporting crane, allways make

sure all auxiliary equipment is safety
stowed away.
Inspection of all loose parts fasteners.
Check transportation tie-downs.
While using public streets, observe the

applicable rules.
While passing underpasses, bridges,

tunnels be mindful of ample clearances.
02.01
02.01
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 01
02.02.
02.02 1/2 Packing list

Designation
Sketch
Jib Section I
Section II
Section III
Section IV
1
Section V
h
l
Section VI
Section VII
Section VIII
Jip tip X
2
Inner trolley
h
Outer trolley with load block
Tower top cpl.

l
Turntable cpl.
6
Support, railing, electrical panel
G2
l
Counterjib
b
h
G1
102 WB
8
Width
Hight
Weight
[ft]
[m]
[ft]
[m]
[ft]
[m]
[kips]
[t]
39'-0''
11.89
40'-6''
12.34
38'-10''
11.84
18'-8''
5.69
35'-0''
10.68
35'-5''
10.79
33'-6''
10.20
33'-5''
10.19
6'-8''
2.02
8'-2''
2.50
6'-6''
1.97
6'-6''
1.97
6'-6''
1.97
6'-6''
1.97
6'-6''
1.97
6'-6''
1.97
6'-6''
1.97
6'-6''
1.97
4'-6''
1.37
6'-7''
2.00
6'-11''
2.12
7'-3''
2.21
7'-7''
2.30
6'-10''
2.09
6'-11''
2.11
6'-4''
1.93
6'-3''
1.90
6'-2''
1.88
2'-11''
0.88
4'-7''
1.40
7.49
3.40
8.86
4.02
5.42
2.46
5.36
2.43
5.20
2.36
4.28
1.94
2.76
1.25
1.70
0.77
0.66
0.30
2.87
1.30
10'-10''
3.30
6'-7''
2.00
4'-7''
1.40
3.53
1.60
27'-1''
8.26
6'-5''
1.96
6'-6''
3.1
9.59
4.35
11'-9''
3.58
7'-1''
2.17
7'-5''
2.27
24.10
10.93
5'-5''
1.65
3'-7''
1.10
7'-2''
2.18
1.04
0.47
11'-8''
3.55
6'-7''
2.00
6'-5''
1.95
2.05
0.93
38'-10''
11.85
7'-5''
2.25
5'-11''
1.80
7.50
3.40
31'-1''
9.48
6'-8''
2.03
5'-8''
1.72
6.03
2.74
9'-2''
2.80
7'-3''
2.20
4'-11''
1.50
11.68
5.30
7'-6''
2.29
5'-5''
1.66
3'-3''
1.00
5.40
2.45
Cab
Length
Hoist winch
66 WB
02.02
c:\eigene dateien\betriebsanleitungen\sprache\englisch\sk575\kp02\kp0202.doc
02.02
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 01
02.02.
02.02 2/2 Packing list

Designation
Sketch
l
Counter jib ballast
10
Tower section TS 213.1
Length
h
b
h
11
Tower section TSV 213.1
12
Undercarriage with electrical

panel U 1021
h
l
Hight
Weight
Width
5'-11''
1.81
5'-11''
1.81
0'-8''
0.19
0'-8''
0.19
10'-4''
3.14
15'-4''
4.68
3.20
1.45
6.80
3.10
19'-6''
5.95
7'-10''
2.39
7'-10''
2.38
9.79
4.44
39'-4''
12.00
10'-4''
3.15
10'-4''
3.15
31.09
14.10
44'-0''
13.40
9'-6''
2.90
3'-9''
1.15
2'-8''
0.82
2'-11''
0.89
38.44
17.10
13
Travel bogie 2xF400
8'-2''
2.50
14
Central ballast block
13'-5''
4.50
6'-1''
2.05
1'-2''
0.40
14.55
6.60
15
Foundation block
9'-0''
3.00
3'-7''
1.20
2'-6''
0.75
14.55
6.60
16
Accessories
02.02
02.02
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
4.1 / 00
16.03.
03.01 1/2 Construction site and assembly preparation

The erection site of the tower crane must be
selected in such a way that safety distances
from the crane
to solid objects (min. 0.5 m / min. 1'-8'') and
buildings (
Chapter Site preparation
"Distance from buildings") and
to other tower cranes used on the
construction site (
Chapter Site
preparation "Safety distances between
cranes") as well as
to live electric lines (absolute proximity lines
Chapter Site preparation "Cranes
near electric lines") and
to traffic routes and construction site
access roads in accordance with current
provisions are adhered to.
Furthermore, the immediate vicinity must also
meet the requirements for installing the crane,
that is:
There must be sufficient space for the
storage of all crane elements required for
erection, as well as for unhampered
preassembly and final assembly of an
assembly crane (mobile crane).
The main power supply for the tower crane
should be routed in accordance with current
provisions.
To guarantee trouble-free erection and later
safe crane operation, the following
preparations must be made:
In good time before crane erection:
Check to ensure that all official regulations
have been complied with and that the
interests of third parties have been taken
account of. If necessary, exemption permits
must be obtained.
03.01
Note:
The design and construction of the foundation
must also comply with federal, state and local
building codes and regulations.
The foundation or the track system for the
tower crane must be constructed in
accordance with current provisions (
Chapter Site preparation "Version A foundation anchorage" or "Version E preparing the crane track"). Prepare
them before erection.
Ensure that adequate power supply is
available at the tower crane site (
Chapter Site preparation "Electrical

connections").
Even out access road(s) and the assembly
site at ground elevation. Ensure that the
subsoil has a sufficently high load-carrying
capacity for the carriage of heavy goods and
of the mobile crane.
Order a mobile crane with the necessary
assembly means for the day of erection (
Chapter Site preparation "Required

hook height of the assembly crane").
Request all crane elements required for
assembly, including the required test loads
for adjustment and acceptance of the
overload protection devices and the
necessarry concrete blocks for the
counterweight and base ballast for the day
of erection.
The test loads are:
- 100 % of the load at maximum jib length
- 100 % of the maximum load in quadruple
reeving
- 100 % of the maximum load at each gear
level
- 10 % of each of the loads given above as
an additional load (overload).
03.01
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
4.1 / 00
16.03.
03.01 2/2 Construction site and assembly preparation

Be present or represented when the tower
crane arrives, or appoint someone on site to
sign for the correct and complete
acceptance of the tower crane and
accessory equipment.Request an
experienced fitter (head of installation), a
crane driver and at least two experienced
helpers for the day of erection.
quantity of blocks must be available for the

specific jib length to be installed. The correct
quantity and weight of counterballast is the re
sponsibillty of the jobsite management. (
Chapter Crane Erection "Completing the

counterweight").
Provide the erection supervisor with the

necessary labor force and instruct such
persons to follow instructions.
A tower crane being erected in the rail trav

elling configuration requires concrete central
ballast. This ballast must be installed on the
undercarriage before erection of the tower
sections. The central ballast blocks should be
poured 28 days before the scheduled undercar
riage assembly date. Weigh the blocks after
curing to ensure accuracy.
Order barriers for cordoning off the

assembly area on the day of erection.
WARNING
The rail track assembly and power supply
system must be properly grounded before
crane erection begins. Failure to observe
this warning is exteremly dangerous and
could lead to an accident resulting in
serious injury or loss of life.
On the day of erection:
Have the delivered crane elements,
including the concrete blocks, checked by a
specialist fitter to ensure that they are in
proper condition.
Cordon off the assembly area.
BALLAST BLOCKS AND TEST WEIGHTS
Counterballast
All tower cranes require concrete ballast
blocks. These blocks must be prepared in time
to be fully cured before installation on the tower
crane. The blocks must be installed on the
counterjib immediately after installation of the
crane's jib assembly and should be poured 28
days before the scheduled jib installation date.
Weigh the blocks after curing to ensure
accuracy.
Central Ballast
Different tower heights and jib lengths require

different quantities and sizes of central ballast
blocks. The correct quantity of blocks must be
availabie for the specific tower height to be
installed. The correct quantity and weight of
central ballast is the responsibillty of the jobsite
management. (
Chapter Crane
Configurations "Version E (F) Hook
heights").
Test Weights
The crane must be tested, and the overload
protection system must be set to the crane
manufacturer's specified load limits, before the
crane can be put into service. Accurate test
weights, checked and certified as being within
the crane manufacturer's specified tolerance
range, must be provided for testing and
calibration. lf reinforced concrete blocks are to
be used as test weights, the blocks must be
poured 28 days before the scheduled test date,
in order to be fully cured.
Check the weights of the test weight blocks at
the time of the testing and setting of the limit
switches. Supplying and checking of the
correct test weights is the responsibility of the
jobsite management.
Different jib lengths require different quantities

and sizes of counterballast blocks. The correct
03.01
03.01
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
5.2 / 00
12.07.
03.04 1/1 Distance from buildings

Distances from building applies to all types of
crane. This also applies to the versions with
climbing devices.
Version A
Constant minimum distance of 3500 mm / 12'
for all foundations
(climbing device taken into account).
Version F (with stationary foundation cross
or stationary undercarriage)
Minimum distance a for all foundation crosses
and undercarriages.
3500
12'
Distance from building, Version F

Foundation cross /
undercarriage
Distance a
FK 310
FK 410 / FK 414
FK 514
FK 518 / FK 519
U 620 / U 621
U 821
U 1021
2050 mm / 7'
2380 mm / 8'
2880 mm / 10'
3030 mm / 10'
3500 mm / 12'
4700 mm / 16'
5650 mm / 19'
Version E (with movable foundation cross or

movable undercarriage)
Minimum distance "x" and the resulting
minimum distance "a" for all foundation crosses
and undercarriages.
The rail track assembly must be laid out and
constructed so as to keep a safety margin of at
least 500 mm / 20 inches between the most
extreme part of the undercarriage and all
structures, scaffolding, roadway boundaries or
any other possible obstructions.
Distance a
Distance from building, Version E

Foundation cross /
undercarriage
FKF 410 / FKF 414
FKF 514 / FKF 518 / FKF
519
UF 620
UF 621
UF 821
UF 1021
03.04
Distance x
Distance a
2350 mm / 8'
2850 mm / 10'
2850 mm / 10'
3250 mm / 11'
3250 mm / 11'
3600 mm / 12'
4400 mm / 15'
5300 mm / 18'
3750 mm / 13'
4100 mm / 14'
4900 mm / 17'
5800 mm / 19'
500
2'
Distance a
Distance x
2'
03.04
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
2.2 / 00
13.07.
03.22 1/1 Safety distances between cranes

A safety distance of at least 2.0 m / 7 ft must be
kept between cranes in all directions. Both
without a load on the hook (diagram 1) and with a
load on the hook (diagram 2).
Diagram 1:
s = min. 2.0 m / 7 ft
s
s
Diagram 2:
s = min. 2.0 m / 7 ft
s
s
03.22
03.22
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
SK, SN
Operating manual
5.1 / 00
20.03.
03.25 1/3 Version A - foundation anchorage

Preparing the foundation:
First the exact position of the foundation on the building site must be determined. For climbing cranes you must
ensure that the foundation is far enough away from the building to allow
enough space between the climbing device and the building.
and for the jib of the crane to move past the front of building when the crane climbs back down, i.e. that
protruding parts of the building do not prevent the crane from climbing down.
As soon as the position of the foundation on the building site has been determined, the actual preparation of the
foundation begins. The dimensions are determined by a foundation calculation, whereby the permissible ground
pressure and nature of the ground at the erection site need to be taken into account. The foundation forces
required for calculation are to be taken from the foundation load tables ( Chapter Crane configurations
"Version A - foundation loads"). The nature of the foundation is given by the reinforcement drawing.
Note:
Foundation calculation and execution are the responsibility of the crane operator.
Use of the foundation anchor:
Bolt the foundation anchor to the bottom of the tower section.
Note:
If there is no tower section available, the foundation anchors may also be set directly (singly) in the foundation
ditch. When placing the individual foundation anchors in the foundation ditch, you must pay attention not only to
their correct location (see diagrams on the next page) but also to the exact observance of the distance between
them (system dimension of the tower). Otherwise the tower will not fit on the concreted foundation anchors later.
03.25
03.25
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK, SN
5.1 / 00
20.03.

Location of the foundation anchors when inserting in the foundation ditch (without tower section)
TS 10, TS 14, TS 19,
TS 211, TS 212
The side of the

tower
with
climbing
lugs
must later point in
direction A or B!
(TS 10 cannot be
climbed!)
TS 18, TS 20
TS 213
A
The side of the
tower
with
Kclimbing system
may point in any
direction!
B
The side of the
tower
with
climbing
lugs
must point later in
direction A or B!
Inserting the unit of tower section and foundation anchors in the foundation ditch.
Note:
If the crane is to be climbed (external climbing) the alignment of the climbing aids (climbing lugs or K-climbing
system) must be paid attention to when inserting the unit of tower frame and foundation anchors (see the
diagrams for both possibilities).
2
03.25
1 Side with climbing aids

(climbing lugs or
K-climbing system)
2 Side with the opening
of the climbing device
for attaching the
tower frames
03.25
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
SK, SN
Operating manual
5.1 / 00
20.03.
As soon as the unit of tower frame and foundation anchors is in the right position (see diagram further below), it
must be levelled and aligned if necessary (maximum height deviation at the top edges of the foundation
anchors = 2 mm / 1/12'').
a
b
a = System dimension (tower

section)
b = overhang foundation anchor
Tower TS 10 / TS 14
a = 1400 mm / 4'-7''
b = 130 mm / 51/8''
Tower TS 18
a = 1800 mm / 5'-11''
b = 270 mm / 105/8''
Tower TS 211 / 212

a = 2150 mm / 7'-1''
b = 220 mm / 85/8''
Tower TS 213
a = 2150 mm / 7'-1''
b = 310 mm / 1'-3/16''
Tower TS 19
a = 1900 mm / 6'-3''
b = 170 mm / 611/16''
Tower TS 20
a = 2000 mm / 6'-7''
b = 270 mm / 105/8''
The foundation anchors are wedged tight after accurate levelling.
The reinforcement bars must now be positioned all around the foundation anchors in the ditch.
Lay the lightning conductor(s) (see below).
Lightning protection
Generally a connection line must be installed between the reinforcement in the concrete and the crane tower for
cranes on foundations.
Galvanised steel band is sufficient as a feed line to the earthing rods. The respective connections must be made
by two bolts with spring washers.
WARNING
The static mounted tower crane's structure must be properly grounded before continuing to erect the
crane, in order to protect personnel from the danger of electric shock. Both layers of the foundation
reinforcing steel must be welded to the foundation anchors to ensure proper grounding ( US - as
specified in NFPA code, section 250-83(a)). In addition, materials and methods used in grounding the
crane must meet all requirements of the relevant local, state and federal rules, regulations and codes
of practice. Failure to follow these instructions is extremly dangerous and could lead to an accident,
resulting in serious injury or loss of live.
03.25
03.25
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
SK, SN
Operating manual
5.1 / 00
20.03.

Concreting the foundation ditch
Finally the foundation ditch is poured out with concrete.
Note:
The tower section used for fixing the foundation anchors may remain in the installed position or can be removed
until actual erection of the crane.
WARNING
Do not attempt to install any tower crane parts if wind speed exceeds 65 km/h or 40 miles per hour. Do not
attempt to install teh jib or counterjib if wind speed exceeds 30 km/h or 20 miles per hour. Check local weather
conditions and forecasts at all times. Failure to observe this warning is extremely dangerous and could lead to an
accident, resulting in property damage, serious injury or loss of life.
03.25
03.25
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.1 / 00
13.07.
03.26 1/3 Version E preparing the crane track

A carefully designed and constructed rail track
assembly is essential for the safe erection and
operation of a travelling tower crane.
Some important rules must be observed when
preparing the rail system:
Base / nature of the ground
The proper design and construction of the
tower crane rail track assembly is the
responsibility of the jobsite mangement.
The base for a crane track must be on firm
ground (no marshy ground or similar). The
permissible ground pressure should be
checked by a certified structural engineer who
is familiar with the local site conditions. It is
advisable to compact the ground with suitable
machines. If the ground needs to be filled up to
provide a level base for the crane track, ground
compacting is even essential. The load
capacity of the ground is calculated from the
corner pressures of the crane (
Chapter
Crane configurations "Version E - corner
loads and horizontal forces").
Note:
The corner loads vary according to crane
height, jib length and the positon of the crane
jib in relation to the rails. The track assembly
must be designed for the maximum corner
loads in the worst loading condition. The worst
loading condition will occur when the crane jib
is positioned directly over one corner of the
undercarriage / foundation cross.
Laying the crane track

The undercarriage / foundation cross can be
adjusted to move on either a straight or cruved
track. urved tracks can be either single turn or
S-curved.
Note:
The undercarriage / foundation cross set for
curve going can move on both straight and
curved tracks. An undercarriage / foundation
cross set for straight-going can move only on
straight tracks.
The rail track assembly must be laid out and
constructed so as to keep a safety margin of at
least 500 mm / 20 inches between the most
extreme part of the undercarriage and all
structures, scaffolding, roadway boundaries or
any other possible obstructions.
If the crane track is to be laid on a different
level to the surrounding ground (e.g. crane
near to the trench) it must be ensured that
overloading or collapse of the crane track
ground is impossible. This can be achieved for
example by an embankment which must be
such that it has a protection zone which takes
up the load (see diagram). The width of the
protection zone is dependent upon the nature
of the ground, the greater the load capacity of
the ground, the smaller the protection zone.
protection zone
= theoretical embankment angle

= real embankement angle due to the protection
zone
03.26
03.26
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.1 / 00
13.07.

If there is not enough room for an
embankment, another solution is necessary,
e.g. supporting the crane track foundation with
a sheet piling (see the following diagram). In
this case, however, a safety margin of at least
500 mm / 2 ft must be maintained along the
entire length of the rail track assembly between
the crane track and the sheet piling.
WARNING:
The end stops and limit switch strikers
must be securely installed before
beginning erection of the tower crane.
Failure to follow this instruction is extremly
dangerous and could lead to an accident
resulting in property damage, serious
injury or loss of life.
safety margin
sheet piling
WARNING:
If this safety margin cannot be kept at any
point, the affected area must be fenced off
so that there is no risk of a person being
trapped. Failure to follow this instruction is
extremly dangerous and could lead to an
accident resulting in property damage,
The track assembly must be at least 3.0 m / 10
ft longer at each side than the required travel
range of the crane to allow a safe stoping
distance. End stops or buffers must be fixed at
both ends of the tracks to prevent the crane
from running off the track.
Note:
A travel limit switche is installed on the
03.26
03.26
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.1 / 00
13.07.

Crane track types
The crane track type must be selected. Crane
tracks are available in different forms. The
most common ones are those shown in the
following diagram.
Crane track type A:

Rails on sleepers
(
Chapter Site
preparation "Version E rails on sleepers")
Crane track type B:
Rails on I-beams and
sleepers
(
Chapter Site
preparation "Version E rails on I- beams")
Crane track type C:
Rails on concrete strip
foundation
(
Chapter Site
preparation "Version E rails on concrete strip
foundation")
Crane track type D:
Rails on I-beams and
concrete strip foundation
(
Chapter Site
preparation "Version E rails on I-beams")
Crane track type E:
SRS crane track system
(
Chapter Site
preparation "Version E SRS-crane track
system")
Note:
At the end of the crane
track the track rods must
be crossed for reasons of
stability.
03.26
03.26
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.1 / 00
19.07.
03.27 1/2 Version E rails on concrete strip foundation

If the rails are to be laid on a concrete strip
foundation, the dimensions of the foundation
must be calculated from the corner loads or
wheel pressures. The permissible resistance
values may not be exceeded.
To keep in track and to secure against onesided shifting (wandering) of a concrete
foundation, both concrete strips must be
interconnected. Either reinforced concrete
beams or steel sections are used for this.
If foundations for curves are also required,
these must be laid concentrically. The smallest
inside radius may not be exceeded in any case
(
Chapter Site preparation "Version E tracklaying in curves"). The track width must
be kept constant in curves, special attention
needs to paid to this particularly when installing
the fastenings for the rails. The track may not
be raised in curves, therefore the foundations
must be set up on the same level.
2. The rails are placed on fixing plates bolted to

the foundation and fixed with clamping plates.
To bolt the fixing plates to the foundation,
either stone bolts are used or threaded
anchors must be cast in the concrete when
creating the foundation. The size of the fixing
plates must be chosen according to the load
(corner load or wheel pressure) so that the
permissible pressure tension between the
steel (fixing plates) and the concrete
(foundation) is not exceeded. The max.
distance between the individual fixing plates
exceed 600 mm / 2 ft.
Attention must be paid to the correct

connecting of rails and foundation when
creating the foundation. There are several
ways of fixing the rails to the foundation:
1. The rails are laid directly on the concrete
foundation and fixed with clamping plates
bolted to the foundation. For fixing the
clamping plates either stone bolts should be
used after laying the rails or threaded
anchors should be cast in the concrete
when creating the foundation. The rail legs
must be underconcreted in any case so that
the rails have full ground contact.
03.27
03.27
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.1 / 00
19.07.
03.27 2/2 Version E rails on concrete strip foundation

Note:
Fixing plates for railway tracks may not be
used because they have an inclination of 4.
The rails therefore lie at an angle and the
running surfaces of the wheels on the track
carriage would only contact one point of the rail
head. In this case both the running wheels and
the rails would be subjected to an extremely
high wear. Safe crane operation would then no
longer be possible.
1. The rails are laid on I-beams made of steel
which are bolted to the foundation. To bolt
the I-beams to the foundation either stone
bolts must be used or threaded anchors
must be cast in the concrete when creating
the foundation. The I-beams must be
underconcreted so that they are in full
contact with the foundation. Further
information Chapter Site preparation
"Version E - rails on I-beams".
The foundation reinforcement must be earthed.
This must be taken into account already in the
creation of the foundation (
Chapter Site
preparation "Version E - earthing of crane
tracks").
If the crane is also to be used in winter, the
concrete foundation must be grounded frostfree.
03.27
03.27
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.1 / 00
20.07.
03.28 1/2 Version E rails on sleepers

There are basically three different kinds of
sleepers:
1.
Wooden sleepers
2.
Concrete sleepers
3.
Steel sleepers
The choice of sleeper type depends on the

load. The surface pressure between the
sleeper and the ground may on no account
exceed the permissible value. Permissible
values can be found in the national regulations
(in Germany DIN 1054).
2. Concrete sleepers
Concrete sleepers must have a cross section
of at least 160 x 24 mm or 61/4'' x 91/2'' so
that the forces applied can be dissipated into
the ground through the gravel bed. The max.
distance between the concrete sleepers
exceed 600 mm / 2 ft. Keep care off a
equidistance of tracklaying (tie rod).
1. Wooden sleepers
Wooden sleepers can only be used for low
loads. As a rule the loads which occur when
operating a crane of the SK or SN type are
higher so that in practice wooden sleepers are
seldom used for the crane track. The max.
distance between the wooden sleepers exceed
600 mm / 2 ft.
Nevertheless, the permissible loads for
wooden sleepers are specified in the following
table.
Kind of
wood
Permissible
curveing tension
Permissible
surface pressure
Hard wood
1100 N / cm 2
or
230 kips / ft 2
300 N / cm 2
or
63 kips / ft 2
Soft wood
1000 N / cm 2
or
209 kips / ft 2
200 N / cm 2
or
42 kips / ft 2
Sleepers which do not lie beneath both rails

(partial sleepers) may only be used as
intermediate sleepers under the outside rails of
a curve. Curves must be laid concentrically.
The smallest inside radius may not be
exceeded in any case (
Chapter Site
preparation "Version E - tracklaying in
curves"). The track width must be kept
constant in curves, in addition the track may
not be raised in curves.
The use of concrete sleepers in subsidence
areas, on frost-sensitive ground or soft ground
is not recommended.
NOTE:
Wooden sleepers can only be used up to
wheel pressures of about 200 kN / 45 kips (rule
of thumb). The sleepers should be made of a
good quality wood and don't have any shakes
and they don't be weather-beaten.
03.28
03.28
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.1 / 00
20.07.
03.28 2/2 Version E rails on sleepers

3. Steel sleepers
When using sleepers, fixing plates must be

used generally.
When using crane rails it is also possible to

use steel sleepers.
For steel sleepers there is no prescribed
minimum cross section as for example for
concrete sleepers. Steel sleepers are available
in different forms which is why no general
statements can be made about the cross
section. In any case the steel sleepers must be
selected so that the forces applied can be
dissipated into the ground through the gravel
bed without the sleepers being deformed. The
max. distance between the steel sleepers
exceed 600 mm / 2 ft.
General
The sleeper length must be at least 1.2 time
greater than the track width in order to be able
to dissipate the applied forces through the
gravel bed into the ground (see diagram).
03.28
NOTE:
Fixing plates for railway tracks may not be
used because they have an inclination of 4.
The rails therefore lie at an angle and the
running surfaces of the wheels on the track
carriage would only contact one point of the rail
head. In this case both the running wheels and
the rails would be subjected to an extremely
high wear. Safe crane operation would then no
longer be possible.
The rail track assembly must be at least 3.0 m
or 10 ft longer at each end than the travel range
of the crane to allow a safe stoping distance.
End stops or buffers must be fixed at both
ends of the track to prevent the crane from
running off the rail track.
03.28
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.1 / 00
21.07.
03.29 1/1 Version E rails on I-beams

I-beams are used as a track foundation when
a very rigid crane track needs to be chosen.
This may be an advantage at high loads or on
uneven ground.
The size of the I-beams must be selected
depending on the ground conditions, the
applied loads and the local conditions.
According to the same criteria, it must be
determined whether the I-beam is to be laid on
a gravel bed (
Chapter Site preparation
"Version E - rails on sleepers"), individual
concrete foundations, concrete slabs or a
concrete strip foundation (
Chapter Site
preparation "Version E - rails on concrete
strip foundation") .
For stability reasons and because of the large
surface area a wide flange beam must be
chosen as a section. The rails (sections)
should be the same length as the individual
beams but fixed offset on the beams so that
they overhang the top of the beam by approx.
100 150 mm / 4 inch 6 inch and lie on the
adjacent beam. Fixing is by rail clips, in
addition the rails are secured by welded blocks
against transverse shift.
The parallel track course is ensured by using
track rods between the beams (see the
following diagram). It is recommended to use
track rods adjustable to different track widths.
03.29
03.29
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.1 / 00
21.07.
03.30 1/1 Version E SRS crane track system

The SRS crane track system is a preassembled rail system consisting of simple,
compact components with which practically
any track course can be implemented. The
concrete sleepers and rail form an inseparable
unit, the rail track. In principle two single rail
tracks are used which are fixed in the desired
track width using track rods (see diagram
further down). In addition to straight rail tracks
(6.0 m or 20 ft) and and curved rail tracks (all
radius are avaiable) there are points and
crossovers as well as accessories such as rail
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
end stops, contact rails for emergency end

stop switches etc. The SRS crane track
system is a time saving and low-cost
alternative to a classic rail track.
Further information is available from:
Perker SRS Verkehrstechnik GmbH
Friedrich-Engels-Strae 6
D-14770 Brandenburg
Germany
rail end stop end piece

concrete sleeper
rail end stop - buffer
rail
rail fixing
rail
track rod
rail connection
03.30
03.30
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
5.1 / 00
21.07.
03.31 1/2 Version E - rails

Independent of the crane track type either
special crane track rails or railway tracks can
be used as rail material. The rails need not be
new, the rail head may, however, only be
slightly worn.
The selection of the rail section depends on the

rail vehicle used and the corner pressure of the
crane. In the following table the rail section to
be selected for all TEREX-PEINER rail
vehicles and respectively several corner
pressures are specified. If the crane to be used
has higher corner loads than listed in the table,
the TEREX PEINER Serviceteam should be
consulted to make the correct choice of rail
section.
ATTENTION !
Rails which are heavily worn or even
damaged may not be used on any account.
Such rails endanger the safe standing of
the crane.
bogie
running
wheel
mm
inch
F 320
2 x 320
2 x 12.5
F 40/1
1 x 400
1 x 15.4
F 400
F 500
F 630
2 x 400
2 x 15.4
2 x 500
2 x 19.7
2 x 630
2 x 24.8
max. corner
load
in operation
mm
inch
useful
running
wheel width
mm
inch
405
19.9
76
3
400 (90)
S 49
S 54
A 55
450 (101)
S 64
UIC 60
A 65
250 (56)
S 49
S 54
A 55
---
80
3.1
280 (63)
S 64
UIC 60
A 65
315 (70)
A 75
500 (112)
S 49
S 54
A 55
560 (125)
S 64
UIC 60
A 65
630 (141)
A 75
630 (141)
S 49
S 54
A 55
710 (159)
S 64
UIC 60
A 65
800 (179)
A 75
S 49
S 54
A 55
S 64
UIC 60
A 65
Wheel base
bogie
498
19.6
660
26.0
800
31.5
80
3.1
90
3.5
110
4.3
rail section
kN (kips)
A 75
A 100
03.31
03.31
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
5.1 / 00
21.07.
03.31 2/2 Version E - rails

Rail joints
At the transition from one rail to the next, i.e. at
the rail joint, there may be no noticeable
differences in height. Therefore the ends of the
two rails must be connected with a strap bolted
between the rail head and the rail foot. The bolt
connection must be made with at least two
bolts per rail (see diagram).
NOTE:
The straps should not be too long. Straps
which would lengthen the distance between the
sleepers or the clamping plates beyond 600
mm or 2 ft are not permitted.
03.31
03.31
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.2 / 00
24.07.
03.32 1/1 Version E tracklaying in curves

The curve radii specified in the table below are
minimum radii and refer to the rail on the inside
of the curve. If there is enough room for laying
the crane rails with a greater curve radius, the
curve radius should be selected as large as
possible. The greater the curve radius, the
better the driving comfort of the crane and the
less wear on running wheels and rails.
NOTE:
In curves the lateral contact surfaces of the rail
heads should be coated constantly with grease
containing graphite. This minimizes wear on
the wheel flanges.
R1
R2
track width
s
4.0 m
13'-1''
5.0 m (UF)
16'-5''
5.05 m (FKF)
16'-7''
6.0 m
19'-8''
8.0 m
26'-3''
10.0 m
32'-10''
03.32
min. curve
radius for
non-driven
bogie
R1
6.0 m
19'-8''
7.5 m
24'-7''
10.0 m
32'-10''
9.0 m
29'-6''
12.0 m
39'-4''
15.0 m
49'-3''
min. curve
radius for
driven bogie
R2
8.0 m
26'-3''
10.0 m
32'-10''
10.0 m
32'-10''
12.0 m
39'-4''
20.0 m
65'-8''
25.0 m
82'-1''
intermediate
straight in
opposite
curves
a
4.0 m
13'-1''
5.0 m
16'-5''
5.0 m
16'-5''
6.0 m
19'-8''
8.0 m
26'-3''
10.0 m
32'-10''
03.32
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.3 / 00
24.07.
03.33 1/2 Version E crane track tolerances

In Germany crane track tolerances are defined
through DIN 4132 (edition February 1982) and
VDI 3576. The following comments concerning
crane track tolerances are meant to explain the
prorated tolerances as described in the text of
DIN 4132.
NOTE:
Lateral deviation
The permitted lateral deviation for one crane
rail will be - maximum "b" = 1 mm or 0.04
inches for any section of length 2000 mm / 6'7''. - maximum "B" = 10 mm or 0.4 inches for
the total length of the crane track.
The person or company responsible for the

crane operation is also solely responsible for
the crane track being executed correctly and
according to the up-dated edition of applicable
standards at all times.
The crane manufacturer will take no
responsibility for the correctness of the
particulars given here.
Height deviation for gradient

Permissible height deviation of a crane rail in
longitudinal direction amounts to - maximum
"c" = 1 mm or 0.04 inches for any track
section of a length of 2000 mm / 6'-7''. maximum "C" = 10 mm or 0.4 inches for the
total length of the crane track.
Prorated tolerances
Track gauge deviations
A maximum deviation of measure
"A" = 5 mm or 0.2 inches is permitted for
track gauges s up to 15 m / 50 ft.
03.33
Height deviation for transversal slope

Permissible height deviation of a crane rail
in transversal direction amounts to "D" =
0.002 x s (Dmax = 10 mm) for the total
length of the crane track.
03.33
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.3 / 00
24.07.
03.33 2/2 Version E crane track tolerances

Transversal deviation of end-of-track
safeguards
Permissible deviation in transversal
direction for the end-of-track safeguards to
each other amounts to "E" = 0.001 x s
(Emax = 20 mm).
Height deviation between center of rail

top and lateral edge of rail
Permissible height deviation between center
of rail top and lateral edge of rail amounts to
"F" = 0.008 x K.
03.33
03.33
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
4.3 / 00
24.07.
03.34 1/1 Version E end-of-track safeguards

End-of-track safeguards must be fitted at the
same height at both ends of the crane track.
End-of-track safeguards consist of buffers and
end pieces. The buffers must be fixed at an
adequate safety distance "a" from the end of
the rail. The distance "a" (see following sketch)
should be selected so that at least one sleeper
is located between buffer and end piece.
NOTE:
The buffer height must be adapted to the wheel
carriage.
By moving the buffers along the length of the

crane track, the crane inclines when it drives
against them. This increases the stress on the
supporting structure and increases the wear
on the bogie wheel flanges. The buffers may
therefore not be offset to each other too much.
(
Chapter Site preparation "Version E crane track tolerances).
03.34
03.34
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.1 / 00
25.07.
03.35 1/1 Version E contact rail for emergency end stop

switch
At both ends of the crane track, a contact rail
must be fitted which activates the emergency
end stop switch. The contact rail must be
installed so that the crane comes to a stop at
least 1.0 m or 3'-3'' before the rail buffer from
full speed.
NOTE:
If the length of the power cable on the cable
drum is shorter than the length of the crane
track, the contact rails for the emergency end
stop switch must be set so that the crane
comes to a stop from full speed and there is at
least 1.0 m or 3'-3'' cable still on the drum.
The contact rail must be long enough so that
the emergency end stop switch is still activated
after the crane comes to a standstill. To
prevent the activating lever of the emergency
end stop switch slipping to the side, the width
of the contact rail must be selected accordingly
and the contact rail must be fixed parallel to the
crane track (see diagram below). In addition
the fixing height must guarantee safe activation
of the emergency end stop switch. If when
checking the activation procedure, it is
detected that the contact rail is too low, it must
be placed in a higher position.
03.35
ATTENTION!
After passing the contact rail the crane
must not be able to proceed in the same
direction. Therefore the emergency end
stop switch must also be activated after
the crane comes to a standstill. It is then
always possible to move in the opposite
direction.
To ensure that the activating lever of the
emergency end stop switch is deflected joltfree, the contact rail must have a contact angle
of 30-45. If the contact angle is narrower, the
activating lever can be deflected in the opposite
direction (see diagram), the activation
procedure is no longer smooth enough at too
steep a contact angle.
03.35
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.1 / 00
25.07.
03.36 1/2 Version E earthing of crane tracks

NOTE:
It is the responsibility of the jobsite mangement
to check the using of lightning protection and /
or earthing.
To be noted when earthing crane tracks:
1. General regulations on earthing (from
regulations and standards, etc., in Germany
e.g. VDE)
2. Local regulations for lightning protection and
earthing
To earth crane tracks, use either existing

earthing points or drive earthing spikes into the
ground at least 1.5 m / 5ft.
Galvanized steel band with a minimum cross
section of 30 x 3.5 mm or1.2 inches x 0.14
inches is sufficient as a connection line to the
earthers (see following diagram). The steel
band is fixed to the rails and the earthing spike
with one bolt connection respectively which
must be protected against loosening
(counternut, spring washer or similar).
1. General regulations on earthing
An earthing point must be made so that the

earthing of the crane and thus the safety of the
operating personnel is guaranteed. It basically
applies: The greater the surface of the earther
which is in contact with the surrounding
ground, the better the earther fullfils its
function.
To guarantee sufficient earthing of the crane,
every rail must be earthed at each end of the
crane track and additionally every 20 m / 66 ft if
the track is longer than 20 m / 66 ft. In so far as
apparatus, machines, metal pipes or similar
are located in an area of 20 m / 66 ft around
the crane track, these must be earthed
separately. This can be achieved either by an
available earthing point, an own earther or
connection to the rails.
NOTE:
An additional bridging of rail joints which are
connected by steel straps is not necessary for
earthing.
For crane tracks on a concrete (strip)
foundation, the foundation reinforcement must
be earthed. For this purpose a connection
must be made between the foundation
reinforcement and the rails. In the concrete
strip foundation each of the two individual
foundations requires a connection line to the
corresponding rail track.
Connect climbing cranes 2 times.
03.36
03.36
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.1 / 00
25.07.
03.36 2/2 Version E earthing of crane tracks

2. Local regulations for lightning
protection and earthing
DANGER
When laying the foundations the local
regulations for ligtning protection and
earthing must be observed. These
regulations must be inquired from the local
acceptance authorities (usually the energy
supply companies). Failure to observe
these regulations is extremely dangerous
and can lead to material damage and/or
personal injury.
03.36
03.36
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
10.02.
03.38 1/1 The assembly crane

Selection of the assembly crane
The assembly crane should be able to lift up the
heaviest component of the crane to be erected.
Cranes must be equipped with:
Note:
Differences in elevation between assembly crane
(mobile crane) and the crane to be erected must be
taken into account when calculating the hook height
of the assembly crane.
Selection of rigging
The rigging practicises conform to the national
regulations ("Slings" and Rigging equipment for
material handling").
In addition:
Wire rope bridles must be attached to a master

link or shackle to ensure even load distribution.
All hooks must have lockable latches.
Eyes in wire rope slings must be fabricated

with thimbles.
Required hook hight

The required hook height of the assembly crane
depends on the hook height of the crane to be
erected.
The hook height of the assembly crane can be
calculated from the version of the crane to be
erected (Version A, Version E or F) and the number
of tower elements used
(
Chapter "Version A (E + F) hook heights).
The following applies for all crane versions:
Hook height of the assembly crane = hook
height HH of the crane to be erected + min. 12
m or 39'-5''.
03.38
03.38
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
Operating manual
SK / SN / SMK
1.1 / 00
30.03.
03.39 1/1 Danger zone near electrical transmissions lines
When operating near high voltage power lines:
From
Over
Over
Over
Over
Over
Normal voltage
(Phase to phase)
0
to
50
50
to
200
200
to
350
350
to
500
500
to
750
750
to
1000
KV
KV
KV
KV
KV
KV
While transit with no load and boom or mast lowered:

Normal voltage
(Phase to phase)
From
0
to
0.75 KV
Over
0.75
to
50 KV
Over
50
to
345 KV
Over
345
to
750 KV
Over
750
to
1000 KV
Minimum required
Clearance
3.1 m
10 ft
4.6 m
15 ft
6.1 m
20 ft
7.6 m
25 ft
10.7 m
35 ft
13.7 m
45 ft
Minimum required
Clearance
1.2 m
4 ft
1.8 m
6 ft
3.1 m
10 ft
4.9 m
16 ft
6.1 m
20 ft
DANGER:
Death or injury can result from contacting
power lines. Always contact the electcric
power line owner. The electric power shall
be disconnected or the power lines moved
or insulated before machine operations
begin. Consult local power company for
specific (on site) recommendations. Always
be aware of and observe applicable
ordinances.
03.39
03.39
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
25.04.
03.40 1/2 Electrical connections

Note:
The main power supply for the tower crane
must have been laid before the crane is
erected. It is essential to ensure that the power
connection complies with current provisions
with respect to distribution, fusing, grounding
as well as protective equipment and
measures.
Note:
Only a qualified electrician may establish the
electrical connection; electrical protective
measures must be observed ( Chapter
"Electrical protective measures").
The crane is connected to a three-phase

system with a voltage of 400 V (US 480 V) and
a line frequency of 50 Hz (US 60 Hz). The
maximum permissible voltage deviation is 5
%. The connection to the construction site
distribution cabinet must be carried out using a
leackage current switch according to national
regulations
(i.e. in Germany VDE 0612).
The values for the total connected load, the
back-up fuse to be used, the maximum supply
lead length and the minimum lead crosssection are dependent on the hoist winch (see
table).
WARNING
Before connecting the crane's main power
supply cable, the following precausion
must be taken:
1. All switches must be in "OFF"-position
2. The crane movement control levers
must be in the "NEUTRAL"-position
3. The crane's main power switch on the
electrical cabinet must be in "OFF"position. (see the following sketch)
Failure to follow these instructions is
extremely dangerous and could lead to an
66/76 WB
102 WB
[kVA]
130
170
Back up fuse
[A]
160
250
max. supply lead

length
[m]
140
330
[ft]
460'
1080'
Total connected
load
lead cross
section
max. supply lead
length
lead cross
section
max. supply lead
length
lead cross
section
max. supply lead
length
lead cross
section
[mm 2]
4 x 50
2x4x95
AWG 1/0
AWG 4/0
[m]
200
120
[ft]
660'
390'
[mm 2]
4 x 70
AWG 2/0
[m]
270
165
[ft]
890'
540'
[mm 2]
4 x 95
AWG 4/0
[m]
210
[ft]
690'
[mm 2]
4 x 120
250 MCM
Main switch "OFF"
03.40
03.40
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
25.04.
03.40 2/2 Electrical connections

The power supply lead is connected by means
of screw-type terminals in a terminal box
located in the passage to the turntable. As a
result of the location of the terminal box, the
crane can be erected at a certain distance
from the construction site distribution cabinet;
the maximum distance can be determined as
follows:
Max. distance from construction site
distribution cabinet =
max. supply lead lenght tower hight + 2.0 m or
+ 6'-7''
Example:
Hoist winch WB 66/76; tower height 41.6 m or
136'-6'' (7 x TS 213.1)
max. distance from construction site
distribution cabinet =
170 m - (41.6 m + 2.0 m) = 126.4 m or
557'-9'' (136'-6'' + 6'-7'') = 414'-8''.
In accordance with national regulations, the
power supply lead must never hang loose in
the tower, but must be attached to the tower in
definite intervals. Strain relief devices must
also be provided for. For further information
see national regulations
(i.e. in Germany VDE 0113, part 1).
03.40
03.40
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
23.03.
03.41 1/1 Drive specifications

Hoisting gear SR WB 66-100/4F
Power
Speeds (single trolley operation)
Speeds (double trolley operation)
Hoisting gear SR WB 102-160/4F

Power
Speeds (single trolley operation)
Speeds (double trolley operation)
gear 1
gear 2
gear 3
gear 4
gear 1
gear 2
gear 3
gear 4
FEM
400 V / 50 Hz
66.0 kW
33 m/min
58 m/min
88 m/min
134 m/min
16 m/min
29 m/min
44 m/min
67 m/min
gear 1
gear 2
gear 3
gear 4
gear 1
gear 2
gear 3
gear 4
102.0 kW
32 m/min
50 m/min
80 m/min
125 m/min
16 m/min
25 m/min
40 m/min
63 m/min
105 HP
62 fpm
164 fpm
310 fpm
410 fpm
31 fpm
82 fpm
155 fpm
205 fpm
1 x 9.0 kW
0 80 m/min
1 x 12.2 HP
0 260 fpm
2 x 7.0 kW
3 x 7.0 kW
-1
0 0.75 m
2 x 11.5 HP
3 x 11.5 HP
0 0.9 rpm
4 x 7.5 kW
0 30 m/min
4 x 12.2 HP
0 120 fpm
Trolley gear FU 9-320/4

Power
Speed
Slewing gear K WB 120/4
Power
Speed
Travelling gear SR 10-190/4
Power
Speed
03.41
L1 L4
L5 L9
US
480 V / 60 cycle
105 HP
130 fpm
230 fpm
340 fpm
520 fpm
65 fpm
115 fpm
170 fpm
260 fpm
03.41
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
2.1 / 00
27.07.
04.01 1/1 Important instructions concerning crane erection

Please take note of the following points in order
to ensure a correct crane erection:
Only skilled personal with special training

must be entrusted with the erection of the
crane.
For the crane erectiond at least four skilled
technicians are needed: one responsible
for the assembly by mobile crane, one for
the co-ordination of the operations on the
ground and two for the erection.
All persons involved with the crane

erection must be wearing safety clothing
and use safety equipment as prescribed.
The nation regulations for prevention of
accidents must be adhered to.
All structural members and crane

components used during the erection
must be in technically perfect condition.
Crane erection may only take place up to

wind speed of 45 km/h (= 12.5 m/s) / 28
mph. If the wind speed should get beyond
this value after the crane erection has
been commenced, then the crane erection
must be stopped immediately. If required,
the crane components already installed
must be secured against tilting or other
damage.
For the safety of people and equipment,

the erector shall check that barriers are
placed around the working area and that
there are no unauthorized people inside
this area.
Upon completed crane erection a

commissioning certificate must be issued,
confirming the commissioning of the
crane in correct working order. The crane
is in correct working order when it has
been completely subject to all valid
applicable regulations, all safety
installations have been activated, adjusted
and checked and a final visual check-up
has been carried out.
04.01
04.01
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
16.11.
04.02 1/2 Usual hand signals

Before any lifts are commenced, the crane
operator, signalers, riggers and all other
parties involved must re-familiarize themselves
with appropriate hand-signals, as signals vary
from job to job and from region to region. An
illustration of the signals shall be posted at the
job site.
04.02
Hand signals shall be used whenever the

operator isn't able to hear clearly the verbal
warnings of the signalman.
The signalman shall have to be able to
constantly observe the crane maneuvres
without being exposed to any risk.
See the standard hand signals for controlling
crane operations in the following sketches:
d:\eigene dateien\betriebsanleitungen\sprache\englisch\sk_sn\kp04\kp0402.doc
04.02
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
16.11.
04.02 2/2 Usual hand signals
04.02
04.02
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.1 / 00
31.08.
04.03 1/1 Tools and accessories

For assembly and maintenance some
important tools and accessories are listed
below:
Tools for assembly and maintenance of
the crane:
1 set double-ended cranked box wrenches
DIN 838 - consists of
1 wrench 8 / 9 mm
1 wrench 10 / 13 mm
1 wrench 17 / 19 mm
1 wrench 22 / 24 mm
1 wrench 30 / 36 mm
2 srew drivers for slotted screws

1 screw driver 4 x 125 mm
1 screw driver 7 x 150 mm
2 pliers
1 water plump plier 240 mm
2 hammers
1 machinists hammer 1000 g
1 blacksmiths hammer 2000 g
Accessories for maintenance of the crane:
3
1 grease gun (500 cm )
1 set double-ended open-end engineers

wrenches DIN 895 - consists of
1 wrench 8 / 9 mm
1 wrench 10 / 13 mm
1 wrench 17 / 19 mm
1 wrench 22 / 24 mm
1 wrench 30 / 36 mm
Only for crane types SK 56, SK 86, SK 106/1,
SK 136/1, SK 206/1, SKC 136, SN 86, SN
166:
1 slugging box wrench 55 mm, DIN
7444
1 single-ended wrench 55 mm
Only for crane types SK 315, SK 415, SK 575,
SN 406:
1 slugging box wrench 90 mm, Stahl
Wille
1 single-ended wrench 90 mm
04.03
04.03
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
Operating manual
SK / SN / SMK
1.1 / 00
22.03.
04.04 1/1 Bolt and nut conversion table

The table below gives the width across flats
"S" so that the correct size of wrench or
spanner can be used.
s
Shank diameter
mm
M 12
M 16
M 20
M 22
M 24
M 27
M 30
M 33
M 36
M 39
M 42
M 45
M 48
M 72
inch
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
15/16
1 1/16
1 3/16
1 5/16
1 7/16
1 9/16
1 11/16
1 13/16
1 7/8
Bolts to DIN EN 24014 / DIN EN 24017

and
Nuts to DIN EN 24032
mm
inch
19
3/4
24
15/16
30
1 3/16
32
1 1/4
36
1 7/16
41
1 5/8
46
1 13/16
50
1 15/16
55
2 3/16
60
2 3/8
65
2 9/16
70
2 3/4
75
2 15/16
Note:
Inch dimensions are rounded off and must not
be used for sustitutions.
04.04
04.04
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
4.2 / 00
31.08.
04.09 1/10 Threaded connections

Threaded connections in general
Tower cranes have nemerous threaded
connections, the purpose of which is to
separably join parts and components and
transmit forces.
As such, threaded connections count among the
tower crane elements of major importance with
regard to operational relieability and safety. The
useres of tower cranes are therefore called upon
to install them with care, maintain them well and
monitor their condition.
! ATTENTION
All threaded connections tightended with
wrenches must be priodically checked for
tightness to ensure that they do not come
loose. A loose threades connection could
cause an accidend!
High-strength prestressed threaded
connections (HV-connections).
A high-strength prestressed threaded connection
(friction-grip joint) consists of a bolt, a nut, one or
more washers (flat, spring, lock, ....) and perhaps
a spacer sleeve, all joined to produce a
connection consisting exclusively with the
passable exception of the spacer sleeve of
high-strength materials.
High-strength connections are used where large
forced need to be transferred from component to
component (load-bearing threaded connections).
In the case of a tower crane, this normaly covers
the following components:
Slewing connections, tower components, jib
components and such drive mechanisms as the
slewing gear, hoist winch, etc.
04.09
04.09
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
4.2 / 00
31.08.

High-strength threaded connections
High-strength threaded connections require a
precisely defined torque. This is the decisive
factor for the reliability of the connection.
Precisely defined torques are best achieved with
the aid of a hydraulic tensioning tool.
A mechanical or electric torque wrench may
serve as an alternative option under certain
circumstances, but it is absolutely obligatory to
determine the requisite torque under on-site
conditions (identical lubrication, identical
temperature and a complete connection,
determined with the aid of a tensimeter).
All parts of high-strength friction grip joints are
specially marked. The quality and marking
requirements are specified in national and
international standards (ISO 898, parts 1 and 2).
The property class, e.g. 8.8, 10.9 or 12.9, must
be visible on the head of the fastener, as must
the manufacturer's mark of origin.
The property class of nuts, e.g. 8, 10 or 12, and
the nut manufacturer's mark of origin must be
impressed into either the seat-engaging surface
or one of the flats.
Giant bolt
Giant bolts are a metric type with fine ISO metric
screw threads as per DIN 13 with improved
thread radius. The threads are rolled, and the bolt
is galvanized. Property class 8.8 giant bolts
direct the full working force into the pulsating
stress range, i.e. the maximum stress
corresponds to half the working force.
04.09
04.09
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
4.2 / 00
31.08.

!ATTENTION
When selecting nuts, ensure that their
property class matches that of the bolts.
Example:
nut 8
bolt
nut 1 0 bolt
nut 12 bolt
8.8
10.9
12.9
Since there is still no ISO standard for washers,

German-made washers intended for use in highstrength threaded connections are marked with
the characters HV.
!ATTENTION
All washers used in high-strength threaded
connections must be made of high-strength
materials corresponding to those of the nuts
and bolts.
! ATTENTION
Washers used in high-strength threaded
connections must have beveled edges on
one side to prevent damage to the head of
the bolt. Logically, the beveled side must be
installed toward the bolt head.
In some type of cranes, type-A lock washers as
per DIN 128 are used for securing the slewing
ring to the crane's steel superstructure.
Such lock washers are made of hardened spring
steel.
DIN 128, type A
Unlike nuts, bolts and washers, spring lock

washers carry no markings (symbols, figures).
04.09
04.09
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
4.2 / 00
31.08.

In same high-strength threaded connections,
structural circumstances require the use of
spacer sleeves. In any such case, their
Installation must be as specified in the relevant
reference manual.
TEREX PEINER cranes contain two types of
high-strength threaded connections:
bolted connections
screwed connections
! ATTENTION
Check all parts of high-strength threaded
connections prior to installation.
All parts of threaded connections must be
cleaned and visually inspected prior to their
installation.
This applies in particular to the threads of nuts,
bolts and screws, the seating of nuts on bolts,
and the transition between the shanks and
heads.
! ATTENTION
Never use a threaded fastener (including nuts)
with any sign of rust on its shank or threads.
In fact, any nut, bolt or screw showing any sign of
damage at all must be rejected.
04.09
04.09
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
4.2 / 00
31.08.

Lubricating high-strength threaded
connections
Nuts, bolts and screws must always be
lubricated with a molybdenum sulfide-base
grease prior to use. This yields a defined degree
of frictional resistance (coefficient of friction) that
substantially reduces the scatter of pretensional
forces.
! ATTENTION
Grease the threads of both the nut and the
bolt and the bearing surface of the nut. lf the
prescribed torque is to be applied to the
head of the bolt, be sure to grease the
bearing face of the bolt head.
Tightening high-strength threaded
connections
No high-sirength threaded connection can
function properly uniess it is tightened to the
prescribed torque/prestress. The initial tension
stretches the bolt and presses the joining parts of
the crane together to produce an intensive "grip"
between the parts. Consequently, only part of the
forces encountered in the course of operation
actually pass through the fastener.
04.09
04.09
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
4.2 / 00
31.08.

Hydraulic pretensioning device
!ATTENTION
Excessive and inadequate prestress can
lead to premature failure of the threaded
connection.
The structurally required prestress can be
achieved with the aid of:
a hydraulic pretensioning device
a mechanical torque wrench
an electric torque wrench
a hydraulic torque wrench
Inspect and recalibrate all such devices at

regular intervals.
!ATTENTION
Do not use power screwdriver!
! ATTENTION
A hydraulic pretensioning device is the only
option with which to ensure that the
prescribed pretension is achieved with
suffiicient accuracy.
In order to achieve the structurally required to a
certain torque. The requisite torque depends on
the type and of the nuts and bolts/screws. The
pertinent table (presuming strength categories as
per ISO 898, parts1 and 2) shows which
torque/tension is required for which type and size
of bolt/screw.
04.09
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Swiveling angle connection

Rapid-action hose coupling
Hight-pressure hose
Pump lever
Oil filter
High-pressure pump
Pressure relief pump
Pressure gauge
Distributor
Rapid-action hose coupling
Fixing element
Adjusting port for expansion bushing
Exchangeable liner
Vent
Carrying strap
17 mm across flats
Oil tank
04.09
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
4.2 / 00
31.08.

Whenever the nuts and bolts/screws in use
cannot be definitely correlated to a particular DIN
standard, the nominal diameter of the threads
and the width across flats must be measured
and compared with the listings in the table.
Use a torque wrench to perform the check

inspection.
! ATTENTION
lf the fastener cannot be tightened any further,

the connection may be assumed to be in order.
lf, however, it was possible to turn the fastener,
the connection will have to be undone,
regreased, reassembled and retorqued.
Never use an ungreased threaded fastener

in a high-strength prestressed threaded
connection.
Inspection of installed high-strength threaded
connections
Any threaded connection, including high-strength

types, can loosen in the course of time.
However, any degree of loosening in a highstrength prestressed threaded connection would
cause total or partial loss of tension. That, in
turn, would mean that the material of which the
fastener is made is subject to accelerated fatigue
and liable to eventual failure in the form of a
fatigue fracture.
Apply the specified torque (cf. table) to the nut or

bolt/screw.
Recurrent checks
Recurrent checks must be performed on any
newly erected crane and at minimum intervals of
one year - or more frequently for multi-shift
operation.
Such check inspections involve the random
loosening o! threaded connections, with
extraction and visual inspection of the fastener,
followed by greasing, reinstallation and torquing.
Visual inspection
Initial check
! ATTENTION
On a new crane or any new crane
component, check all threaded connections
within three weeks following erection to
detect and correct any eff ects of settling.
04.09
Visual inspections must be performed at

quarterly intervals in order to detect any visible
gaps between the joined components that would
indicate loosening of any threaded connections.
04.09
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
4.2 / 00
31.08.

Replacement of high-strength threaded
connections
lf any fractured or torn fasteners are found in any
crane-component connections, e.g. tower
sections or slewing connection, all fasteners in
the entire connection must be replaced.
Accident prevention
All relevant accident prevention regulations
prescribe regular checks and inspections and
call attention to the necessity of complying with
the manufacturer's instructions.
The periodical checks and inspections were dealt
with in preceding sections of this manual.
Note:
Once the crane designer has properly
determined the size of a fastener, the safety and
reliability of the executed connection lies in the
hands of the erector.
! ATTENTION
For check-tightening any threaded
connection, ensure that the loining parts are
first pressen together, i.e. that the fastener
is freed of its load.
This can be achieved on a crane with no load on
its hook and its trolley near the tower by moving
the counter-jib (counterweight) over the
connection in question.
04.09
04.09
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
4.2 / 00
31.08.

Thread
dimension
[mm]
Standard
Wrench size
Bolt
Nut
[mm]
DIN 931 / 933 or EN 24014 / 24017
DIN 934 or EN 24032
19 DIN/18 EN
DIN 6914**
DIN 6915**
22
none (tension rod)
DIN 934 or EN 24032
DIN 931 / 933 or EN 24014 / 24017
DIN 934 or EN 24032
24
DIN 6914**
DIN 6915**
27
none (tension rod)
DIN 934 or EN 24032
DIN 931 / 933 or EN 24014 / 24017
DIN 934 or EN 24032
30
DIN 6914**
DIN 6915**
32
none (tension rod)
DIN 934 or EN 24032
DIN 931 / 933 or EN 24014 / 24017
DIN 934 or EN 24032
32 DIN/34 EN
DIN 6914**
DIN 6915**
36
none (tension rod)
DIN 934 or EN 24032
DIN 931 / 933 or EN 24014 / 24017
DIN 934 or EN 24032
36
DIN 6914**
DIN 6915**
41
none (tension rod)
DIN 934 or EN 24032
DIN 931 / 933 or EN 24014 / 24017
DIN 934 or EN 24032
41
DIN 6914**
DIN 6915**
46
none (tension rod)
DIN 934 or EN 24032
DIN 931 / 933 or EN 24014 / 24017
DIN 934 or EN 24032
46
50
M 12
M 16
M 20
M 22
M 24
M 27
M 30
DIN 6914**
DIN 6915**
none (tension rod)
DIN 934 or EN 24032
DIN 931 / 933 or EN 24014 / 24017
DIN 934 or EN 24032
50
(55)
M 33
(DIN 6914**)
DIN 6915**
none (tension rod)
DIN 934 or EN 24032
DIN 931 / 933 or EN 24014 / 24017
DIN 934 or EN 24032
55
60
M 36
DIN 6914**
DIN 6915**
none (tension rod)
DIN 934 or EN 24032
DIN 931 / 933 or EN 24014 / 24017
DIN 934 or EN 24032
Tightening torque
8.8*
10.9*
[Nm]
[ft lbs]
[Nm]
[ft lbs]
51
137
254
351
439
686
939
38
101
187
259
324
506
693
73
54
96
71
187
138
242
178
363
268
474
350
501
370
647
477
628
463
814
600
981
724
1026
889
1342
18341)
23441)
60
30441)
65
1)
Pretension
10.9
[N]
[lbs]
50
37
100
74
160
118
190
140
220
162
290
214
330
243
350
258
405
299
(430)
(317)
500
369
510
376
550
406
660
487
760
561
830
612
990
13531)
17291)
22451)
M 39
none (tension rod)
DIN 934 or EN 24032
DIN 931 / 933 or EN 24014 / 24017
DIN 934 or EN 24032
none (tension rod)
DIN 934 or EN 24032
M 42
M 42 x 3
none (tension rod)
DIN 934 or EN 24032
DIN 931 / 933 or EN 24014 / 24017
DIN 934 or EN 24032
none (tension rod)
DIN 934 or EN 24032
1000
738
none (tension rod)
DIN 934 or EN 24032
1170
863
75
1)
M 48
M 52 x 3
1) For threaded connections with unknown friction factors, the proper tightening torque has to be determined
with the aid of the tensimeter prior to their erection.
**
Applies to all galvanized and black bolts in good condition with a coat of molybdenum sulfide grease.
**
High-strength treaded connection (HV connection)
04.09
04.09
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
4.2 / 00
31.08.

Tensimeter 780
Pretension rneasuring device for on-the-job
adjustnient and testing of power screwdrivers
Measuring the tensile force: Push the arms of the
calibrated, forklike spring together for tightening the
threaded connection. The magnitude of the spring
excursion described by the two arms during
tightening serves as a measure of the tensile force of
the threaded connection.
Three measuring methods.- There are three
different ways to measure the spring excursion:
Slip a measuring wedge between the measuring

pins of the two arms and read the tension force
directly.
A limit gauge between the measuring pins
indicates adherence to a certain range of
tension-force tolerance.
The spring excursion shown by a normal dial
gauge (for sizes 1, 2 and 3 only) can be
converted to a tension-force value with the aid of
a reference table (not for impact-driver-tightened
connection).
Each tensimeter carries an engraved production

number to ensure proper correiation of the measuring
wedge with the calibrated curve.
Tensimeter
No.
For screws with
Range
2 / M 10
2 / SW 17
2 / M 12
2 / SW 19
2 / M 14
2 / SW 22
Meas. Wedge
No.
Limit
gauge*
No.
780/21
780/22
M 12
45
M 14
50
M 16
50
2 / M 16
2 / SW 24
780/3
M
M
M
M
M
M
16
18
20
22
24
27
60
65
70
70
75
75
50 000
to
400 000
10.60
3
3
3
3
3
3
/
/
/
/
/
/
M
M
M
M
M
M
16
18
20
22
24
27
3
3
3
3
3
3
/
/
/
/
/
/
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
24
27
30
32
36
41
780/31
780/32
780/4
M
M
M
M
M
27
30
33
36
39
90
95
100
110
110
100 000
to
700 000
24.70
4
4
4
4
4
/
/
/
/
/
M
M
M
M
M
27
30
33
36
39
4
4
4
4
4
/
/
/
/
/
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
41
46
50
55
60
780/41
780/42
280
365
58
88
120
H
mm
Lock washer for normal screws

No.
40
195
W
mm
Shim
No.
M 10
15 000
to
130 000
L
mm
Weight
780/2
Dimensions
Min.
Length
65
100
140
kg
3.27
* When ordering, please state assembly force, FM, and tolerance.

Sample order for a case of involving M 12 screws
No. 780/2
No. 2 / M 12
No 2 / SW 19
04.09
TENSIMETER
Shim
Lock washer
1 EA:
2 ea.
1 ea
No. 780/21
And / or
No. 780/22
Measuring wedge
1 ea.
Limit gauge for ... N6 ... %
1 ea.
04.09
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
5.1 / 00
01.09.
04.13 1/1 Version A mounting the crane substructure

!ATTENTION
The concrete of the foundation has to be
cured before the crane is permitted to be
mounted.
As lowest tower element, it is permitted to

use:
For towers TS 10 ,TS 14 and TS 19:
tower section TS
or TSV (TS 19 = TSV 19.1)
- For any other tower:
only tower section TS
The foundation concrete must be fully cured

before starting teh erection (min. 3000 pounds
per square inch at 28 days).
WARNING:
NOTE:
Do not attempt to install any tower

elements if wind speed exceeds 39.8 mph
(64 km/h). Do not attempt to install
counterjib or boom if wind speed exceeds
20 mph (32 km/h). Check local weather
conditions and forecasts at all times.
If a crane is to be climbed with climbing device

SE, then it has to be sure, that the K-climbing
system or the climbing lugs of the lowest tower
section must be arranged towards the correct
side, especially when the crane should be
installed in the near of a building. A wrong
arrangement of the K-climbing system or the
climbing lugs could prevent a climbing of the
crane. ( Chapter Site prepartion "Version
A foundation anchorage").
WARNING:
All lifting parts of tower crane by an
auxiliary crane during erection must be
performed so as to avoid jarring of or
shocks to the crane's structural, electrical
or mechanical components. It is the
responsibility of the jobsite mangement to
ensure that these instructions are strictly
followed.
Place the lowest tower section on the

foundation anchors.
Bolt the lowest tower element to the

foundation anchors ( Chapter Crane
erection "Threaded connections").
To mount the crane substructure, i.e. to

connect the lowest tower element with the
foundation anchors, the following steps must
be carried out:
Attach the lowest tower element to the
assembly crane (
Chapter Crane
erection "Attachment points and weights
- tower sections").
04.13
04.13
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
5.1 / 00
01.09.
04.15 1/5 Version E mounting the crane substructure

Crane on travel gear
WARNING:
The crane rail track assembly must be
properly grounded before starting to erect
the crane in order to protect personel from
the danger of electrical shocks. to ensure
proper protection, a resistance check must be
made weekly at all ground connection points.
Resistance to ground must not exceeds 25
ohms at any ground connection point, the
cause must be located and corrected before
continuing to use or work on the tower crane.
Position the bogie on the rails. Pay attention

to the following:
The two electrically-powered wheel bogies

must be located in such a way that they
a)
are diagonally offset when the crane track

is straight (see sketch).
WARNING:
Do not attempt to install any tower elements if
wind speed exceeds 39.8 mph (64 km/h). Do
not attempt to install counterjib or boom if
wind speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h). Check
local weather conditions and forecasts at all
times.
Crane track straight

b)
are on the same rail when the crane track

is curved (see sketch).
WARNING:
All lifting parts of tower crane by an auxiliary
crane during erection must be performed so
as to avoid jarring of or shocks to the crane's
structural, electrical or mechanical
components. It is the responsibility of the
jobsite mangement to ensure that these
instructions are strictly followed.
Foundation cross FKF
The following operations must be carried out in
order to install the crane substructure, that is, to
place the foundation cross on the travel gear and
on the crane track:
04.15
Crane track with curve(s)

When the crane track is curved in one
direction only, that is, if there are only
right-hand or left-hand curves, the bogies
with the drive motors must be placed on
the outside of the curve.
04.15
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
5.1 / 00
01.09.

Place the bogies on the rails in such a way
that the distance between the fastening
bolts on the bogies corresponds to the
distance between the locating holes on the
foundation cross.
Support the bogies with the help of suitable
aids and secure them against toppling.
Swing out the swivel arms and bolt them in

working position. Mount the transverse
crossheads and bolt them in position as well.
Secure all pins with split pins.
Place the foundation cross on the bogies. Make
sure that the fastening for the cable drum of the
travel gear is located on the correct side.
Attach the foundation cross to the assembly

crane (
Chapter Crane erection
"Attachment points and weights foundation cross").
Secure the foundation cross against rolling

away by means of rail clamps on the bogies.
Make sure that the rail clamps encompass the
rail head.
Lift the foundation cross to a height of approx.

0.5 - 1.0 m (1'-8'' to 3'-3'').
Remove the transport restraints from all

bogies.
Remove transport restraints between the

swivel arms and the longitudinal girder (see
sketch).
Mount the electrical panel, steps, platforms as

well as the cable drum for the travel gear on
the foundation cross.
Position in transport
Connect the two power cables from the

electrical panel to the drive motors of the driven
bogies.
Transport restraints
Connect the power supply lead to the electrical

panel of the foundation cross as well as to the
construction site distributor.
!ATTENTION
Cotter pins
04.15
Grip pins
Before the tower elements can be mounted,

the foundation cross must be exactly levelled
out horizontally in longitudinal and transverse
directions, if necessary with a theodolite.
04.15
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
5.1 / 00
01.09.
Attach the lowermost tower element to the

mounting crane (
Chapter Crane
erection "Attachment points and weights tower sections"). Depending on the type of
crane to be erected, the lowermost tower
element can be a standard tower section or a
reinforced tower section (TSV) either with or
without struts (
Chapter Crane
configurations "Version E - hook
heights").
Mount the lowermost tower element onto the
foundation cross and bolt the two parts to
each other.
If a reinforced tower section (TSV) with struts has

been fitted as the lowermost tower element:
Secure the struts with pins to the TSV tower

section and to the foundation cross. Secure
all pins with two split pins each.
Mount the central ballast onto the foundation

cross. The amount of ballast required varies
according to tower height and jib length Refer
to the crane manufacturer's central ballast
tables for the specific tower height and jib
length to be installed (
Chapter Crane
heights").
Undercarriage UF
order to install the crane substructure, that is, to
place the undercarriage on the travel gear and on
the crane track:
Position the bogie on the rails. Pay attention to
the following:
The two driven bogies must be located in such

a way that they are on the same rail.
When the crane track is curved in one

direction only, that is, if there are only righthand or left-hand curves, the driven bogies
must be placed on the outside of the curve.
The orientation of a climbing device is defined

by the undercarriage (see sketch). For this
reason, if the crane tracks are straight, the
orientation of the undercarriage and thus the
location of the driven bogies must be
determined before assembly (the side of the
undercarriage with the rigid swivel arms must
be on the rail side with the driven bogies).
WARNING:
Do not install any tower section until the
central ballast blocks are securley in place on
the undercarriage.
5
1
2
3
4
04.15
bogie, driven
bogie, not driven
TSV or TS tower section
climbing aids
(climbing lugs or K-climbing system)
04.15
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
5.1 / 00
01.09.

Place the bogies on the rails in such a
way that the distance between the
fastening
bolts
on
the
bogies
corresponds to the distance between the
locating holes on the undercarriage.
Support the bogies with the help of
suitable aids and secure them against
toppling.
Attach the undercarriage to the mounting crane
(
Chapter Crane erection "Attachment
points and weights - undercarriage").
Lift the undercarriage to a height of approx. 0.5
- 1.0 m (1'-8'' to 3'-3'').
1
2
3
4
5
Remove transport restraints between the

swivel arms and the undercarriage frame. The
transport restraints are located on the end
faces of the undercarriage.
Remove the transport restraints from all

bogies.
Swing out the swivel arms and bolt them to the

swivel arm supports. Secure all pins with split
pins.
Place the undercarriage on the bogies. The
rigid swivel arm supports must be located on
the side of the driven bogies.
Secure the undercarriage against rolling away
by means of rail clamps on the bogies. Make
sure that the rail clamps encompass the rail
head.
04.15
bogie, driven
bogie, not driven
swivel arm support, rigid
swivel arm support, movable
rail clamps
Mount the electrical panel, steps, platforms as

well as the cable drum for the travel gear on
the undercarriage. The cable drum is secured
in the middle of the rail on the side of the
undercarriage opposite the steps. Fastening is
effected by means of bolts.
Connect the two power cables from the
electrical panel to the drive motors of the driven
bogies.
Connect the power supply lead to the electrical
panel of the foundation cross as well as to the
construction site distributor.
04.15
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
5.1 / 00
01.09.

!ATTENTION
the undercarriage must be exactly levelled
out horizontally in longitudinal and transverse
mounting crane (
Chapter Crane erection
"Attachment points and weights - tower
sections"). Depending on the type of crane to
be erected, the lowermost tower element can
be a standard tower section or a reinforced
tower section (TSV) either with or without struts
(
Chapter Crane configurations "Version
E - hook heights").
Mount the lowermost tower element onto the
undercarriage and bolt the two parts to each
other. If a reinforced tower section (TSV) with
struts has been fitted as the lowermost tower
element:
Secure the struts with pins to the TSV tower
section and to the undercarriage. Secure all
pins with two split pins each.
Mount the central ballast onto the undercarriage.
The amount of ballast required varies according
to tower height and jib length. Refer to the crane
manufacturer's central ballast tables for the
specific tower height and jib length to be
installed (
Chapter Crane configurations
"Version E - hook heights").
WARNING:
central ballast blocks are securley in place on
the undercarriage.
04.15
04.15
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
08.03.
04.16 1/1 Attachment points and weights - undercarriage
U 1021
04.16
12.14 t / 26 760 lbs
F 400 driven
F 400 not driven
n:\kunden\terex\sk575\kp04\englisch\kp041601.doc
0.75 t / 1 650 lbs

0.49 t / 1 080 lbs
04.16
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK / SN
5.1 / 00
12.12.
04.18 1/5 Version F mounting the crane substructure

6.20 m (FK 310)
6.85 m (FK 410, FK 414)
Crane on stationary undercarriage
WARNING:
Foundation cross FK
order to install the crane substructure, that is,
to place the foundation cross on the foundation
blocks BF:
Set up the foundation blocks BF horizontally
with a mounting crane in accordance with the
dimensions of the foundation cross. The
permissible assembly tolerance between outer
edges of foundation blocks is 20 mm
3
( /4 inches).
0.7 m
1.0 m
5.05 m (FK 514, FK 518, FK 519)

6.05 m (FK 619)
3.40 m (FK 310)

4.05 m (FK 410, FK 414)
All lifting parts of tower crane by an

auxiliary crane during erection must be
performed so as to avoid jarring of or
shocks to the crane's structural, electrical
or mechanical components. It is the
responsibility of the jobsite mangement to
ensure that these instructions are strictly
followed.
5.05 m (FK 514, FK 518, FK 519)

6.05 m (FK 619)
(FK 310)
(FK 410, FK 414)
(FK 514)
(FK 518, FK 519)
(FK 619)
WARNING:
3.40 m (FK 310)

4.05 m (FK 410, FK 414)
4.10 m
4.75 m
5.75 m
6.05 m
7.05 m
Do not attempt to install any tower elements

if wind speed exceeds 39.8 mph (64 km/h).
Do not attempt to install counterjib or boom
if wind speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h).
Check local weather conditions and
forecasts at all times.
2.8 m
! Level the foundation blocks BF using a spirit

level.
! Attach the foundation cross to the assembly
crane (!
! Chapter Crane erection
"Attachment points and weights foundation cross").
! Lift the foundation cross to a height of
approx. 0.5 - 1.0 m (1'-8'' to 3'-3'').
! Remove transport restraints between the
swivel arms and the longitudinal girder (see
sketch).
P os ition in tr a n s p or t
T ra n s p or t r es tr ain ts
C ott e r p in s
04.18
(FK 310, FK 410, FK 414, FK 514)

(FK 518, FK 519, FK 619)
7.85 m (FK 514, FK 518, FK 519)

8.85 m (FK 619)
G rip p in s
04.18
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK / SN
5.1 / 00
12.12.

! Swing out the swivel arms and bolt them in
working position. Secure all pins with split
pins.
! Place the foundation cross on the
foundation blocks BF (for orientation please
refer to the sketch on page 1).
! If the foundation cross is not supported
evenly by all foundation blocks BF, the
swivel arm that is not supported must be
packed (e.g. with several pieces of sheet
steel).
!ATTENTION
! Mount the steps on the foundation cross.

assembly crane (!
! Chapter Crane
- tower sections"). Depending on the type
of crane to be erected, the lowermost tower
element can be a standard tower section or
a reinforced tower section (TSV) either with
or without struts (!
! Chapter Crane
heights").
! Mount the lowermost tower element onto the
foundation cross and bolt the two parts to
each other.

the foundation cross must be levelled out
horizontally in longitudinal and transverse
If a reinforced tower section (TSV) with struts

has been fitted as the lowermost tower
element:
! Anchor the foundation cross to the

foundation blocks BF using turnbuckles.
! Secure the struts with pins to the TSV tower

section and to the foundation cross. Secure
all pins with two split pins each.
! Mount the central ballast BZ onto the

foundation cross. The number of ballast
blocks is dependent on the height of the
crane (!
! Chapter Crane configurations
"Version E - hook heights").
WARNING:

central ballast blocks are securley in place
on the foundation cross.
1
1
2
3
4
foundation block BF
foundation cross
turnbuckle
shim plates
04.18
04.18
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK / SN
5.1 / 00
12.12.

Undercarriage U
order to install the crane substructure, that is,
to place the undercarriage on the foundation
blocks BF:
!
Set up the foundation blocks BF

horizontally with a assembly crane in
accordance with the dimensions of the
undercarriage. The permissible assembly
tolerance between outer edges of
3
foundation blocks is 20 mm ( /4 inches).
8.8 m (U 620, U 621)

10.8 m (U 821)
12.8 m (U 1021)
6.0 m (U 620, U 621)

8.0 m (U 821)
10.0 m (U 1021)
2.8 m
1.0 m
! Level the foundation blocks BF using a spirit

level.
! Attach the undercarriage to the assemby
crane (!
! Chapter Crane erection
"Attachment points and weights undercarriage").
! Lift the undercarriage to a height of approx.
0.5 - 1.0 m (1'-8'' to 3'-3'').
! Remove transport restraints between the
swivel arms and the undercarriage frame.
The transport restraints are located on the
end faces of the undercarriage.
! Swing out the swivel arms and bolt them to
the swivel arm supports. Secure all pins with
split pins.
! Place the undercarriage on the foundation
blocks. Pay attention to the following:
! The orientation of a climbing device is
defined by the undercarriage (see
sketch). For this reason, the orientation
of the undercarriage must be defined
before erection.
6.0 m (U 620, U 621)

8.0 m (U 821)
10.0 m (U 1021)
7.0 m (U 620, U 621)
9.0 m (U 821)
11.0 m (U 1021)
5
1
1
2
3
4
5
04.18
foundation block BF
TSV or TS tower section
climbing aid: climbing lugs or K-climbing system
jib / boom
counterjib
04.18
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK / SN
5.1 / 00
12.12.

!
If the undercarriage is not supported

evenly by all foundation blocks BF, the
swivel arm that is not supported must
be packed (e.g. with several pieces of
sheet steel).
Anchor the undercarriage to the

foundation blocks BF.
U 621, U 821, U 1021

with clevis-type eyelets and turnbuckles
1
foundation block BF
2
shim plates
3
undercarriage
4
turnbuckle
! Mount the steps and platforms on the

undercarriage.
!ATTENTION
U 620:
with traverse and turnbuckles
1
foundation block BF
2
shim plates
3
undercarriage
4
traverse
5
turnbuckle

the undercarriage must be exactly levelled
out horizontally in longitudinal and
transverse directions, if necessary with a
theodolite.
! Attach the lowermost tower element to the
mounting crane (!
! Chapter Crane
- tower sections"). Depending on the type
of crane to be erected, the lowermost tower
element can be a standard tower section or
a reinforced tower section (TSV) either with
or without struts (!
! Chapter Crane
heights").
04.18
04.18
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK / SN
5.1 / 00
12.12.

! Mount the lowermost tower element onto the
undercarriage and bolt the two parts to each
other.
If a reinforced tower section (TSV) with struts
has been fitted as the lowermost tower
element:
! Secure the struts with pins to the TSV
tower section and to the undercarriage.
Secure all pins with two split pins each.
! Mount the central ballast onto the
undercarriage. The number of ballast blocks
is dependent on the height of the crane (!
!
Chapter Crane configurations "Version E
- hook heights").
WARNING:
central ballast blocks are securley in place
on the undercarriage.
04.18
04.18
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
6.2 / 00
04.09.
04.20 1/2 Mounting the tower sections

If using a foundation cross or undercarriage,
mount first the right number of ballast blocks, it
is dependent on the height of the crane.
To mount the tower sections, the following
steps must be carried out:
The individual tower sections TS must be

arranged so that the access ladders of two
consecutive tower sections are offset in
relation to each other (applies for TS 18, TS
19, TS 20, TS 211, TS 212, TS 213, see
sketch).
Attach a tower section TS to the assembly

crane ( Chapter Crane Erection
"Attachment points and mounting
weights - tower sections").
Place the tower section TS on the tower

element last mounted (TS or TSV). The
following points must be noted:
If the crane is to be fitted with a climbing

device, the climbing aids of the individual
tower sections must all be arranged on the
same side.
The climbing aids for different tower sections
are listed below:
TS 14, TS 19, TS 211, TS 212, TS 213
Climbing lugs
TS 18, TS 20
Climbing system
Note:
The tower section TS 10 is not fitted with
climbing aids and therefore not climbable.
With tower elements of Type TS 10 and TS 14,

where vertical access ladders are incorporated
for reasons of space, the individual tower
sections must be mounted in such a way that
the openings of the rest platforms are offset
with respect to each other (see sketch). This
only applies for tower element TS 14 if the
crane is not climbed (otherwise see note
below).
Previous tower element
The climbing device or climbing lugs must be

turned at 90 to the building, with that the jib is
parallel to the building for the climbing down
process.
1
2
1
2
04.20
Tower element to be mounted
Access ladder
rest platform (3 grids)
04.20
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
6.2 / 00
04.09.
04.20 2/2 Mounting the tower sections

Note:
If a crane with tower TS 14 is to be climbed,
then the climbing lugs of the individual tower
sections must all be arranged towards the
same side. This means, however, that the
openings of the rest platforms are exactly over
each other and are not offset in relation to each
other. For this reason the access ladders, the
struts for fixing the access ladders at the
bottom (one strut for each tower section) and
the rest platforms of every second tower
section must be dismantled, offset by 180 and
refitted.
Bolt the lower ladder extension to the access

ladder of the tower section TS last fitted.
Mount all tower sections TS in this way until the
tower has reached the required height (for
number of tower elements required for various
tower heights Chapter Crane
configurations "Version A - tower heights"
or "Version E - tower heights" or "Version F
- tower heights").
Connect the higher tower section TS to the

tower element below it (TS or TSV). To do
this, the following tower connection elements
must be used:
Tower section
TS 10, TS 14, TS 19, TS 211, TS 212 Heavyduty bolt
Tower section
TS 18, TS 20, TS 213
HV tension rod
WARNING:
Do not use an impact wrench to torque or
check high-tensile bolts. Failre to observe
this warning is extremly dangerous and may
lead to an accident resulting in property
damage, serious injury, or loss of life.
For more details on tower connecting elements
Chapter Crane erection "Notes on tower
connecting elements".
04.20
04.20
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
6.1 / 00
27.09.
04.21 1/1 Attachment points and weights tower sections

The TS and TSV tower sections are attached
in the same way. The attachment points are
shown with TS as an example (see sketch).
The following table shows the weights of the
individual tower elements.
Tower element
Weight
Comments
TS
10.3
1.8 t
- 4.0 kips
TS
10.4
3.4 t
- 7.5 kips
TSV
10.3
2.0 t
- 4.4 kips
TS
14.3
1.5 t
- 3.3 kips
TS
14.4
2.8 t
- 6.2 kips
TS
14.5
0.8 t
- 1.8 kips
TSV
14.3
1.7 t
- 3.7 kips
TS
18.2
1.3 t
- 2.9 kips
TS
18.3
3.5 t
- 7.7 kips
TSV
18.2
3.0 t
- 6.6 kips
TS
19.1
2.6 t
- 5.7 kips
TS
19.2
5.2 t - 11.5 kips
TSV
19.1
2.8 t
TSV
19
6.0 t - 13.3 kips
TS
20.2
2.1 t
- 4.6 kips
TS
20.3
4.5 t
- 9.9 kips
TSV
20.2
5.1 t - 11.2 kips
TS
211.1
2.7 t
TS
211.2
6.1 t - 13.5 kips
TSV
211.1
6.6 t - 14.6 kips
TS
212.1
4.2 t
TSV
212.1
9.3 t - 20.5 kips
including struts
TSK
212.1
2.5 t
- 5.5 kips
top ascent unit
TS
213.1
4.5 t
- 9.9 kips
TSV
213.1
TSK
212/213
3.1 t
- 6.8 kips
TS
213/212
4.6 t
-10.1 kips
04.21
- 6.2 kips
including struts
including struts
- 6.0 kips
including struts
- 9.3 kips
14.1 t - 31.1 kips

including struts
04.21
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK, SN
4.1 / 99
27.01.
04.22 1/6 Notes on tower connecting elements

Giant bolts for tower
TS 10, TS 14, TS 19, TS 211, TS 212
The main prerequisite for this threaded
connection is cleanliness.
The faces of the cornerpost connections and the
mating surfaces must be clean bare metal. Any
residual paint, grease or dirt could lead to
settling and resultant loosening of the joint. The
same applies to thick zinc slag on bolt threads
and the heads of new bolts.
All threads of nuts and bolts must be free of dirt
and grime. Prior to their installation, all threads
must be lightly greased (molybdenum sulfide
base).
The threaded connections between the various
tower sections require a torque of roughly 2000
Nm / 1475 ftlbs (TS 10, TS 14), 3000 Nm /
2313 ftlbs (TS 19) or 4000 Nm / 2950 ftlbs (TS
211, TS 212), which can be applied with the aid
of a torque wrench or a slug wrench and a 5 kg
sledge hammer.
The hexagon head bolts are inserted from
above, and the hexagon nuts screwed on from
below.
1
2
Slugging box wrench

Tower section
! ATTENTION
There are two different giant bolts M 48!
M 48 class 8.8 for
TS 10, TS 14
M 48 class 10.9 for
TS 19
Make sure that you don't mix them up!
04.22
04.22
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK, SN
4.1 / 99
27.01.

To loosen hexagon head bolts, turn them to the
left.
Retaining rings are provided to lock tightened
hexagon head bolts in place.
After tightening the threaded connection, place
the retaining ring over the head of the bolt such
that the setscrew can be tightened to lock it in
place (cf. photo at right).
Finally, lock the setscrew with a hexagon nut. If,
due to settling, an air gap should appear in the
tower section connection, retighten and lock the
connection.
1
2
3
4
04.22
Hexagon head bolt

Lock washer
Threaded pin
Hexagon nut
04.22
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK, SN
4.1 / 99
27.01.

Tower Sections TS 18, TS 20, TS 213
HS Connection
Preparations
The threads of all bolts, anchor bars, screws and
nuts must be completely clean and free of any
damage attributable to packaging,
transportation, etc. Inspect the thread flanks
and, preferably, screw the nuts onto the bolts or
bars prior to assembly ("trial run") to ensure that
they will turn easily all the way down to the
bearing surface on the shank of the bolt or bar.
1
2
3
Hydraulic bolt tensioner

Hydraulic tensioning element
High-pressure valve
Rotatlng joint
! ATTENTION
Lubricate the anchor bars with MOS2
(molybdenum sulfide) grease.
Ensure that the threads receive abundant
grease, MOS2 lubrication prevents seizure.
Also, check the turn sleeve in the spanner for
ease of rotation and lubricate as necessary.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
04.22
High-pressure seal
Double nipple
High-pressure seal
Quick-closing connector
High-pressure seal
High-pressure hose
High-pressure seal
Quick-closing connector
High-pressure seal
Nipple
High-pressure seal
Distributor
High-pressure metal gasket
Hand-operated lever pump
Nipple
Union nut
High-pressure gauge
04.22
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK, SN
4.1 / 99
27.01.

Installing the anchor bar
Turn the nut by hand onto the anchor bar.
Note:
Be sure that the projecting threads (B) of the
anchor bar are exactly as shown in the drawing
at right. Ensure that all threads help carry the
load and that the nut does not project into the
clearance.
Do not tighten the anchor bars with a

wrench, but instead insert them loosely to
ensure that they will be able to center
themselves when the bolt tensioner is
applied.
Nonoberservance in this respect could lead

to jamming of the bolt tensioner and/or the
threaded connection.
Mounting the tensioning cylinder

1
With the aid of a 27-mm (1 /16'' wrench applied

to the hexagan on the rotating joint, turn the
tensioning cylinder onto the projecting threads.
Ensure that:
the disk spring is holding the piston in its

home position,
the groove in the support sleeve or worm

drive is accessible for tightening the hexagon
nut.
If the high-pressure hose gets in the way during

mounting of the cylinder, open the quick-closing
connector and remove it.
04.22
04.22
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK, SN
4.1 / 99
27.01.

Activating the bolt tensioner
Once the cylinder has been properly threaded
onto the subject threaded connection and the
high-pressure hose replaced (if applicable), the
system can be pressurized. Ensure that the
pressure relief valve on the hand pump is
properly connected. The tensioning cylinder has
two vent screws for bleeding the air out of the
pressurized hydraulic system. To do so, open
the vents two or three turns with the aid of a 4mm Allan key (hexagon socket wrench), and the
air will escape. As soon as pure oil emerges
from the vents, close and tighten the vent
screws. Proper venting is very irnportant and
must be repeated several tirnes. Then, the
tensioning element can be pumped up to the
specified tension force.
Once the specified tension force is achieved,
wait several seconds to give the anchor tie
connection time to settle in.
Afterward, retighten the nut on the turn sleeve or
worm drive.
To remove the implement, open the relief valve
on the hand pump, allowing the hydraulic fluid to
flow back into the reservoir. The piston
automatically returns to its home position by
force of disk spring stacks.
To compensate for settling, repeat the
tensioning procedure immediately after
completion of the first-tensioning sequence.
04.22
04.22
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK, SN
4.1 / 99
27.01.

Replacing the swap sleeve
Loosen the 4 mm hexagon socket screws to
permit extraction of the turn sleeve out of its
support. Pound out the dowel pin and tum the
swap sleeve off of the piston rod with the aid of
an offset two-nut wrench.
Hydraulic bolt tensioner, type PLARAD
Hydraulic wrench data

Tension rod
36 mm / 1'- /16''
39 mm / 1'- /16''
Property
class
Max. pretension
[kN] / [kips]
Specified
pressure
[bar]
10.9
550 / 1210
10.9
660 / 1450
* Cf. operating instructions for the hydraulic bolt

tensioner.
! ATTENTION:
When working with a hydraulic bolt
tensioner, be sure to comply with all
applicable accident prevention regulations
and take suitable measures to protect all
personnel involved.
As long as the cylinder is under high
pressure, do not loiter on the front end of the
tensioner (in the direction of tensile force).
Adopt protective measures in accordance
with the case in question. All responsibility
lies with the user.
04.22
04.22
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
27.03.
04.23 1/4 Mounting the turntable

The turntable is mounted in three steps.
1. Attach the cabin platform to the turntable
2. Mount the turntable
3. Mount the tower top
Insert grip pins into the two fixing devices to

lock the connection between cabin platform
and turntable. Secure the grip pins with cotter
pins ( Chapter Crane erection
"Fastenings").
Finally, the turntable is connected to the main

power supply.
Attach the cabin platform to the turntable
Attach the cabin platform to the erection

crane.
Run the cables from the slewing gear

motors into the electrical panel and plug in
( Chapter Annex "Wiring diagram").
Mount the turntable
Attach the turntable to the erection crane at

the attachment points identified with
attachment symbols (see diagram).
11.8 t / 26.01 kips
Fit the cabin platform into the fixing devices

provided on the turntable.
04.23
Lift turntable approximately 1 m / 3' using

the erection crane.
04.23
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
27.03.
Fix the main power supply for the crane

(the tower cable) in the access hole in the
turntable. Use the cable holders provided in
the access hole to relieve the strain on the
tower cable.
Screw nuts onto the studs for subsequently

fastening the turntable to the tower (
Chapter Crane erection "Fastenings").
Insert studs into the through holes provided
in the turntable and tighten the nuts to
prevent them falling off.
Use the erection crane to lift the turntable to

just above the tower.
Set down the turntable on the top tower

section.
Bolt the turntable to the top tower section.
Fix the main power supply (tower cable) to

the tower.
Note:
Strain relief devices should be used when
fastening the tower cable ( Chapter Site
preparation "Electrical connection").
Erect ladder in the access hole in the

turntable. Fasten in place with bolts and
nuts.
Remove the nuts used to prevent the studs

falling off.
04.23
04.23
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
27.03.

Mount the tower top
Attach the tower top to the erection crane

using the fixing eyelets in the center of the
top stretcher.
t
4.5 t / 9.92 kips
Lift tower top using the erection crane until

it is just above the turntable, then lower it
slowly. Bolt tower top and turntable
together at both sides of the front butt strap
connection, and secure bolted joints with
lock plates ( Chapter Crane erection
"Fastenings").
04.23
Slowly lower the tower top further, bolt to

turntable on both sides of rear butt strap
connection, and secure bolted joints with
lock plates.
04.23
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
27.03.
Remove the locking bolts at the bottom end

of the two suspension bars for the counterjib.
Fold out the two mounting supports at the

top end of the tower top.
Lower the two suspension bars with the

erection crane until they are lying on the
mounting supports.
1
2
Attach the two suspension bars to the

erection crane using the attachment rope
provided. Then lift with the erection crane
until the mounting supports at the top end
of the tower top can be folded out.
Electrical connections
04.23
Run the tower cable into the terminal box,

and fix the individual wires to the terminals
( Chapter Site preparation "Electrical
connection").
04.23
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
31.03.
04.26 1/4 Mounting the counterjib

Follow the steps described below to mount the
counter-jib.
Attach safety chains at the connection

between the counter-jib sections (on both
sides).
Attach the suspension bar for the counter-jib

to the erection crane at the attachment points
provided.
Lift the suspension bar approximately 1.2 m /

4 using the erection crane. Bolt the mounting
support to the suspension bar, and secure the
bolted joint.
Attach counter-jib section 1 to the erection

crane at the attachment points identified
with attachment symbols (see diagram).
t
2.7 t / 5 950 lbs
Use the erection crane to lift counter-jib

section 1 until it is immediately beside
counter-jib section 2. Bolt the two counterjib sections together on both sides, and
secure the bolted joint ( Chapter Crane
erection "Fastenings").
04.26
c:\eigene dateien\betriebsanleitungen\sprache\englisch\sk575\kp04\kp0426a.doc
04.26
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
31.03.
Use the erection crane to lift the

suspension bar over the counter-jib so that
the mounting support is directly over the
connection between the counter-jib
sections. Slowly lower the mounting
support until it is lying on the butt strap of
counter-jib section 2.
Fix the guide rope to the rear end of the

counter-jib.
Attach the counter-jib to the erection crane
at the attachment points identified with
attachment symbols.
t
Lower the suspension bar further with the

erection crane. Bolt the suspension bar to
the fixed suspension bar on counter-jib
section 2, and secure the bolted joint.
13.5 t / 29 770 lbs(with hoist winch 102 WB)

+ 1.1 t / 2 420 lbs(hoist rope 26)
Lift the counter-jib with the erection crane

until it is no longer touching the ground.
Check that the counter-jib is suspended at
an angle of min. 8. If this is not the case, set
the counter-jib down on the ground and
select new attachment points.
~ 8
Repeat the last 4 steps to mount the

second suspension bar.
04.26
04.26
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
31.03.
Remove the grip pins from the locking

device at the articulation point and fold up
the locking device (at both articulation
points). Lock folded-up locking device with
grip pins, and secure grip pins with cotter
pins. Lift the counter-jib until it is
immediately beside the articulation point.
04.26
Insert the counter-jib into the articulation

points. Fold the locking device down (at
both articulation points). Lock folded-down
locking device with grip pins, and secure
grip pins with cotter pins.
Lower the counter-jib slightly with the

erection crane. Bolt the suspension bars
on counter-jib section 2 and on the tower
top together, and secure the bolted joint (on
both sides of the counter-jib).
04.26
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
31.03.
Lower counter-jib until the bracing stay is

fully tensioned. Remove attachments from
the counter-jib.
Fold the bracing stay mounting support into

position on both sides of the tower top.
04.26
04.26
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
31.03.
04.28 1/1 Place erection counterweight in position
There are two different counteweight blocks

BG ( Chapter Appendix "Counterweight
block BG 1.45 t / 3 200 lbs" and
"Counterweight block BG 3.1 t / 6 800 lbs")
Direction of tower
L 4 = 55 m / 180'-5'' - L 9 = 80 m / 262'-6''
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
Before the crane can be mounted, it has be

checked whether an erection counterweight
has to be positioned or not. If there is the need
to place an erection counterweight, then make
sure that the right counterweight block will be
positioned in the right insertion position (there
are 12 insertion positions alltogther!)
Before the installation , check the

counterweight block for any cracks.
! Caution
Protect the padeyes against corrosion,

particulary near the concrete, any joint
openings should best be filled with elastic
mastic.
Before the counterweight is inserted, each

individual counterweight block must be visually
inspected. A counterweight block which is
cracked or crumbing, or with damaged
suspensions points, must not be used for
reasons of safety.
Don't use any counterweight blocks which are

cracked or have crumbled-off spots.
See the complete counterweights for all jib
lengths in the following illustrations:
To insert the counterweight, the following steps

must be carried out:
No ballast blocks must be placed here!
Attach the counterweight block to the

assembly crane. The counterweight
block(s) must be insered vertically, and for
this reason they have an attachment eyelet
on the upper side.
!Caution
Direction of tower
L 1 = 40 m / 131'-3'' - L 3 = 50 m / 164'-0''
The erection counterweight must always be in

the rearmost insertion position, i.e. in the
insertion position furthermost from the tower.
04.28
Insert the counterweight block in the

intended insertion position. The correct and
therefore safe position of the counterweight
block must be checked immediately after
insertion.
04.28
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
28.02.
04.36 1/1 Notes on jib assembly

In general, the jib is mounted in two parts. The
terms used for the two jib parts and their
position in the crane are made clear by the
following schematic diagramm
It is also possible to mount the jib in one piece.

But this method is not as easy as mkounting
the jib in two parts and some experiences in
mounting the crane could helpful. Nevertheless
the jib mounting in one piece is also described
in the following chapters.
The following aids are required to mount the jib:
Assembly rope with one loose end and a

cable eye steffener at the other end.
Length of the assembly rope L: 30.00 m /
100'-0'.
Attachment device with a length of at least

6.00 m / 20'-0''.
Note:
The use of heavy-duty belts as attachment
devices is recommended, since they do not
damage the paint on the jib.
04.36
04.36
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
09.03.
04.39 1/9 Preassembly of the rear part of the jib

Attach jib section 2 to the erection crane.
3.1 t
With the erection crane, lift jib section 2 until it is against the end of jib section 1.
Bolt the two jib sections together and secure the bolted joints (upper chord: split pins; lower chord: lock plates;
04.39
04.39
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
09.03.

Attach the adjusting strap for bracing the rear part of the jib to the fixing eyelet on the erection crane.
Remove the bolts from the adjusting strap fixing point.
Bolt the adjusting strap to the fixing point and secure the joint with split pins.
04.39
04.39
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
09.03.

Lower the adjusting strap further until it is lying on the upper chord of the jib section.
Attach and then tighten the safety rope for the rear part of the jib.
Plan view
Check the positions of the hoist rope sheaves in all the trolleys to be mounted, and change if necessary (see
diagrams).
Inner trolley (both trolleys mounted)
Outer trolley (only outer trolley mounted)
Outer trolley (both trolleys mounted)
Towards the jib tip
04.39
04.39
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
09.03.

If the crane is to be operated with both trolleys:
Attach the inner trolley to the erection crane, and lift it against the end of the outer trolley.
1.3 t
Attach the rear part of the jib to the erection crane.
6.7 t
Lift the rear part of the jib until it lies directly against the end of the inner trolley, then slowly thread the two
trolleys onto the lower chord. Push the trolleys until they reach the stop buffer at the other end of the rear part
of the jib.
04.39
04.39
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
09.03.

Use the levers on both sides of the bottom boom to lock the inner trolley in position (or the outer trolley if the
crane is to be operated only with the outer trolley).
Lift the rear part of the jib to a height of approximately 1.5 m / 5 using the erection crane. Attach the
supporting feet to both sides of the lower chord (clamped joint with bolts).
04.39
9.6 t
04.39
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
09.03.

Adjust the track guide rollers on all mounted trolleys (bolted joints).
Inner trolley (both trolleys mounted)
Outer trolley (only outer trolley mounted)
Outer trolley (both trolleys mounted)
Towards the jib tip

14
5
6
7
Track guide rollers

Towards the jib tip
Lower chord
Hoist rope sheaves
1. Center the trolley so that all four track rollers project the same distance over the outer edge of the lower
chord.
2. Adjust the two diagonally opposite track guide rollers 1 and 3 (see diagrams) closest to the hoist rope
entering the trolley (distance a in the diagrams) until they lie against the lower chords with no clearance.
3. Adjust the other two track guide rollers 2 and 4 so that there is a clearance of 5 6 mm / 1/5'' to 1/4'' between
them and the lower chords (distance A in the diagrams).
Lock the two trolleys together.
Lower the rear part of the jib until it is standing fully on the ground.
Reeve the pilot rope into the trolley(s) ( Chapter Crane erection "Winding up the hoist rope"), and
temporarily fix (tie) the two ends to the trolley frame.
Wind up the rear trolley rope ( Chapter Crane erection "Winding up the trolley travel rope").
04.39
04.39
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
09.03.

Remove the pins from the adjusting strap for bracing the rear part of the jib.
Plan view
Attach the first rope for bracing the rear part of the jib (Lrope = 18.73 m / 61'1/2'', 54 mm / 21/8'') to the erection
crane.
Bolt the first rope for bracing the rear part of the jib to the adjusting strap and secure the bolted joint with split
pins ( Chapter Crane erection "Fastenings").
Plan view
04.39
04.39
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
09.03.

Lower the first rope for bracing the rear part of the jib until it lies on the fixing devices on the upper chord. The
end of the rope must project roughly 1 2 m / 3' to 7' over the end of the upper chord.
Attach the second rope for bracing the rear part of the jib (Lrope = 18.73 m / 61'1/2'', 54 mm / 21/8'') to the
erection crane.
Bolt the second rope for bracing the rear part of the jib to the adjusting strap and secure the bolted joint with
split pins.
Plan view
04.39
04.39
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
09.03.

Lower the second rope for bracing the rear part of the jib until it lies on the fixing devices on the upper chord.
The end of the rope must project roughly 1 2 m / 3' to 7' over the end of the upper chord.
Attach the first rope for bracing the front part of the jib (Lrope = 21.10 m / 69'1/4'') to the erection crane, and lift
over the rear part of the jib. Attach the butt strap to the fixing device (see diagram), then lower the rope until it
lies on the fixing devices on the upper chord.
Attach the second rope for bracing the front part of the jib (Lrope = 21.10 m / 69'1/4'') to the erection crane, and
lift over the rear part of the jib. Attach the butt strap to the fixing device, then lower the rope until it lies on the
fixing devices on the upper chord.
Attach mounting clamps to all free rope ends with a thimble for attaching a rope or chain block.
04.39
04.39
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
09.03.
04.45 1/1 Notes on preassembly of the front part of the jib

Preassembly of the front part of the jib is
described in two chapters:
"Preassembly of the front part of the jib

L1 = 40 m"
"Preassembly of the front part of the jib

L2 to L9"
Preassembly of the front part of the jib is only

described in detail for jib length L1 = 40 m /
131'3''. Some steps in the "Preassembly of
the front part of the jib L1 = 40 m" chapter
have numbers at the end of each step. These
numbers relate to points in the "Preassembly
of the front part of the jib L2 to L9" chapter.
In some places, it is important to note whether
the jib is mounted in two parts or as a single
piece, since this will determine the procedure
to follow when preassembling the front part of
the jib. An additional code beside the number
indicates those steps that relate only to one of
the two methods of assembling the jib. Thus,
all numbers with the code /1 indicate
mounting the jib in a single piece, while those
with a /2 refer to mounting the jib in two parts.
The equipment required to preassemble the
front part of the jib is described in Chapter
Crane erection "Notes on jib assembly".
04.45
04.45
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.
04.51 1/13 Preassembly of the front part of the jib L1 = 40 m

Attach the adjusting strap for bracing the front part of the jib to the fixing eyelet on the erection crane. (1)
Remove the bolts from the adjusting strap fixing point (jib section 4).
Bolt the adjusting strap to the fixing point and secure the joint with split pins. (2)
04.51
04.51
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

Lower the adjusting strap further until it is lying on the upper chord of the jib section. (3)
Attach jib section 4 to the erection crane.
1.4 t
With the erection crane, lift jib section 4 against the end of jib section 3.
04.51
04.51
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

Bolt the two jib sections together and secure the bolted joints (upper chord: split pins; lower chord: lock plates;
Attach the safety rope for the front part of the jib, and fix temporarily to the transition to the rear part of the jib.
(4)
Plan view
1.6 m / 5'
04.51
04.51
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

Attach the deflection sheave to the erection crane, and detach it from the adjusting strap. (5)
Unbolt the rope safeguard support (2 bolts). (6)
Attach a rope clamp 46 mm / 113/16'' to the rope for bracing the front part of the jib (Lrope = 37.94 m /
124'6'').
5.30 m
5.80 m
37.94 m
04.51
04.51
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

Attach the rope for bracing the front part of the jib to the two thimbles on the erection crane, and lift up to the
adjusting strap. Insert the loop of rope into the adjusting strap. Make sure that the rope is on the correct
side (see diagram).
Rope clamp = left side of jib
Plan view
Pressure clamp = right side of jib
Lower the rope for bracing the front part of the jib. (7)
04.51
04.51
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

Attach the deflection sheave to the erection crane, push it into the adjusting strap, and bolt in place. (8)
Bolt on the rope safeguard support (2 bolts). (9)
Attach the rope for bracing the front part of the jib once again to the two thimbles on the erection crane, then
lift with the erection crane until the rope is suspended fully over the upper chord.
04.51
04.51
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

Remove the rope safeguard bolts from the A-frame. (10)
Place the ropes in the guides on the A-frame. Lock the pressure clamp in position in the guide (see diagram).
(11)
04.51
04.51
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

Return the bolts to the rope safeguard, and secure with split pins. (12)
Lower all the ropes. (13)
Attach the A-frame to the erection crane. (14)
04.51
04.51
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

Lift the A-frame until it is almost vertical. Secure the A-frame using the mounting support on the upper chord to
prevent it tipping forward. (15)
Attach the front part of the jib to the erection crane. (16)
04.51
4.5 t
04.51
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

If the jib is mounted in two parts:
Lift the front part of the jib using the erection crane. Place shims beneath the front part of the jib and lower with
the erection crane. (17/2)
If the entire jib is mounted (i.e. the front and rear parts of the jib in a single piece):
Lift the front part of the jib against the rear part of the jib using the erection crane. Bolt the two parts of the jib
together at the two lower chords, and secure the bolted joint with lock plates ( Chapter Crane erection
"Fastenings"). Place shims beneath the front part of the jib and lower with the erection crane. (17/1)
04.51
04.51
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

Attach the rope station to the erection crane. (18)
Mount the rope station on the tip of the front part of the jib. (19)

Continue from Chapter Crane erection "Mounting the front part of the jib".
04.51
04.51
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

The following steps are only needed if the complete jib is mounted in a single piece:
Attach both ends of the rope for bracing the front part of the jib to the erection crane (not using the thimble),
and lift the rope the nearest butt strap on the upper chord of the rear part of the jib. Bolt each thimble to the
butt strap, and secure the bolted joint with split pins. (20/1)
Connect the rear part of the jib to the front:

Fold up the connecting strap that is hanging down, and pin to the butt strap in the upper chord of jib section 3
(front part of the jib). Secure the joint with split pins. (21/1)
04.51
04.51
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

Attach the safety rope for the front part of the jib to the eyelet on the rear part of the jib, and tighten the safety
rope. (22/1)
Plan view
Wind up the front trolley rope ( Chapter Crane erection "Winding up the trolley travel rope").
Continue from Chapter Crane erection "Mounting the complete jib".
04.51
04.51
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
03.04.
04.52 1/5 Preassembly of the front part of the jib L2 to L9

Attach the adjusting strap for bracing the front part of the jib to the fixing eyelet on the erection crane.
Chapter Crane erection "Preassembly of the front part of the jib L1 = 40 m" (1)
Remove the bolts from the adjusting strap fixing point (jib section 5).
Bolt the adjusting strap to the fixing point and secure the joint with split pins. (2)
Lower the adjusting strap further until it is lying on the upper chord of the jib section. (3)
04.52
04.52
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
03.04.

Fit the sections of the front part of the jib together:
Attach the jib sections one after another to the erection crane, lift each section against the end of the previous
jib section, and bolt the two sections to one another. Secure the bolted joints (upper chord: split pins; lower
chord: lock plates; Chapter Crane erection "Fastenings").
Assembling the front part of the jib for the various jib lengths
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
L9
04.52
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
3
3
3
3
04.52
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
03.04.

Attach the safety rope for the front part of the jib, and fix temporarily to the transition to the rear part of the jib.
(4)
Attach the deflection sheave to the erection crane, and detach it from the adjusting strap. (5)
Unbolt the rope safeguard support (2 bolts). (6)
Prepare the rope for bracing the front part:
Join the rope sections provided using butt straps. Secure the pins of the strapped joint with split pins. (see
diagrammAttach a rope clamp to the (outer) short rope section (Lrope = 9.77 m / 321/16') for bracing the front
part of the jib (see diagram).
Configuration of the rope for L2, L4, L6 and L8
5.30 m
5.80 m
37.94 m
9.77 m
Configuration of the rope for L3, L5, L7 and L9
5.30 m
5.80 m
37.94 m
04.52
9.77 m
9.77 m
04.52
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
03.04.

Attach the rope for bracing the front part of the jib to the two thimbles on the erection crane, and lift up to the
adjusting strap. Insert the loop of rope into the adjusting strap. Make sure that the rope is on the correct
side (see diagram).
Plan view
Plan view
Lower the rope for bracing the front part of the jib. (7)
Attach the deflection sheave to the erection crane, push it into the adjusting strap, and bolt in place. (8)
Configuration for L2, L4, L6, L8
Configuration of L3, L5, L7, L9
Bolt on the rope safeguard support (2 bolts). (9)

Attach the rope for bracing the front part of the jib once again to the two thimbles on the erection crane, then
lift with the erection crane until the rope is suspended fully over the upper chord.
Remove the rope safeguard bolts from the A-frame. (10)
04.52
04.52
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
03.04.

Place the ropes in the guides on the A-frame. Lock the pressure clamp in position in the guide (see diagram).
(11)
Return the bolts to the rope safeguard, and secure with split pins. (12)
Lower all the ropes. (13)
Attach the A-frame to the erection crane. (14)
Lift the A-frame until it is almost vertical. Secure the A-frame using the mounting support on the upper chord to
prevent it tipping forward. (15)
Attach the front part of the jib to the erection crane. (16)
Lift the front part of the jib using the erection crane. Place shims beneath the front part of the jib and lower with
the erection crane. (17/2)
If the entire jib is mounted (i.e. the front and rear parts of the jib in a single piece):
Lift the front part of the jib against the rear part of the jib using the erection crane. Bolt the two parts of the jib
together at the two lower chords, and secure the bolted joint with lock plates ( Chapter Crane erection
"Fastenings"). Place shims beneath the front part of the jib and lower with the erection crane. (17/1)
Attach the rope station to the erection crane. (18)
Mount the rope station on the tip of the front part of the jib. (19)
Continue from Chapter Crane erection "Mounting the front part of the jib".
The following steps are only needed if the complete jib is mounted in a single piece:
Attach both ends of the rope for bracing the front part of the jib to the erection crane (not using the thimble),
and lift the rope the nearest butt strap on the upper chord of the rear part of the jib. Bolt each thimble to the
butt strap, and secure the bolted joint with split pins. (20/1)
Connect the rear part of the jib to the front:
Fold up the connecting strap that is hanging down, and pin to the butt strap in the upper chord of jib section 3
(front part of the jib). Secure the joint with split pins. (21/1)
Attach the safety rope for the front part of the jib to the eyelet on the rear part of the jib, and tighten the safety
rope. (22/1)
Wind up the front trolley rope ( Chapter Crane erection "Winding up the trolley travel rope").
Continue from Chapter Crane erection "Mounting the complete jib".
04.52
04.52
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
09.05.
04.53 1/1 Configuration of jib suspension
04.53
04.53
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.3 / 09
15.09.
04.60 1/10 Attachment points and weights jib

Attachment points and weights - complete jib with single trolley (jib in one piece).
Note: The attachment points must be marked for dismantling and markings must be legible and
durable (i.e. with hose clamps). Any adjustment to attachment points must be mirrored equally, front
to rear, about central lift point. Lift points may deviate from those indicated below due to pendant
placement amongst other reasons. Therefore, it is mandatory that test lifts be performed on any of
the configurations shown to ensure a balanced load prior to final lift. Prior to performing the test lift,
ensure that the correct jib configuration is referenced and ensure that the jib and components are
assembled correctly.
If the jib configuration is altered while the crane is erected and therefore no lifting points established,
reference the appropriate configuration below. The pendant arrangement must match the
instructions in the manual. Specifically, refer to chapters covering jib assembly (chapters 4.39 to
4.52) for proper arrangement of the pendant ropes.
The trolley(s) is(are) always located at the rear part of the jib. Specifically, the trolley(s) should
contact the stop buffers and be secured with the levers on the bottom of the jib. Reference Chapter
04.39 Preassembly of the rear part of the jib for details on securing the trolley.
The term node is used below to represent the rigging location on the jib. A node is the point on the
jib where the vertical diagonal round tubing (lacing) meets the top horizontal square tubing (chord).
Reference image below for further clarification.
Outside
Center
Node
04.60
sk575-om_chp-0460_20090915.doc
04.60
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.3 / 09
15.09.
16.5m [54.0ft]
L1
14.8t
32,700lbs
10
Node 8 (outside)
Node 10 (center)
40.8m [133.8ft]
19.3m [63.4ft]
10
L2
16.0t
35,200lbs
11
Node 10 (outside)
Node 11 (center)
45.9m [150.5ft]
20.7m [68.0ft]
10-11
L3
17.3t
38,200lbs
12
Node 10-11 (pulley brkt)

Node 12 (outside)
50.9m [166.9ft]
L4
18.0t
39,800lbs
22.3m [73.2ft]
Node 11 (outside)
Node 13 (center)
13
11
55.9m [183.2ft]
24.5m [80.2ft]
Node 12 (center)
Node 14 (outside)
14
12
60.9m [199.6ft]
25.4m [83.3ft]
65.9m [216.0ft]
27.3m [89.5ft]
14
L6
19.2t
42,300lbs
Node 13 (center)
Node 14 (center)
14
13
L5
19.3t
42,500lbs
L7
20.6t
45,300lbs
Node 14 (outside)
Node 15 (outside)
15
70.9m [232.4ft]
04.60
sk575-om_chp-0460_20090915.doc
04.60
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.3 / 09
15.09.
L8
27.2m [89.1ft]
14
15
75.8m [248.7ft]
29.2m [95.8ft]
Node 14 (outside)
Node 15 (center)
L9
15
16
80.8m [265.1ft]
04.60
20.0t
44,000lbs
sk575-om_chp-0460_20090915.doc
21.2t
46,800lbs
Node 15 (outside)
Node 16 (outside)
04.60
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.3 / 09
15.09.

Attachment points and weights - complete jib with double trolley (jib in one piece).
Outside
Center
Node
04.60
sk575-om_chp-0460_20090915.doc
04.60
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.3 / 09
15.09.
L1
16.0t
35,400lbs
16.5m [54.0ft]
10
40.8m [133.8ft]
17.4m [57.2ft]
Node 8 (outside)
Node 10 (center)
L2
17.1t
37,700lbs
10
45.9m [150.5ft]
20.4m [66.9ft]
10
Node 9 (outside)
Node 10 (outside)
L3
18.6t
40,900lbs
12
50.9m [166.9ft]
L4
19.1t
42,100lbs
21.5m [70.4ft]
13
10
55.9m [183.2ft]
13
60.9m [199.6ft]
24.3m [79.8ft]
12
14
Node 12 (center)
Node 14 (center)
L7
21.6t
47,700lbs
26.5m [86.8ft]
15
70.9m [232.4ft]
04.60
Node 12 (center)
Node 13 (outside)
L6
20.3t
44,700lbs
65.9m [216.0ft]
13
Node 10 (outside)
Node 13 (center)
L5
20.4t
45,000lbs
23.4m [76.7ft]
12
Node 10 (outside)
Node 12 (center)
sk575-om_chp-0460_20090915.doc
Node 13 (center)
Node 15 (outside)
04.60
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.3 / 09
15.09.
L8
21.0t
46,300lbs
26.3m [86.4ft]
15
13
75.8m [248.7ft]
28.1m [92.2ft]
14
16
80.8m [265.1ft]
04.60
sk575-om_chp-0460_20090915.doc
Node 13 (center)
Node 15 (center)
L9
22.3t
49,200lbs
Node 14 (outside)
Node 16 (center)
04.60
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.3 / 09
15.09.

Attachment points and weights rear part of the jib.
(single trolley)
9.1m [29.9ft]
6-7
24.0m [78.7ft]
9.5t
20,900lbs
Node 4 (outside)
Node 6-7 (vertical lacing)
(double trolley)
8.7m [28.5ft]
6
24.0m [78.7ft]
04.60
sk575-om_chp-0460_20090915.doc
10.7t
23,500lbs
Node 4 (outside)
Node 6 (outside)
04.60
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.3 / 09
15.09.

Attachment points and weights - front jib.
Outside
Center
Node
04.60
sk575-om_chp-0460_20090915.doc
04.60
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.3 / 09
15.09.
L1
4.8t
10,600lbs
8.7m [28.4ft]
6
Node 4 (outside)
Node 6 (outside)
17.4m [57.1ft]
L2
5.9t
13,100lbs
10.9m [35.7ft]
7
Node 5 (center)
Node 7 (outside)
22.5m [73.7ft]
L3
7.2t
16,000lbs
13.9m [45.7ft]
8-9
6-7
Node 6-7 (conn link)

27.5m [90.1ft]
L4
7.9t
17,300lbs
15.6m [51.2ft]
7-8

Node 9 (outside)
32.5m [106.5ft]
L5
9.2t
20,300lbs
18.0m [59.2ft]
8-9
10

Node 10 (outside)
37.5m [122.9ft]
18.7m [61.3ft]
9
11
Node 9 (outside)
Node 11 (outside)
42.5m [139.3ft]
21.5m [70.4ft]
9-10
L6
9.1t
20,100lbs
12
L7
10.4t
22,900lbs
Node 12 (center)
47.5m [155.7ft]
04.60
sk575-om_chp-0460_20090915.doc
04.60
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK 575
001
1.3 / 09
15.09.
L8
9.9t
21,800lbs
21.8m [71.5ft]
11
12
Node 11 (center)
Node 12 (outside)
52.5m [172.1ft]
23.7m [77.7ft]
11
13
57.5m [188.5ft]
04.60
sk575-om_chp-0460_20090915.doc
L9
11.1t
24,600lbs
Node 11 (outside)
Node 13 (outside)
04.60
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.
04.72 1/11 Mounting the complete jib

Mounting of the complete jib (in a single piece) is described with reference to the shortest jib (L1 = 40 m /
131'3''), although the same procedure is used for all jib lengths.
! Attention
Before mounting the jib, check that the correct number and size of counterweight ballast blocks are
suspended from the counter-jib (as specified in the operating manual).
Attach the complete jib to the erection crane.
Lift the jib to a height of approximately 1.5 m / 5' using the erection crane.
Remove the supporting feet from both sides of the jib.
Attach the guide rope to the jib tip.
Lift the jib a further 1.2 1.5 m / 4' to 5' using the erection crane. Check that the jib is horizontal. If this is not
the case, lower the jib once more, change the attachment points, and raise the jib approximately
1.5 1.8 m / 5' to 6' once more to check its position.
04.72
04.72
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

Remove the grip pins from the locking device at the articulation point and fold up the locking device (at both
articulation points). Lock the folded-up locking device with grip pins, and secure grip pins with cotter pins. Lift
the jib until it is immediately beside the turntable.
Insert the counter-jib into the articulation points. Fold the locking device down (at both articulation points). Lock
folded-down locking device with grip pins, and secure grip pins with cotter pins.
04.72
04.72
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

Fix the auxiliary rope to the hoist rope drum.
Lift (cant) the jib approximately 5 using the erection crane.
04.72
04.72
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

Guide the auxiliary rope over one of the two sheaves on the tower top. The sheave must be in the rear
mounting position (see diagram). If this is not the case, move the sheave from the front to the rear mounting
position.
Select the rear suspension rope that is on the same side of the crane as the sheave in the tower top. Secure
the auxiliary rope to the mounting clamp on this rope.
04.72
04.72
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

Actuate the LIFT function on the appropriate control lever at the control stand, then pull the rear suspension
rope attached to the auxiliary rope until it is near the articulation point in the tower top. Watch the rope the
whole time.
On the tower top, remove the bolts from the hole for the rear suspension.
04.72
04.72
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

Pull the thimble to the articulation point, and bolt to the tower top. Secure the joint with split pins.
Detach the auxiliary rope from the rope that was just fixed in position.
Repeat the last 6 steps on the other side of the crane for the second rear suspension rope.
04.72
04.72
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

Move the two sheaves on the tower top from the rear to the front mounting position.
Guide the auxiliary rope over one of the two sheaves on the tower top.
04.72
04.72
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

Select the front suspension rope that is on the same side of the crane as the sheave in the tower top. Secure
the auxiliary rope to the mounting clamp on this rope.
Actuate the LIFT function on the appropriate control lever at the control stand, then pull the front suspension
rope attached to the auxiliary rope until it is near the articulation point in the tower top. Watch the rope the
whole time.
04.72
04.72
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

On the tower top, remove the bolt from the hole for the front suspension.
Pull the thimble to the articulation point, and bolt to the tower top. Secure the joint with split pins.
04.72
04.72
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

Detach the auxiliary rope from the rope that was just fixed in position.
Repeat the last 6 steps on the other side of the crane for the second front suspension rope.
Lower the jib with the erection crane until the bracing is fully tensioned.
Danger
Risk of falling. ALWAYS attach the safety belt to the safety rope provided when walking out on the jib.
Remove the pin from the joint between the butt strap on the upper chord of jib section 3 (front part of
the jib) / connecting strap for jib section 2, then fold the connecting strap down.
04.72
04.72
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
10.03.

Remove the attachments and guide rope from the jib.
Run the cable from the trolley unit motor into the electrical panel and plug in ( Chapter Annex "Wiring
diagram").
Wind up the hoist rope ( Chapter Crane erection "Winding up the hoist rope").
Remove the locking pins from the load block (= lower hook block), and from the sheave block (= upper hook
block), if necessary.
1
2
Use the levers on both sides of the lower chord to release the inner trolley from the stop buffers (or the outer
trolley if the crane is to be operated only with the outer trolley).
If the crane is operated with both trolleys:

Release the two trolleys from one another.
04.72
04.72
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
03.04.
04.73 1/2 Rope dimensions

Hoist rope (safe working load 13.0 t / 32.0 t
(35.3 kips / 70.5 kips)
Nominal diameter:
Surface of wire:
Tensile strength:
Kind of lay:
Weight per unit length:
Minimum breaking load
Core:
26 (1'-1/8'')
bare
2
1770 N/mm
256561 psi
sS
(long-lay, left-handed)
3.38 kg/m
7.45 lbs/m
531 kN
119.37 kips
SES (steel core)
Trolley travel ropes

Nominal diameter:
Surface of wire:
Tensile strength:
Kind of lay:
Core:
12 (1'-1/8'')
galvanized
2
1960 N/mm
288450 psi
sZ
(cross-lay, right-handed)
0.69 kg/m
1.52 lbs/m
124 kN
27.88 kips
SES (steel core)
Jib suspension ropes

Nominal diameter:
Surface of wire:
Tensile strength:
Kind of lay:
Core:
Rope end fastening:
04.73
44 (1'-3/4'')
galvanized
2
1960 N/mm
288450 psi
sZ
9.574 kg/m
21.11 lbs/m
1830.8 kN
411.564 kips
SES (steel core)
2 thimbles DIN 3090 NG 48
1 press clamp
04.73
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
03.04.
04.73 2/2 Rope dimensions

Jib suspension ropes
Nominal diameter:
Surface of wire:
Tensile strength:
Kind of lay:
Core:
Rope end fastening:
04.73
54 (2'-1/8'')
galvanized
2
1960 N/mm
288450 psi
sZ
14.35 kg/m
31.64 lbs/m
2752.8 kN
618.83 kips
SES (steel core)
2 thimbles DIN 3090 NG 56
turned at 90
04.73
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
18.04.
04.74 1/1 Trolley travel rope reeving

3
2
4
1
1
2
3
4
Rope tensioning device
Reset the tension in the trolley ropes after

the first few loads.
The trolley travel ropes are tensioned by

turning (shortening) the turnbuckle on the
rope tensioning device.
Trolley
Trolley travel rope drum
Rope tensioning
Jip tip
The trolley must not be in ist rear end

position.
1
2
3
04.74
Jip top chord

Turnbuckle
Rope sheaves
04.74
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
09.03.
04.76 1/2 Hoist rope reeving

Maximum load 16 t / 32 t (35 200 lbs / 70 400 lbs):
Single trolley (2-part)
1
2
3
4
5
Hoist drum
Tower top deflection pulley
Inner trolley
Outer trolley
Hoist rope fixed point with twist compensator
2
Double trolley (4-part)
4
5
04.76
04.76
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK 575
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
09.03.
04.76 2/2 Hoist rope reeving

Maximum load 16 t (35 200 lbs):
One trolley only (2-part)
3
1
1
2
3
4
Hoist drum
Tower top deflection pulley
Trolley
Hoist rope fixed point with twist compensator
04.76
04.76
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
5.3 / 00
14.03.
04.78 1/2 Winding up the hoist rope

The hoist rope is wound up in four stages:
Reeving the initial draw rope.
Reeving the hoist rope.
Fasten the hoist rope to the jib tip.
Pull the hoist rope through the trolley and

load block using the initial draw rope from
the platform of the trolley travelling
mechanism. Only pull it until the hoist rope
projects 2 3 m / 7' 10' in the direction of
the jib tip (see sketch).
Remove the transport restraint of the load

block.
Direction of the jib tip
The hoist rope is already wound onto the hoist

drum when the crane is delivered. For this
reason, the hoist rope only needs to be
rewound (i.e. replaced by a new one) in case
of wear, otherwise it always remains on the
hoist drum.
The initial draw rope must always be drawn in
first. This is done when the jib is being
preassembled on the ground:
2 - 3 m / 7' - 10'
Clamp the hoist rope in the rope clamping

device on the trolley.
Place the initial draw rope on the rope

sheaves for the hoist rope in the trolley and
the load block
(
Chapter Crane erection "Hoist rope
reeving").
Secure the initial draw rope against falling
out, e.g. by tying it tightly to the trolley.
The hoist rope is actually drawn in when the jib
is fully assembled. The steps required for this
are as follows:
Connect the hoist rope to the reeved initial
draw rope by means of a rope cover (
Chapter Lubrication and maintenance

"Notes on working with wire ropes").
Serve the rope cover with insulating tape.
04.78
Loosen the rope cover connection between

the initial draw rope and the hoist rope.
c:\eigene dateien\betriebsanleitungen\sprache\englisch\sk\kp04\kp0478.doc
04.78
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
5.3 / 00
14.03.
04.78 2/2 Winding up the hoist rope

Move the trolley to the jib tip.
Lower the load block by at least 2 m / 7' by

activating the function "Hoist down on the
appropriate control lever at the control
stand.
Fix the hoist rope by fastening the rope

socket to the twist compensator at the jib
tip.
Run the trolley back by activating the

function "Trolley back on the appropriate
control lever at the control stand until just
before the limit stop buffer on the tower side
of the jib.
Note:
1
1
2
3
4
hoist rope
rope socket
twist
compensator
rope clamp
The limit switches are not yet activated,

therefore reduce the speed of the trolley a few
metres / feet before the limit stop buffer is
reached and carefully move the trolley furth
Loosen the rope clamping device to free the

hoist rope.
Finally, the transport restraint of the load block

must be removed.
Take the strain off the transport restraint
bolts in the load block by pressing the
assembly override pushbutton and at the
same time briefly activating the function
"Hoist up on the appropriate control lever at
the control stand (
Chapter Crane
control and operation "Control stand").
Remove the spring-loaded pins from the
transport restraint bolts.
Remove the transport restraint bolts.
Insert the transport restraint bolts in the
drilled holes on the trolley provided for
storing the bolts. Secure the transport
restraint bolts against falling out by means
of the spring-loaded pins.
04.78
04.78
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
21.02.
04.81 1/3 Completing the counterweight
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
1.45 t / 3 200 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
See the complete counterweights for all jib

lengths in the following illustrations:
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
Don't use any counterweight blocks which are

cracked or have crumbled-off spots.
L 3 = 50 m / 164'-0''
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
Protect the padeyes against corrosion,

particulary near the concrete, any joint
openings should best be filled with elastic
mastic.
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
Before the installation , check the

counterweight block for any cracks.
L 2 = 45 m / 147'-8''
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
There are two different counteweight blocks

BG ( Chapter Appendix "Counterweight
block BG 1.45 t / 3 200 lbs" and
"Counterweight block BG 3.1 t / 6 800 lbs")
Direction of tower
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
Before the crane can be put into operation, the

counterweight must be completed.
L 4 = 55 m / 180'-5''
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
Direction of tower
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
No ballast blocks must be placed here!
L 1 = 40 m / 131'-3''
04.81
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
1.45 t / 3 200 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
L 5 = 60 m / 196'-10''
04.81
04.81
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
1.45 t / 3 200 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs

3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
L 9 = 80 m / 262'-6''
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
1.45 t / 3 200 lbs
C R A N E S
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
SK 575
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
T O W E R
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
3.1 t / 6 800 lbs
PEINER
Operating manual
001
1.1 / 00
21.02.

Direction of tower
L 6 = 65 m / 213'-3''
L 7 = 70 m / 229'-8''
L 8 = 75 m / 246'-1''
04.81
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
21.02.

! Caution
Before the counterweight is inserted, each
individual counterweight block must be visually
inspected. A counterweight block which is
cracked or crumbing, or with damaged
suspensions points, must not be used for
reasons of safety.
To insert the counterweight, the following steps
must be carried out:
Attach the counterweight block to the

assembly crane. The counterweight blocks
must be insered vertically, and for the
reason they have an attachment eyelet on
thei upper side.
Make sure the the counterweight block will

be positioned in the right insert position.
Deviations are not permitted due to danger
of overturning.
Insert the counterweight block in the

intended insertion position. The correct and
therefore safe position of the counterweight
block must be checked immediately after
insertion.
Repeat the procedure until all the

counterweights for the specific jib length
have been inserted.
04.81
04.81
PEINER
TOWER
CRANES
SK, SN
Operating manual
!
1.2 / 98
27.01.
04.99 1/1 Adjusting the crane configuration

The crane electric must adapted unconditionally to the mounted crane configuration. For this purpose, there are
two erection bridges, which - inserted in the correct position in the electrical panel - inform the control unit of the
exact jib or boom length of the crane and the adjusted load curve (optional DIN or FEM, in Germany DIN,
elsewhere FEM). The correct positions of the erection bridges are shown in the electrical diagram.
If the crane is equipped with PLC-system, the correct adjustment can checked on the PLC-display unit. Therefor
carry out the following steps:
Insert and turn the key in the key-operated switch.
The following display mask should be visible on the PLC-display unit (example for a SK crane type with a
jib length of 50 m and FEM load curve):
ERECT I ON BRIDGE
I S PLUGGED I N
LOAD CURVE :
FEM
J I B L3 = 5 0 m 164 f t
If this display mask is not visible:
Press pushbutton 2 "NEXT DISPLAY MASK" (
Chapter Control and crane operation "PLC-system display unit") until this display mask appears.
After having checked the settings:

Turn back the key-operated switch of the PLC-display and remove the key.
04.99
e:\fremdspr\englisch\gruppe\sk_sn\kp04\kp049901.doc
04.99
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
30.03.
05.01 1/1 Position of safety devices
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
05.01
Hoist limit switch on hoist drum

Sense-of-rotation dector for slecingring back slide prevention
Trolley travel limit switch on trolley
drum
Load torque limiter
Maximum load torque limiter
Rope breadkage safety device on
trolley
Travelling mechanism limit switch
Bogie stabilizer
Anti-roll safety mechanism (rail-clamps)
05.01
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
4.3 / 00
07.08.
05.03 1/1 Fail safe circuits for control levers

The control levers (joystick selectors) of
TEREX PEINER tower cranes are equipped
with two fail-safe circuits.
These are:
1. compulsory zeroing
2. automatic zero resetting
Automatic zero resetting

Both control levers on the control stand have
automatic zero resetting. As soon as an
actuated control lever is released, it jumps
back to zero position and the drive unit in
question is switched off. This ensures that no
activated drive on the crane is continues to run
unintentionally.
1. Compulsory zeroing
This fail-safe circuit monitors the position of the

control levers. If a control lever is not in zero
position when the illuminated pushbutton
"Control voltage ON + Horn" is pressed, the
crane cannot be switched on. This ensures
that no drive on the crane is activated
unintentionally.
Compulsory zeroing is effective for every turnon process of the crane, whether for regular
startup of the crane or after actuation of the
load torque limiter or maximum load protection
(
Chapter Safety equipment "Load
torque limiter" and "Maximum load
protection by means of load measuring
pin" or "Maximum load protection by means
of gearstep monitoring").
2.
Illuminated pushbutton "Control voltage ON + Horn"
05.03
05.03
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
5.2 / 00
07.08.
05.05 1/1 Acoustic warning signals

When various hazardous situations occur at
the crane, acoustic warning signals sound to
warn the crane operator or persons in the
immediate vicinity of the crane of the
hazardous situation. The crane operator also
has the option of triggering a warning signal
himself to warn other persons of the
hazardous situation.
The acoustic warning signals can be divided
into three groups:
1. Acoustic signals as a warning for the crane
operator (triggered automatically by the
crane)
2. Acoustic signals as a warning for other
persons (triggered automatically by the
crane)
Illuminated pushbutton "Control voltage ON + Horn"
3. Acoustic signals as a warning for other

persons (triggered by the crane operator).
1
Acoustic signals as a warning for the

crane operator (triggered automatically
by the crane)
As soon as the maximum load protection or

the load torque limiter is triggered, which
happens when the crane is overloaded, a horn
sounds as a warning and at the same time
some of the control functions of the crane are
blocked (
Chapter Safety equipment
"Load torque limiter" and "Maximum load
protection by means of load measuring
pin" or "Maximum load protection by means
of gearstep monitoring").
05.05
Acoustic signals as a warning for other

persons (triggered automatically by the
crane)
If the crane is fitted with travel gear, a warning

bell at the base of the tower sounds as soon
as the control lever for the function "Move
crane forwards" or "Move crane backwards" is
pushed. This is to prevent the crane from
approaching persons on the tracks without
them noticing.
3
Acoustic signals as a warning for other

persons (triggered by the crane
operator).
The crane operator can also trigger the

warning signal on the crane himself, for
example to warn other persons on the
construction site of hazardous situations. To
do this, the illuminated pushbutton "Control
voltage ON + Horn" on the control stand must
be pressed (see sketch).
05.05
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
5.2 / 00
05.09.
05.06 1/2 Hoist limit switch

The travel distance of the hook is limited in its
top and a bottom position. This is
accomplished by way of a hoist limit switch
which is installed in the front of the hoist drum.
Two different types of hoist limit switches are
used for TEREX - PEINER-tower cranes of the
ranges SK and SN:
With pre-limit switching (Schmersal):
Setting the hoist limit switch
DANGER
A faulty setting of the hoist limit switch may
lead to serious injury to persons and/or
material damage. Therefore setting work
must only be carried out by skilled or even
specially trained erectors.
NOTE:
Old Model
The setting of the hoist limit switch must only

be carried out with the hoist unit of the crane in
4-fall rope operation.
NOTE:
No load must be hanging in the hook when
setting work is done at the hoist limit switch.
To set the hoist limit switch, please proceed as
follows:
Turn out all fastening bolts in the housing
cover. Remove the housing cover.
Without pre-limit switching (Ravasi):
New Model
05.06
Trigger function Lifting on the respective

control lever on the control stand. Hoist up
the hook block (bottom hook block) to
approx. 1.5 m - 2 m / 4'-11'' - 6'-7''
underneath the bottom edge of the trolley
(SK-crane) or, respectively, to the rope
deflection sheave in the boom end (SNcrane). Should you not be able to
accomplish this position straight away, then
reset the cam disks for the top end position
until it is possible to move into this position.
05.06
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
5.2 / 00
05.09.
05.06 2/2 Hoist limit switch
Set the disk cam for the top end position in

the hoist limit switch so that same will
activate the contact switch mechanically.
Not applicable for SK 56 and SK 86 (refer

to note further down):
Trigger the function Lowering on
the respective control lever on the
control stand. Now lower the hook
block another 1.5 m - 2 m / 4'-11'' 6'-7''.
Adjust the cam disk in the hoist limit
swith so that same will activate the
contact switch mechanically. The
hoist unit must then switch down to
slow speed automatically as soon as
the hook block is approx. 3 m - 4 m /
9'-10'' - 13'-1
'' below the bottom edge
of the trolley (SK-crane) or,
respectively, the rope deflection
sheave in the boom end (SN-crane).
NOTE:
The cranes of type SK 56 and SK 86 are not
equipped with a prelimit switching device.
The function Lowering is triggered on the

respective control lever in the control
stand. The hook block is now lowered to
its bottom end position. Should you not be
able to reach this position immediately,
then make a rough adjustment on the cam
disk in the host limit switch to enable you
to reach this position.
05.06
!ATTENTION
When determining the bottom end position,
please ensure that for safety reasons there
are at least the three prescribed windings
of rope left on the hoist drum. Also take
into account that the hoist unit will
continue to run for some time after it has
been switched off.
Adjust the disk cam in the hoist limit switch
for the bottom end position so that same will
activate the contact switch mechanically.
Check-up of the set switching points
In order to check the set switching points, the
hook block (without load) is run to its top end
position two to three times at max. speed.
Also run it as many times to its bottom end
position, but in moderate speed, this is for
safety reasons, since there is no bottom
prelimit switching device. In the event that the
electrical contact between the disk cam and
the contact switch is not equal to the
mechanical contact, i.e. in case the setting of
the hoist limit switch is not quite correct, then
the respective disk cams must be readjusted.
NOTE:
The setting of the hoist limit switch must be
controlled when a rope reeving from 2-fall to 4fall rope or the reverse, reset if necessary.
05.06
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK 575
001
1.1 / 00
31.03.
05.07 1/1 Trolley travel breakage safeguard

The trolley travel breakage safeguard is
standard of TEREX PEINER cranes.
Function:
Two rope breakage safety levers are

installed on the trolley.
The trolley travel rope runs through eyes

at the end of the front lever.
In case of a broken trolley travel rope, the

levers will swing up to vertical position and
engage in the jib's bottom lacing.
This keeps the trolley from "running away".
05.07
05.07
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK
4.1 / 02
03.01.
05.08 1/3 Trolley limit switch

The travel distance of the trolley is limited both
forward and back by a central limit switch. This
limit switch is positioned at the shaft of the
trolley travel rope drum. lt limits not only the
travel distance of the trolley, but switches over
to creep speed when the trolley reaches a prelimit position, which is located about 1.5 m / 5'0" before the limit position. Therefore a nearly
bump-free switch off procedure can be
obtained.
Insert and turn the key in the keyoperated switch.
Setting the limit switch

The crane equipped with a PLC has a limit
switch which is set by an internally located
thumb-wheel.
Press pushbutton 2 "Scroll masks

forward" until "TROLLEY AT FRONT
END" appears in the display of the PLCsystem ("
" Chapter Control and Crane
Operation "PLC-System Displays in the
Cabin").
Actuate the "Trolley forward" function at

the appropriate control lever on the
control stand.
When driving the trolley towards the jib

end, check whether the value visible in
the PLC display increases for the voltage.
lf not, the two outer potentiometer
connections in the trolley limit switch must
be reversed.
NOTE:
Two persons are required to set the limit
switch, of which one person must be able to
operate the crane (crane driver). The two
persons must be in speaking contact by handheld radios.
!ATTENTION
Before setting the limit switches for the
trolley, make sure that the erection bridge
is plugged in the electrical control panel
(A-panel).
The individual setting steps are:
!
Set the jib length by inserting bridges in

the electrical control panel (A-panel, "
Chapter Appendix)
05.08
h:\eigene dateien\betriebsanleitungen\sprache\englisch\sk\kp05\kp0508.doc
05.08
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK
4.1 / 02
03.01.

!
Drive the trolley to the trolley travelling

mechanism. The person in the trolley cab
should be directly in front of the limit
switch (see sketch).
The voltage value visible on the PLC

display must now be 2.5 V 0.1 V (only at
SK 315) and 0.6 V 0.1 V (at all other
cranes). lf not, unscrew the cover from
the limit switch and turn the thumb-wheel
in the limit switch until the correct value
for the voltage is displayed (setting
requires speaking contact over hand-held
radios). Then screw the limit switch cover
back on.
By actuating the "Trolley forward" function
at the appropriate control lever of the
control unit, drive the trolley to about 20 40 cm / 8"-16" in front of the mechanical
stop at the end of the jib (driving to this
position requires speaking contact over
hand-heid radios).
05.08
Press pushbutton 4 (blue button) to save

the setting.
Press pushbutton 2 "Scroll masks

forward" (" Chapter "PLC System Display") until the display "TROLLEY AT
REAR END" appears.
By actuating the function "Trolley

backward" at the appropriate control lever
of the control unit, drive the trolley to the
rear end position. The rear end position
must be about 20 - 40 cm / 8" - 16" in
front of the mechanical end stop at the
foot of the jib.
Press pushbutton 4 (blue button) to save

the setting.
Turn back the key-operated switch of the

PLC display unit and remove the key.
This completes setting of the trolley limit

switch. The two pre-limit positions are set
automatically at the same time.
!ATTENTION
The erection bridge must be removed from
the switching cabinet before starting crane
operation.
05.08
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK
4.1 / 02
03.01.

Finally, the setting must be checked. To do
this
!
actuate the function "Trolley forward" at

the appropriate control lever on the
control stand until the trolley has reached
the front limit position (the check requires
speaking contact over hand-held radios).
actuate the function "Trolley backward" at

the appropdate control lever on the
control unit until the trolley has reached
the rear limit position.
lf the check reveals that the settings are

incorrect the complete setting of the limit
switch must be repeated.
05.08
05.08
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
3.2 / 00
29.03.
05.09 1/2 Load torque limiter

The switches of the load torque limiter are at
the head of the tower near to the first platform.
The permissible load torque of a crane can be
exceeded theoretically in two different ways:
Lifting a load too heavy for the selected

load-lifting radius.
Driving the trolley past the load-lifting

radius permitted for the attached load.
To avoid endangering the stability of the crane,

the switches of the load torque limiter are
actuated when the permissible load torque is
exceeded. These block the functions "Hoist up"
and "Trolley forward".
Setting the Switches
The protective hood must be removed first in
order to be able to set the limit switches.
Set the switch OS 11 "Hoist up":
Drive the trolley to the utmost load-lifting

radius.
Attach the test load (minimum:

permissible load at the end of the jib;
maximum: permissible load at the end of
the jib + 10%).
Actuate the function "Hoist up" at the

appropriate control lever on the control
stand.
The switch OS 11 must be set with the

thumb-wheel so that the function "Hoist
up" is blocked at a little more than the
permissible load at the end of the jib.
OS 12
OS 11
05.09
05.09
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
3.2 / 00
29.03.
05.09 2/2 Load torque limiter

Set the switch OS 12 "Trolley forward":
!ATTENTION
Drive the trolley to the shortest load-lifting

radius.
Attach the test load (minimum: maximum

permissible load; maximum: maximum
permissible load + 10%).
Actuate the function "Trolley forward" at

the appropriate control lever on the control
stand.
The load torque limiter must be checked

after converting the crane and as required
in addition to the annual inspection
specified in the accident prevention
regulations (VBG 9 - Crane). Conversions
to the crane are for example jib
extensions, changes in the cable guides or
tower extensions. Inspection of the load
torque limiter is necessary among other
things when
it responds frequently.
the crane has been out of serviee for a
long time.
extreme weather conditions or great
temperature fluctuations are
encountered.
The-switch OS 12 must be set with the

thumb-wheel so that the "Trolley forward"
function when travelling is blocked by
slightly more than the maximum
permissible load with the jib length
permissible for the maximum load.
The protective hood must be replaced at the
end of the setting work.
05.09
05.09
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
4.2 / 00
18.09.
05.11 1/1 Load hook

According to german accident prevention
regulations, all load hooks are provided with
safety latches, which prevents unhooking of
the coupling means when the load is set down.
The safety latch must not be removed, even
when the lifting elements are continously
changed.
Refer also the national regulation like the
german regulation DIN 15 405, sheet 1 " Lifting
hooks - inspection of forged hooks in service".
Example:
Loadhook - DK 2
with lifting hook as per DIN 15401
and safety latch
05.11
05.11
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
Operating manual
SK / SN / SMK / SMH
2.3 / 00
18.09.
05.12 1/1 Rope retainers

All rope pulleys must have rope retainers
(support A-frames) that prevent the rope from
jumping of the pulley. It is prohibited to operate
the crane without rope-pulley retainers.
05.12
05.12
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
2.3 / 00
19.09.
05.13 1/1 Version E bogie stabilizer

The bogie stabilizier is a supplementary safety
device, the purpose of which is to reduce the
danger of crane derailment in case of track sag
or faulty tracklaying.
The stabilizier prevents the bogie from tipping
over if it lifts off of the rail. Also it helps keep the
bogie level during transportation.
05.13
05.13
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.3 / 00
19.09.
05.14 1/1 Version E emergency end stop switch

The emergency end stop switch is triggered by
a contact bar just before the end of the crane
track ( Chapter Site preparation "Version
E - contact rail for emergency end stop
switch"). By actuating the emergency end
stop switch, the crane is slowed down to a
standstill. This prevents the crane from striking
the buffer of the rail end safety device.
NOTE:
A daily visual and functional check must be
carried out on the emergency end stop switch.
Any malfunction in the emergency end stop
switch must be remedied immediately.
05.14
05.14
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
SK, SN
Operating manual
3.1 / 99
18.04.
05.15 1/1 Version E Rail clamps

When the crane is not in operation, it must be
secured against rolling away (e.g. due to wind
influences). The running gear brakes must not
be used for this. Instead of this, each bogie has
a rail clamp, which together with the rail head
functions as a clamping device.
To remove the securing device to prevent the

crane from rolling away, the following steps
must be taken:
Loosen the bolt connection on each

individual rail clamp.
The following steps must be taken to secure

the crane against rolling away:
Move all rail clamps back up.

The rail clamps must be moved back far
enough so that the traversing mkovement
of the crane does not cause them to fall
down again.
Fold down all rail clamps. The rail clamps

must be positioned in such a way that they
encompass the rail head.
05.15
05.15
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
2.2 / 00
28.03.
05.17 1/4 Max. load safety device / Load measuring pin

Load Measuring Pin
Measuring principle
The load measuring pin is a load absorber

which is fitted to control, at any given time, the
maximum load.
The generated stresses in both reduced

crosssectional areas ( X) are picked up by
the wire strain gauges.
Description
The wire strain gauges are located on the

inside of the load measuring pin and each one
is arranged at a 45 angle to the measuring
direction of the load measuring pin.
wire strain gauge
figure 3: Load measuring pin, unstressed
The load gauge pin has the geometrical form of

a hollow cylinder. On the outer diameter A are
two annular ring slots with a diameter X to
concentrate the stresses on two wire strain
gauges, in order that the measuring sensitivity
may be obtained (see figure 1 and 2). The wire
strain gauges are located on the inside of the
load measuring pin, plus a connection plate to
which the electrical balance and adjusting
elements are connected.
figure 1
figure 4: Load measuring pin, stressed
wire strain gauge
Due to the position of the transverse slot the

fitting procedure is already determined:
See assembly setup (figures 5 and 6).
figure 2
05.17
05.17
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
2.2 / 00
28.03.

Method of assembly:
The load measuring pin and the remaining

movable mechanical parts must be
lubricated with an appropriate oil or grease
before assembly.
Pay attention to cleanliness when fitting

load measuring pins.
!ATTENTION
The load measuring pins are to be fitted
without force or the help of hammers,
mallets etc. This could otherwise cause
mechanical damage resulting in wrong
measurements. Forcible and
unprofessional fitting could also render
void any guarantee obligations.
Insert load measuring pin with transverse

slot to the top and secure with keep plate
to prevent shifting (figures 5 and 6).
After assembly check that the load

measuring pin has a good earth
connection with the crane (fault, for
example, could be a layer of oil or grease
on the upper face of pin).
The measuring device should be verified

once a year.
Electrical details are to be taken from the

circuit diagrams in the Chapter Appendix.
figure 5
5
m i n . 0 . 5 m m
m in. 1/5 inch
figure 6
1
2
3
4
5
05.17
sheave support plates

rope sheave
bearing bush
axle holder
load measuring pin
05.17
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
2.2 / 00
28.03.

Faultfinding
Switch on system
Check supply voltage U with

digital voltmeter
(min. 4 positions):
red wire = U
blue (or black) wire = 0 V
Is voltage available?
No
Check power cables, fuses of supply

modules
(or, if need be change supply modul)
Measure the output signal

with digital voltmeter
(min. 4 positions)
on: green wire
blue (or black) wire
Measured voltage = U/2?
Yes
Measure the output signal with digital

voltmeter (min. 4 positions) at white and
blue (or black) wire
A
(see next page)
No
Measured voltage = U
or = 0?
Yes
Defective load measuring pin

Change load measuring pin
No
Cable or
wire strain gauges faulty
Replace in
load measuring pin
05.17
05.17
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
2.2 / 00
28.03.

Faultfinding
Measured voltage = U/2?
Yes
Calculate diffence of
both "U/2" measurements
Yes

Yes
No
Measured voltage = U
or = 0?
No
Cable or
wire strain gauge faulty
Replace in
load measuring pin
Difference > 10 mV?
No
Load measuring pin
serviceable
05.17
05.17
PEINER
TOWER
CRANES
SK
Operating manual
!
2.1 / 98
27.01.
05.19 1/1 Mechanical wind release

To allow the crane to rotate freely in the wind
after being taken out of service, the slewing
gear brake(s) must be bled.
a) Set the crane free to weathervane
Turn the thumb-wheel(s) on the slewing gear
brake(s) in the clockwise direction (see figure).
The crane is set free to weathervane.
b) Set the crane for operation
Turn the thumb-wheel(s) on the slewing gear
brake(s) in the counter-clockwise direction
(see figure below).
Thumb-wheel
The wind release is cleared.
05.19
05.19
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
Operating manual
SK
3.2 / 99
27.01.
05.20 1/2 Electrical wind release

Note:
The electrical wind release is an option and
will be installed on demand.
To allow the crane to rotate freely in the wind
after being taken out of service, the slewing
gear brakes must be bled. This function is
selected by pressing the illuminated
pushbutton "WIND RELEASE" (4) on the
control stand.
Set the crane free to weathervane
Press the illuminated pushbutton " WIND

RELEASE" on the control stand until the
white lamp lights up. The horn sounds at
the same time.
Switch off the crane with the

"EMERGENCY OFF" switch on the control
stand. The horn and the white lamp then
go off.

Set the crane for operation
Switch the crane back on. The horn and

the white lamp are switched on and stay
on.
Drive the slewing gear briefly. The horn

and the white lamp then go off.
05.20
05.20
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
Operating manual
SK
3.2 / 99
27.01.
05.20 2/2 Electrical wind release

Even with the electrical wind release is
installed, there is the possibility to bled the
slewing gear brake(s) mechanically. This could
be necessary in case of failure of the electrical
wind release. If an electrical wind release is
installed, the case of the wind release (1) is
located at the top of the slewing gear brake(s).
Set the crane free to weathervane
Move the adjusting lever (2) up and hold

tight.
Press the locking button (3) in to the stop.
Release the adjusting lever (2). If the

locking button (3) is not properly locked,
the whole procedure must be repeated.

Set the crane for operation.
Move the adjusting lever (2) up until the

locking button (3) is released by the back
spring.
05.20
05.20
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK,SMK,SN,SMH
2.3 / 00
30.03.
06.01 1/15 Safety comments - general information

TEREX PEINER revolving tower cranes are
fitted with all safety equipment prescribed on
the day of delivery.
The safety equipment is to ensure that any
operator error does not cause damage to the
crane that could endanger the lives of the
persons employed on the construction site.
During crane operation, the individual
emergency limit switches must not be
deliberately contacted.
The reaction of the safety equipment is
always an emergency cutout. All safety limit
switches must always be inspected before the
beginning of crane operation and readjusted
after every construction site change.
As the crane operator, you are responsible for
the regular monitoring of the operating
condition of your crane.
Before starting up
A crane that is not ready for use must never
be operated. If one has to proceed from the
assumption that the crane or part thereof is
not safe on account of its condition, the crane
must not be put into operation. The defect
must be communicated to the person
responsible and, in the case of a change in
crane operator, to the new crane operator.
Only when all safety requirements have been
fulfilled and all possible dangers eliminated
may the crane be put into operation.
06.01
06.01
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK,SMK,SN,SMH
2.3 / 00
30.03.

Visual inspection as a safety measure
(checking elements and safety equipment
of the crane to ensure they are in proper
condition)
Carry out a visual inspection of the whole
crane (when out of operation and off circuit)
with respect to loose or lost bolts, nuts,
splints, cotter pins, cracked welds, worn or
damaged construction elements, leaking gear
units or hoses. All damaged or missing parts
must be repaired or replaced before putting
the crane into operation.
Fig. 1
! Caution !
All impact bolts must be secured by cotter
pins or splints. Damaged or missing cotter
pins must be replaced by new ones, lock
plates must be checked for tight fit.
! Caution !
Fig. 2
Do not touch any power cables when

inspecting the crane.
tower
Inspect the entire crane visually from the

ground. The assemblies and systems in the
ground region must also be inspected.
Foundation anchor
Foundation
Foundation
Foundation with foundation
connection to tower
06.01
anchor
and
06.01
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK,SMK,SN,SMH
2.3 / 00
30.03.

condition)
Counter jib / turntable
Stationary base
The live ring connection must be well

lubricated (no metal shavings in grease
residues).
Foundation frame and the secure position of

the central ballast.
Fastening bolts of live ring connection (no

rust, no loose nuts or bolts).
Lower carriage
Complete slewing gear (check for play in gear

mount).
Lower carriage and the secure position of the

central ballast.
Slewing gear brake (see maintenance

instructions)
Rail clamp
Bolts, screwed connections, safety devices
Supply cable and cable drum
Standard railings, cabin suspension
Crane track
Load torque monitor
Crane track and rail limit safeguard.
Sheaves (damage, grease residues)
Obstacles in the vicinity of the crane must be

removed and safety clearances observed.
Attachment to slip ring system (cable

introduction)
Tower
Anchoring straps
Ladders and platforms.
Counterweights
Tower lacing connections bolted between

towers.
Machine platform
Hoist unit complete
Lock plates on bolts
! Caution !
The ladders and working platforms must be
clean. Oil, grease, mud or concrete on
ladders or floors may lead to serious
accidents. Dirt and sand between moving
parts cause extreme wear and possible down
time.
06.01
Hoist unit brake (see maintenance

instructions)
06.01
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK,SMK,SN,SMH
2.3 / 00
30.03.

condition)
Counter jib / turntable
Hoist rope (see maintenance instructions):
check rope position of hoist rope on rope
drum, if necessary check winding of hoist
rope during crane operation.
Cab
General condition
Windows, visibility
Windscreen wipers
Seat
Check compulsory zeroing of joystick selector
Jib
Bolts, screwed connections, safety devices
Standard railings
Anchoring straps
Complete trolley unit
Trolley ropes must be tensioned (see
maintenance instructions). If trolley ropes are
loose, this may lead to the rope breakage
safeguard taking effect and causing damage.
If necessary the crane must be put out of
operation and the person responsible must be
notified. The trolley rope must be retensioned
by maintenance personnel.
06.01
06.01
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK,SMK,SN,SMH
2.3 / 00
30.03.

Hoist rope (see maintenance instructions)
Load block with load hook
Check position of load block in relation to jib.
If the load block is e. g. at an angle in relation
to the jib, dummy runs must be carried out at
the beginning of crane operation to see
whether the load block aligns itself again. If
necessary the crane must be put out of
operation and the person responsible must be
notified. Rope twisting must be attended to by
the maintenance personnel in accordance
with assembly regulations.
Safety measures before starting up
! Caution !
The crane must not be put into operation if a
storm is approaching or at wind speeds of
more than 20 m/s / 66 ft/s or
72 kph / 45 mph.
If a warning sign is affixed to the crane or the
control elements, the crane must not be
switched on or put into operation until this
warning has been clarified and the warning
sign has been removed by the person who put
it up.
Before starting up the crane, check to ensure
that all guards, control elements, safety
equipment, clutches, brakes, drive units etc.
are correctly set. Starting up the crane must
not endanger any persons or property. There
must be a safety clearance between the crane
and any buildings, for example.
06.01
06.01
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
Operating manual
SK,SMK,SN,SMH
2.3 / 00
30.03.

A mobile crane must not be put into operation
until it is certain that no persons or property
are endangered by the traveling crane. Keep a
safety clearance
(0.5 m / 1'-6'') from fixed objects and buildings.
If the rail area cannot be reliably determined, a
signaler must help.
Safety measures during crane operation
An acoustic signal must be given before the

crane is moved. This acoustic signal must be
repeated regularly during crane movement,
particularly when the crane is approaching
persons.
Important!
If the visibility between the operator and the

signaler is adversely affected by dust,
darkness, snow, fog or rain, crane operation
must be monitored more closely (e.g. by
radio), and if necessary crane operation must
be stopped.
At temperatures below 0 C it can be
expected that parts of the mechanical
equipment of the crane, particularly brakes,
wheels and limit switches, may be frozen. For
this reason, correct functioning of all parts of
the crane must be checked before starting up
the crane. Frozen parts must not be released
by force (e.g. motor force).
At temperatures below -15 C / 5 Foils with
lower viscosity (winter oils) must be used.
Discontinue crane operation at -20 C / -4 F.
After the rail clamp on the mobile crane has

been released, and the master switch on the
tower base and on the electrical panel on the
counter jib or turntable is switched on, the
crane can be put into operation.
At the beginning of crane operation, the

individual drive units and safety devices
must be checked from the following
points of view:
Correct, smooth functioning of all control
elements (zero position of joystick selectors).
Reliable reaction of crane control.
Smooth startup of crane travel gears.
Correct functioning of all limit switches.
Operational noise.
Reliable reaction of brakes within a very short
time.
Test the brakes once more the first time a
load is lifted (the load must be only a few
centimeters above the ground).
The load must be securely held in all
positions.
The overload safeguard must cut out as
required.
06.01
06.01
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
Operating manual
SK,SMK,SN,SMH
2.3 / 00
30.03.

! Caution !
Slewing gear
In the event of abnormalities or faults,

including those occurring during
operation, the crane must be put out of
operation and the defect must be
communicated to the person responsible
and, in the case of a change in crane
operator, to the new crane operator. Only
when all safety requirements have been
fulfilled and all possible dangers
eliminated may the crane be put into
operation again.
! Caution !
Never permit uncontrolled movements of
the crane. Accident prevention
regulations must be adhered to.
Trolley unit
Carry out a dummy run at least once a day,
allowing the trolley to move out fully. This
allows any rope twist that may have
accumulated due to short working movements
to be compensated for.
Hoist unit
Carry out a dummy run (total permitted hook
travel) at least once a day, to allow any hoist
rope twist that may have accumulated due to
short working movements to be compensated
for.
06.01
If work is only carried out in a small section,

e.g. during concreting work, we recommend
that the slewing part should be turned once by
360 after a certain time to allow the grease in
the path of the slip ring connection to be
distributed evenly.
Unauthorized persons are not allowed to enter
the crane. Persons may only enter or leave
the crane when it is at a standstill and with
the approval of the operator.
If work is carried out together with several
other cranes, exact arrangements and
agreements must be reached with the other
crane operators before beginning crane
operation. In the event of a change in crane
operator, the new crane operator must also be
notified.
From crane to crane there must always be a
minimum clearance of 2.0 m / 6'-6'' (this also
applies to loads, hoist ropes and suspension
tackle).
Safety measures against electrical

dangers
Fatal electric shocks are among the most
common accidents and are usually caused by
the crane coming into contact with overhead
cables. For this reason the following
instructions must be strictly adhered to when
the crane is used in the vicinity of electric
overhead cables.
06.01
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK,SMK,SN,SMH
2.3 / 00
30.03.

dangers
Before starting work, clear instructions must
be given about electric overhead lines and first
aid in cases of accidents with electric power.
The crane must be assigned a signaler,
whose only task and responsibility is to
monitor the work from the best possible
position and to warn the crane operator when
the jib, the load or one of the load ropes
approaches the "critical zone".
There must be a safety area around every live
line that is regarded as an absolute critical
zone. It is strictly forbidden to move any part
of the crane, load rope or the load itself into
this area, unless the live line has been
switched off or is insulated. There are no other
exceptions.
The absolute proximity limit varies according
to the current regulations. The following table
corresponds to the values in accordance with
DIN 57 105/VDE 0105 Part 1/11.3, Table 4:
Nominal voltage
(line voltage)
up to 1 kV
over 1 kV to 110 kV
for swinging load
Absolute
proximity limit
1.0 m / 3'-3''
3.0 m / 9'-10''
The proximity values according to the table

must also be complied with in the event of
swinging live power lines, loads, carrying and
lifting equipment.
06.01
Absolute proximity limit
Fig. 4
06.01
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
Operating manual
SK,SMK,SN,SMH
2.3 / 00
30.03.

dangers
All power lines located under the crane and
within the proximity limit must be removed.
If it is not possible to remove the power lines,
they must be insulated by the electricity
board responsible.
Make sure that the crane is always earthed
(PE direct to earth).
Work should be carried out extremely
carefully in the vicinity of radio towers, since
the jib of the crane functions like an aerial and
can acquire an electric charge.
The electricity boards must be informed in
advance in good time and permission must be
obtained to remove power lines.
The electricity boards must be notified of
when work is to be started, when work is
expected to be completed and whether any
changes in location are planned.
The electricity boards and those responsible
for safety must be informed every time a live
line is touched so that inspections and repairs
can be carried out, in order to ensure that
damaged power lines do not lead to a failure
at a later point in time.
earth
All lines must be regarded as live until

information to the contrary has been received.
Fig. 5
06.01
06.01
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
Operating manual
SK,SMK,SN,SMH
2.3 / 00
30.03.

Close attention must be paid to the signals
and warnings of the signaler when work is
being carried out in the vicinity of power lines.
Slow down the pace of work when work is
being carried out in the vicinity of power lines.
The staff must be warned always to keep a
safe distance from the load.
If a load is to be guided by a hand rope in the
vicinity of a power line, a special check must
be carried out together with the signaler before
the load is touched. The best material for this
application is a guide rope made of dry
polypropylene. Manila or nylon ropes can
absorb moisture and become electrically
conductive.
Should a crane touch a power line despite all
precautions and efforts, behave as you were
taught during your instruction (on overhead
electric lines and first aid in accidents caused
by electricity).
Do not store, load or unload any material in
the vicinity of power lines.
After any possible dangers have been
eliminated, the entire crane must be checked
for damage that may have been caused by the
electric contact.
The hoist rope must be replaced if it has
touched a live line, since the arc normally has
enough strength to weld the rope or to
damage it considerably.
06.01
06.01
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
Operating manual
SK,SMK,SN,SMH
2.3 / 00
30.03.

The electricity board and the safety officer
must be informed whenever a live line is
touched so that inspections and repairs can
be carried out to prevent subsequent power
failures.
Safety measures when handling loads

When handling loads, the accident prevention
and safety regulations must be complied with.
The following notes on dangers as well as the
recommendations in the safety certificate for
crane operators and hitching personnel must
be complied with.
Only suitable persons that are responsible for
attaching loads correctly may be employed for
attaching or hitching loads. If possible the
same person as works as a marshaller should
always be employed. Loads attached by hand
may only be moved on a sign from the
attachment personnel or the responsible
person appointed by the company.
If signals have to be used for communication,
these must be agreed on by all persons
responsible before they are used.
06.01
06.01
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
Operating manual
SK,SMK,SN,SMH
2.3 / 00
30.03.

As long as a load is suspended from the
crane, the joystick selectors must be kept to
hand.
Fig. 7
The weight of the load to be suspended

should be known in order to prevent
unnecessary actuation of the overload
safeguard. When determining the weight, the
load suspension devices must also be taken
into account.
To prevent unnecessary travel of the crane or
shifting of load, the load should be set down in
the correct load range of the crane.
Caution !
Special notes for cranes with great hook
heights:
With high-mounted cranes or cranes that
have been subsequently raised
(overridden or raised with mobile crane),
the crane is stressed beyond the
permitted load by the additional weight of
the hoist rope (e.g. lifting and lowering
loads from high buildings). It is therefore
essential that the entire overload
safeguard device should be adjusted
once more (consult manufacturer if
required).
The load must be correctly attached and
secured in order to prevent part of the load
from moving or slipping (Fig. 8).
Fig. 8
Ensure that the hands of the persons

attaching the load are not in the hazard area
when the rope is tensioned.
06.01
06.01
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
Operating manual
SK,SMK,SN,SMH
2.3 / 00
30.03.

Fig. 9
If necessary a guide rope must be used to
control the load.
The load must be free before it is lifted, that
is, it must not be permanently connected or
frozen to the ground or any other object (Fig.
9).
Handling loads
The load hook must be located directly above
the load (note position of center of gravity).
The permitted loads refer only to freely
suspended loads on vertical hoist ropes.
The hoist ropes must not be twisted (e.g. by
the load block turning).
Caution with loads that have a large surface
area exposed to the wind. The safety of the
rigger must be assured (Fig. 10).
Fig. 10
Do not lift any loads with large surface areas if
there is a strong or gusty wind.
! Caution !
Pulling the load at an angle or dragging
the load is forbidden, since the overload
safeguard then cannot cut out properly
(Fig. 11).
Hazard for persons and property!
All persons not directly involved in lifting must
be warned or informed so that they can leave
the area where the load is being lifted.
06.01
Fig. 11
06.01
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
Operating manual
SK,SMK,SN,SMH
2.3 / 00
30.03.

Personnel must be standing in a safe place
when the load is lifted or lowered or while the
attachment rope is being pulled out from
under the load. The load may swing or slip
away, or the attachment rope may first be
jammed under the load and then suddenly
come free (Fig. 12).
Fig. 12
If the load is not correctly suspended, it must

first be lowered again and then realigned.
Crane operators as well as signalers
(marshallers) and riggers must ensure that
there is nobody under the load.
! Caution !
Transporting persons with the load or the
load suspension device is prohibited.
Sudden strain through jerky lifting or lowering
must be avoided. Lift slowly until the hoist
rope is taut (slowly adjust joystick selector on
the control console). Jerky lifting of the load
can lead to unnecessary actuation of the
overload safeguard device. This also means
an unnecessary strain on the hoist rope, load
hook and the entire crane.
! Caution !
Never make the load swing or oscillate. A
swinging load is a hazard for persons and
property.
06.01
06.01
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
Operating manual
SK,SMK,SN,SMH
2.3 / 00
30.03.

The load must always be held directly under
the jib point.
Do not lift any load if there is any excess rope
or suspension tackle beside the load. Loose
suspension tackle must be removed or hung
up (Fig. 13).
Fig. 13
Loads must be lowered correctly onto

supports or A-frames so that the suspension
tackle is not damaged. The loads must be
secured (e.g. against slipping) before the
suspension tackle is removed (Fig. 14).
Safety measures when putting the crane

out of service
Fig. 14
! Caution !
For reasons of safety, the crane must be put
out of operation and secured if a storm of
more than 20 m/s (corresponding to 72 kph /
45 mph) is approaching.
Repairs and maintenance work may only be
carried out when the crane is out of service.
The crane is put out of service according to
the Chapter "Crane operation: Putting the
crane out of service".
06.01
06.01
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.1 / 00
10.02.
06.02 1/1 Pre-operational checks

A pre-operational inspection must be made by
a competent person before each use of the
crane.
Turn on the main switches on the

construction site distribution cabinet and/or
tower base.
This inspection is usually the responsibility of

the crane operator.
Check the ground-fault circuit interrupteur

(g.f.c.i.) on the construction site distribution
cabinet.
Since the crane must be in safe operating

condition at all times, this inspection essentially
continues the whole time the crane is in use.
Check the whole electrical equipment.
Check the condition of the track, the end-oftrack safeguards, the emergency stop
switches, the grounding and the foundation.
Pre-operational test
Before lifting any load, the operator should also
run the crane through all ist functions for
smooth and correct operation. This would
include boom up/down, hoisting up/down,
trolley forward/backward and swinging the
boom left/right.
Check that the crane has full freedom of

movement along its entire height and track.
The power cable must roll up easily.
Check all the ballasts: BZ, BG and BF.
Check the fluid levels (crankcase oil,
coolant, hydraulic oil, etc.) and the crane's
lubrication in general.
Observe the maintenance intervals
prescibed in Chapter Lubrication and
Maintenance "Maintenance schedule".
Control the mechanisms (hoist, swing,
luffing etc.)
Check the hydraulic system of the climbing
unit (hoses, valves etc.).
Check all ropes for proper lay in their pulleys
and any signs of damage. The rope grooves
in the pulleys must be free of hardened
grease, since the rope could otherwise
climb up the side and over the retainer.
Check all pinned and threaded connections.
Check the hooks and latches.
06.02
In addition to the pre-operational inspection, the

operator should moitor the crane during
operation for any potential deficiencies or
hazards.
Before being used, cranes which have been
idle for between one and six month must be
inspected by a qualified person in the same
way.
Standby cranes must also be inspected to this
level at least every six months.
Cranes idle for longer than six months must be
inspected as for a periodic inspection.
06.02
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
6.2 / 00
01.08.
06.03 1/1 Starting up

A regular starting up of the crane requires the
following procedure:
Before climbing up to the crane cabin (only
if the crane has a rail travelling mechanism
- Version E):
Release and lift up the rail clamps.
Only in a crane with PLC-system: Check

whether the PLC-system displays the
correct hoist rope reeve (one- / two- / three/ four strand). If the wrong hoist rope reeve
is displayed, correct the setting (
Chapter Control and crane operation
"PLC-system - displays").
The crane is now ready for operation.
On the turntable:
Set the main switch on the electrical control
panel (crane types SK except SK 415 and
SK 575: A-panel) or on the terminal box in
the passage to the turntable (crane types
SN, SK 415 and SK 575) to position "I".
Set the slewing gear for operational mode
( Chapter Safety Equipment
"Mechanical wind release" or "Electrical
wind release").
In the crane cabin:
Unlock the emergency off switch on the
control stand with the key. The
"EMERGENCY OFF" switch is unlocked
when the control lamp of the pushbutton
switch lights up for the function "ON"
function.
! Attention
The key must be removed from the
emergency off switch after switching on
the control elements.
Press the "ON" pushbutton.
Check all limit switches and the overload
protection by triggering once.
Check the brakes of all drives for perfect
functioning.
06.03
06.03
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
4.2 / 00
01.08.
06.04 1/1 Taking out of service

Note:
On the rotating platform:
The crane must be taken out of service during

long breaks in work or when there is a storm
brewing
( Chapter Control and crane operation
"Taking out of service in case of storm").
Set the main switch to "0" (SK-crane types

except SK 415 and SK 575: main switch on
the A-panel, SN-crane types, SK 415 and
SK 575: main switch on the terminal box,
located in the passage to the turntable).
Taking out of service of the crane requires the

following procedure:
Only in a crane with mechanical wind release:
Set down any suspended load, raise the hook

block to maximum height and trolley-in to the
minimum working radius.
Set the crane free to weathervane by bleeding

the slewing gear brake(s) ( Chapter Safety
equipment "Mechanical wind release").
In the crane cabin before the crane

operator leaves the control point:
Only if the crane has a rail travelling

mechanism - Version E:
By actuating the function "Hoist up" at the

appropriate control lever on the control
stand, drive the empty block assembly to
just in front of the upper limit position.
After climbing down from the crane, lock the

rail clamps on the rails.
By actuating the function "Trolley backward"

at the appropriate control lever on the
control stand, drive the trolley to the rear (=
inner) limit position.
By actuating the function "Slew left" or "Slew
right" at the appropriate control lever on the
control stand, slew the jib in wind direction.
Only in a crane with electrical wind release:
Press the "Wind release" pushbutton. The
crane is set free to weathervane at the point at
which the horn sounds and the control lamp in
the pushbutton lights up.
Actuate the emergency off switch.
Switch off lighting, heating and any other
connected electrical devices.
06.04
06.04
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.3 / 00
19.09.
06.05 1/1 Taking out of service in case of storm

According to DIN 15 019, part 1, cranes must
be shut down if the dynamic air pressure
relating to wind speed is exceeded on a 10sec. average.
The critical dynamic air pressure is only equal
to the calculated dynamic air pressure, if the
crane can be taken out of service and the
requisite safety measures initiated within a very
short time.
Example:
t = 3 min. as the time required tor completing
the safety measures.
The crane must be taken out of service at a
wind speed of 64 km/h (39.8 mph).
Basically, the following causality is given:
Take the following measures for taking the

crane out of service:
Remoce the hoisting accessories (including
ropes and chains) and run the empty hook
up.
Boom in position "out of operation".
Swing the boom out of the wind (in the
fashion of a weathervane).
release the slewing brake to let the crane
slew freely, or comply with pertinent
restrictions.
Lock all track pinch bars or immobilize
crane by other suitable means.
The maximum permissible wind pressure on
the crane (critical air pressure = 250 N/qm
(5.22 lb /qft) as per DIN 15019 part 1, is
reached at a wind speed of 72 km/h (44.8
mph). However the measures to take the crane
out of service must be taken before this critical
level is reached.
time for taking

out of service
wind speed at the beginning

of taking out of service
2 min.
65 km/h ( 40.4 mph)
6 min.
60 km/h (37.3 mph)
12 min.
55 km/h ( 34.2 mph)
The connection between the critical wind

speed sinificant for the out of service and the
time required for the appropeiate safety
measures is explained below.
06.05
06.05
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.1 / 00
01.09.
06.06 1/1 General operating and safety instructions

Comply with pertinent accident prevention
regulations for cranes (cf. Appendix)
Overweight loads which exceed the

crane's lifting capacity must not be lifted.
Always actuate drive mechanisms at a smooth

and steady pace, with adiquate spacing
between gears. Avoid staying in the lower
gears, which are not intended for working but
for starting and accelerating.
The crane must not be used to transport

personnel from place to place, unless
permission has been obtained from the
relevant industrial safety or accident
insurance authority.
No unauthorized persons are allowed to

board the crane.
Select a suitable gear for the load to be lifted in

accordance with the load tabel in the cabin.
Dragging load, diagonal puling or use of

the crane to dislodge loads which have
become stuck are all strictly forbidden.
The hoist gearing can be switched under load,

but only with the crane at a standstill.
The overload protection devices must not

be used to switch off the lifting gear during
normal working. The crane operatror is
responsible for ensuring that each load to
be lifted does not exceed the crane's lifting
capacity.
If any unintentional motion of the crane or any

of its drives or gears is notied, immediately hit
the "EMERGENCY OFF" button.
WARNING
Resetting of the overloads may only ce
carried out under the strictest supervision
by qualified, aouthorized persons using
the crane manufacturer's specified test
weights and procedures. The crane must
not be operated with inoperative,
defective or incorrectly adjusted overload
devices. Failure to observe this warning is
extremely dangerous and could lead to an
If the crane operator anticipates an impending

hazard due to movement of the crane, he must
sound the horn as a warning signal.
In case of an approaching storm frant or local
thunderstorm, the crane must be shut down
and secured in due time (
Chapter Control
and crane operation "Taking out of service
in case of strom").
Never allow the hook to rest on the load

after lowering. This would allow the hoist
wire rooope to slacken, resulting in loose
and uneven spooling and increased rope
wear.
06.06
06.06
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
001
8.3 / 00
21.02.
06.07 1/1 Control stand

Crane operation is effected via the control
stand in the cabin.
To switch on the control elements is only
possible, when the main switch on the
electrical panel is in postion ON and both
control levers are in neutral position. Therefore
both control levers are equipped for automatic
zeroing.
Caution!
The key must be removed from the emergency
off switch after switching on the control
elements.
B
5
4
A
3
1
2
06.07
A control lever for hoist winch and crane travelling

mechanism
B control lever for trolley and slewing gear
1 key-operated emergency off switch
2 illuminated pushbutton control voltage ON + horn
3 toggle switch hoist gear shift
4
illuminated pushbutton Wind release
5
assembly override pushbutton switch
06.07
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
Operating manual
SK / SN / SMK / SMH
1.1 / 00
21.02.
06.08 1/1 Safety rules for crane operators

No one but an authorized person shall enter
the crane cab.
riding the brakes to evaporate moisture before

handling load.
The operator shall recognizes signals only

from the person supervising the lift, or an
authorized signal man.
Do not engage master clutch until you are sure

that everything is in the clear and in neutral.
If a warning signal is furnished, it shall be

sounded each time before travelling, and when
load approaches near or over workmen.
The proper party shall be noified of the need for
adjustment and repairs as soon as it becomes
known.
Do not travel over rough ground with a high

boom.
Do not back up with boom high without first
making sure that ground is level and free of
obstructions.
Chains and ropes used for handling the load

must be straight and free from twists and
kinks. Knots shall not be used to shorten chain
or rope.
The operator shall make sure, either by
personal observation or from signals, that the
load is well secured and balanced before it is
lifted more than a few cm / inches off the
ground.
Sudden starts and stops should be avoided.
When handling heavy loads, stability and
strength shall be checked by hoisting the load
a few cm / inches and holding it off the ground
with the brake.
Swing speed shall be controlled so that the
load does not swing out beyond the radius at
which it can be handled safety.
Do not drag load sideways by swinging.
Do not travel with load swinging back and forth
as it may cause crane to tip. Use tagline to
keep swinging out of load.
Do not leave crane or shovel with bucket or
load suspended in air.
Do not lift bucket or load after machine has
been standing during rainy weather without
06.08
06.08
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
18.02.
06.09 1/1 Seat of cab

1. Horizontal adjustement
Lift lever and move seat
forwards/backwards. Release the lever to
lock the seat..
2. Height and slope adjustement
Pull lever and adjust the seat position in
height and slope by loading/unloading the
front/rear seat cushion area.
4. Weight adjustement
Turn handwheel and adjust the suspension
to the operator's weight. The number in the
window must be similar to the operator's
weight.
5. Armrest
The inclination can be adjusted by the
knurled knob at the front.
3. Backrest adjustement
Adjust the position of the backrest by
pulling the lever whilst a load is applied to
the backrest.
06.09
06.09
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
6.2 / 00
21.02.
06.13 1/1 Hoist winch control 28 / 37 / 66 / 76 / 102 WB

The hoist winch is driven by a slip ring motor
with integrated eddy current brake. There are
5 raising and 4 lowering speeds for hoist winch
control.
Caution!
The speeds I and II are purely start-up
speeds. Too frequent raising or lowering
in these speeds leads to overheating of
the holst motor.
The gearbox also has four (37 WB / 66 WB /
76 WB / 102 WB) or two (28 WB) gears which
can be selected at the control stand using the
toggle switch "HOIST WINCH GEAR SHIFT"
(3). There are therefore 20 raising and 16
lowering speeds (37 WB / 66 WB / 76 WB /
102 WB) or 10 raising and 8 lowering speeds
(28 WB) available ( Chapter Control and
Crane Operation "Holst Winch Gear Shift
28 / 37 / 66 / 76 / 102 WB").
On exceeding the permissible block load for

the respektive gear, the hoist winch switches
off. In this case a lower gear must be
selected.
On exceeding the maximum load or the
maximum load torque, the hoist up movement
is switched and blocked immediately, however,
it is always possible to lower the load.
lf the block assembly reaches the top or
bottom limit position, a gear limit switch
switches off the hoist winch. In addition, there
is an upper pre-limit position at which the
control switches back to hoist speed I
automatically.
IV
I I II I
IV
II III
lf you switch from speed IV or V to zero

position in hoist mode, the hoist winch runs on
in speed I until the mechanical brake is
engaged.
06.13
06.13
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
6.1 / 00
22.02.
06.14 1/1 Hoist winch gear shift 28 / 37 / 64 / 76 / 102 WB

The hoist winch - gear shift is actuated by the
toggle switch in the control stand. The toggle
switch is a selection switch with - depending
on the hoist winch - 2 or 4 switching positions.
The individual switching positions could
be changed while the holst winch is in
raising or lowering operation. But the
holst winch controi does not realize the
gear change before the control lever is in
zero position.
The gear shift has the following safety
measures:
A gear shift is not possible if the hoist

motor is turning.
The gear shift can only take place when

the brake is closed.
You cannot shift to a gear where the

overload protection has responded.
The hoist winch cannot be activated if a

gear is not engaged correctly.
Gear 1 is the gear with the lowest raising or

lowering speeds. The higher the gear, the
higher the attainable raising or lowering
speeds.
Checking window for the gear shift in the holst winch

gearbox (here for four-gear shift)
Function:
The individual gears of the hoist winch gearbox
are shifted by a switching motor. A plexiglass
window is fitted to the gearbox through which
you can see which gear is engaged (see the
illustration on the right).
The hoist winch gear shift is
two-gear for the hoist winch 28 WB
four-gear for the hoist winches 37 WB, 66

WB, 76 WB and 102 WB
06.14
06.14
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK / SN
6.2 / 97
03.02.
06.15 1/1 Travelling mechanism control

The travelling mechanism is powered by two slip ring motors, with three speeds (3 - 0 - 3) effected via contactors.
Braking and enabling of reverse motion involves a time delay (adjustement of duration via the travelling mechanism
electrical panel).
The travelling mechanism is stopped at the end of the track by a double-action roller-lever limit switch. As soon as
the switch is contacted, the brake engage.
III
II
I
I
II
06.15
III
c:\eigene dateien\betriebsanleitungen\sprache\englisch\gruppe\sk_sn\kp06\kp061501.doc
06.15
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK
Operating manual
3.2 / 99
30.05.
06.21 1/1 Trolley travelling mechanism with frequency

control
The trolley travelling mechanism is driven by a
squirrel cage motor. The tr olley is moved joltfree by the driven frequency converter.
Altogether 4 travel speeds per direction are
available.
On exceeding the permissible load torque the
movement "Trolley forward" is switched off
immediately and blocked, however, it is always
possible to drive back the trolley.
lf the trolley reaches the front or rear limit
position, a gear limit switch switches off the
trolley travelling mechanism. In addition there is
a front and rear pre-limit position at which the
control switches back automatically to trolley
travelling speed I.
06.21
06.21
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK / SN
2.2 / 99
18.04.
06.28 1/1 Adjustment of the top pulley locking device

The initial spring tension of the top pulley
locking device is to be reset if the spring
tension is too high (reduce) or too low
(increase).
Loosen locknut (2) and adjust the spring

tension at the setting screw (3).
Measurement A is set by means of the

hexagon nut (1).
Re-tighten locknut (2).
06.28
1
2
3
4
Hexagon nut
Locknut
Setting screw
Pressure spring
c:\eigene dateien\betriebsanleitungen\sprache\englisch\gruppe\sk_sn\kp06\kp0628.doc
06.28
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK / SKC
3.2 / 99
10.07.
06.30 1/1 Nameplates
Item
Component
1
1.1
2
2.1
2.2
Undercarriage
- Cruciform base
- (Control box)
- (Control box)
Tower
- Tower section
- Bottommost tower section
Cab
Nameplate
- Type plate
- Electr. Plate
- Lightning
- Ident. Markings
- "No tresspassing"
- Lifting capacity plate
- Type plate
- Lifting capacity plate
- Gearbox data
- Slewing gear brake
- "No diagonal pulling!"
- EEC-certification "LpA"
- Accident prevention VBG 9
- CE-plate
2
1
4
4.1
Counter-jib
- Rotating platform
4.2
4.3
- in longitudinal grider
- Control box
5
5.1
Jib
- Boom foot
- Top chord
- Complete jib
- *Company nameplate
- - EEC-certification "LwA"
- Company nameplate
- Type plate
- Lightning
- Electr. Plate
- Type plate
- Ident. Markings
- Lifting capacity plates
* Note:
TEREX PEINER nameplates are attached to
both sides of the rotating platform. No
additional signs shall be attached without the
express approval of the manufacturer.
06.30
c:\eigene dateien\betriebsanleitungen\sprache\englisch\gruppe\sk\kp06\kp0630.doc
06.30
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
Operating manual
SK / SN / SMH - US
1.1 / 00
13.04.
06.31 1/2 Accident prevention signs

General information
Colors:
Accident prevention signs are found in several
locations on American cranes. They are color
and format coded to convey 5 different types of
messages. The first two of these five designs
will be found on every American product that
has been issued with accident prevention
signs. The latter 3 types may or may not be
found on a given machine, depending upon the
safety requirements for that product. If any sign
is lost or damaged, a replacement may
beordered from the TEREX PEINER
Serviceteam.
Accident prevention signs on your machine
should be read, understood and complied with:
1. Signs marked "DANGER" are posted to
warn anyone in the vicinity of the machine
of an immedieate hazard or peril capable of
causing serious injuries or severe
equipment damage. This sign may also be
used to prohibit any activity or practice
which is hazardous. The right half of each
sign carries a graphic symbol inside a red
circle identifying the type of hazard or
prohibiting a specific activity.The sign
shown in the following sketch for example,
warns of the danger present during
assembly or disassembly of boom
sections. A falling boom can cause serious
injury to anyone standing on, in, or under a
boom section. Booms can fall when pins
are removed, if not properly supported by
blocking, or if boom suspension ropes are
not relocated a described in the operating
manual.
06.31
RED
WHITE
2. Signs marked "WARNING" are used to call

attention to hazards or unsafe practices
which could result in severe personal injury
or death.
Colors:
BLACK
ORANGE
3. Signs marked "CAUTION" are used to call

attention to specific potential dangers or
hazards which could cause serious but not
irreversible damage or injury. This sign
may also be used to warn against
practices or hazards in a more broadly
general way.
Colors:
BLACK
YELLOW
06.31
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
Operating manual
SK / SN / SMH - US
1.1 / 00
13.04.
06.31 2/2 Accident prevention signs

4. Three other types if signs may also be
used: green and white "GENERAL
SAFETY" signs (indicating rules relating to
health, first aid, housekeeping, or general
safety precautions), red and white "FIRE"
or "EMERGENCY" signs (indicating fire
hose or fire extinguisher location, or
access information), and blue and white
"NOTICE" signs (relating to location of
equipment or information helpful to
operation.
06.31
06.31
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
11.04.
06.70 1/3 PLC-system safety rules for users

General notes
The following chapters contains the information
required for the normal use of the product
described herein. lt is meant for technically
qualified personnel with special training or
having relevant knowledge in the field of
measuring, open- and closed-loop control
engineering, hereinafter called automation
engineering.
The knowledge and technically appropriate
implementation of the safety notes and
warnings contained in the following chapters
are the prerequisite for safe installation and
commissioning as well as for safety during
operation and maintenance of the product
described. Only qualified personnel has the
expertise required under specific conditions to
correctly interpret and implement the safety
notes and warnings given in general in this
document.
Qualified personnel as meant by the safetyrelated notes in the following chapters or on the
product itself are persons that
are either, as project engineering

personnel, familiar with the safety
concepts of automation engineering;
or are, as operating personnel, trained in

the handling of automation systems and
know the operation-reiated contents of the
following chapters;
or, as commissioning and service

personnel, have special training enabling
them to repair such automation systems
or have the authorization to commission,
ground and label circuits and
devices/systems in compliance with the
applicabie safety standards.
Normal use
Qualified personnel
Unqualified interference with the
device/system or non-compliance with the
warnings specified in the following chapters or
attached to the device/system cabinet can
result in serious physical injury or damage to
property. Therefore, only appropriately
qualified personnel is allowed to interfere
with this device/system.
06.70
The device/system or the respective

system component may only be used in
cases where the technical data are not
exceeded.
The product described was developed,

manufactured, tested, and documented in
compliance with the relevant safety
standards. Therefore, the product
normally causes no hazards for property
or physical heafth, if the handling
instructions and safety notes for project
planning, mounting/ installation, normal
use and maintenance/repair are complied
with.
06.70
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
11.04.

WARNING
WARNING
After removal of the housing or the

protection against electric shock or after
opening of the system cabinet, certain
dangerous live parts of these
devices/systems become accessible, which
poses a risk for the user's health. Only
appropriately qualified personnel is
allowed to interfere with this
device/system. This personnel must have
profound knowledge of all sources of
hazards and maintenance measures
according to the specifications given in the
following chapters.
Wherever faults occurring in the

automation system can cause material
damage or even personal injury, i.e. can be
dangerous faults, additional external
precautions have to be taken or equipment
has to be provided (e.g. by independent
limit switches, mechanical interlocks etc.
that ensure or impose a safe operational
condition even in the event of a fault.
Active and passive faults of an automation

system
Depending on the task to be performed by

an electronic automation system, both
active and passive faults can be
dangerous faults. In a drive control for
example, in general the active fault is
dangerous, since it leads to unauthorized
switching on of the driving mechanism. In
the case of a signalling function, on the
other hand, a passive fault may prevent a
hazardous operational condition from
being indicated/signalized.
This differentation between possible faults

and thei task-related attribution to
dangerous and harmless faults is of
importance for all safety considerations
concerning the product delivered.
06.70
WARNING
Repair work on an automation system ma
only be carried out by qualified personnel
Unauthorized opening or improperly
performed repair work can lead to death or
severe physical injuries as well as to
considerable damage to property.
Before you open the device, always pull
the mains plug or switch the disconnecting
switch to OFF-position. I/O cables may be
plugged or pulled under de-energized
conditions only.
Interface cables may be plugged or pulled
without switching off the voltage supply
only if the following preconditions have
been met:
1. The cable must be shielded and the
shield must be linked to the conducting
metal hood.
2. Prior to plugging the cables, a
potential equalization has to be carried out
by connecting the PE-carrying plug parts.
06.70
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
11.04.

WARNING
Do not throw batteries into fire and do no
soldering on the cell body, because there
is explosion hazard (max. temperature
100C). Do not open and recharge lithium
batteries or batteries containing mercury;
use only the same types for replacement!
Always treat batteries and accumulators as
hazardous waste and dispose of them
accordingly. When using monitors:
lmproper. interference, especially
alteration of the high voltage or installation
of a different type of picture tube can lead
to an increased amount of X-radiation. A
device that has been changed that way no
longer corresponds to the device for
which approval was given and further
operation of this device is not longer
permitted.
06.70
06.70
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.2 / 00
18.04.
06.72 1/1 PLC-system display unit

The display unit of the PLC-system mounted in
the crane cabin consists of the following display
control elements:
1 LC display (four display lines per mask)

2 Next display mask
3 Previous display mask
Switching over display from

Function 1: 2- to 4-rope operation
(applies for crane types SK)
Function 2:Saving the settings
Key-operated switch for selecting

special functions
Control lamp, yellow:

Crane load - 95% (pre-warning lamp)
Control lamp, red:

Crane load - 100% (warning lamp)
95%
100%
8 Language selection
06.72
06.72
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
2.2 / 00
18.04.
06.74 1/4 PLC system displays in the cab

The display unit of the PLC mounted in the
crane cab consists of the following displays
and control elements:
Part 1: Displays during crane operation
Standard display (Display 1)
5
1
1 4
6 2
Attached load (display in lbs and as % bar chart)
Radius of attached load (display in feet and as %

bar chart)
Reeving; Switch over by pressing the blue button

(pushbutton 4)
LC display (four display lines per mask)
Scroll forward
Scroll backward
Maximum possible radius for momentarily

attached load (display in feet)
Switch over display from 2 to 4-rope operation /

Save the settings
Wind speed in mph (standard for SK 315 - option

for all other SK-cranes)
Key-operated switch for selecting special

functions
Load torque due to size and radius of attached

load (display in percent)
Control lamp, yellow: Crane load 95 %

(pre-warning lamp)
Control lamp, red: Crane load 100 %

(warning lamp)
The LC display provides important information

to the crane operator. Various displays can be
selected by scrolling forward or backward to
different masks. Information on the current
operating state of the crane as well as service
data, warning and fault messages can be read
off.
06.74
Note:
The % bar charts visually show the percentage
value of the actual value related to the
maximum value (100 %). This graphic type of
display is generally easier to understand that
the numeric value in the respective unit of
measure.
Note:
lf the load torque reaches a value of 95%, the
pre-warning lamp on the display unit lights up
(control lamp 6, yellow).
warning lamp on the display unit lights up
(control lamp 7, red) and an acoustic sional is
sounded.
06.74
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
2.2 / 00
18.04.

Display 2
Display 4
Attached load (display in tons and as % bar chart)
Radius of attached load (display in meter and as

% bar chart)
Reeving; Switch over by pressing the blue button

(pushbutton 4, see page 1)
Maximum possible radius for momentarily

attached load (display in meter)
Wind speed in mph (standard for SK 315 - option

for all other SK-cranes)
Load torque due to size and radius of attached

load (display in percent)
Note:
pre-warning lamp on the display unit lights up
(control lamp 6, yellow; see page 1).
warning lamp on the display unit lights up
(control lamp 7, red; see page 1) and an
acoustic signal is sounded.
Display 3
Total operating time in hours, minutes and seconds

1
Hoisting unit
(Counting begins when the hoisting unit brake
released)
Slewing unit
(Counting begins when slewing to right or to left
Trolley unit
(Counting begins when moving forwards or
backwards
Crane travelling unit

(Counting begins when moving forwards or
backwards
Display 4
Number of switching processes (switching

operations)
11
Crane4type 3
Installed hoist winch (display in kilowatts and in

horsepower
Mounted jib length (display in meters and feets
Total operating time of the crane (display in

hours, minutes and seconds)
Counting begins when any function of the crane
is activated.
Counting ends when all functions of the crane
are stopped.
06.74
Hoisting unit
Slewing unit
Trolley unit
Crane travelling unit
06.74
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
2.2 / 00
18.04.

Display 6
Display 1
Number of operations exceeding crane limit:

1
Maximum load
Load torque limiter
Hoist limit switch
Part 2: Displays during crane assembly
Display the output voltage of the potentiometer

in the trolley limit switch
Instruction to drive the trolley forward to the

front limit position after having adjusted once the
output voltage of the potentiometer in the trolley
limit switch
Instruction to store the front limit position in the

PLC-System
Display 2
Standard display (Display 0)
Display that the erection bridge in the A-panel is

plugged in.
Display wether DIN or FEM has been selected as

basic standard for the load curve.
Display of the mounted jib length (display in

meters and feets). The jib length is determined
by a bridge in the A-panel.
Display the output voltage of the potentiometer

in the trolley limit switch
Instruction to drive the trolley back to the rear

limit position after having adjusted once the
output voltage of the potentiometer in the trolley
limit switch
Instruction to store the front limit position in the

PLC-System
Display 3
Note:
The following displays appear only if the keyoperaed switch is turned to horizontal position.
1
06.74
Instruction to drive the hook to the upper limit

position
Display the output signal of the potentiometer in

the hoist limit switch (display in feets)
Instruction to store the upper limit position of

the hook in the PLC-System
06.74
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
2.2 / 00
18.04.

Display 4
Instruction to drive the hook to the lower limit

position

the hoist limit switch (display in feets)
Instruction to store the lower limit position of

Display 5
3
Instruction
to drive the hook to the upper limit
position

the hoist limit switch (display in meters)

Display 6
3
Instruction
to drive the hook to the upper limit 2
position

the hoist limit switch (display in meters)

06.74
06.74
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK, SN
3.2 / 99
27.07.99
06.79 1/4 PLC-system error messages (of the display in the cabin)
The PLC system has an error warning system which can display various error messages to the crane operator
during crane operation. If an error message appears, the crane operator has to inform the responsible person of
the construction site immediately. Then a specialist has to be entrusted with repairing the fault.
Danger
Work on the cranes electric may only be performed by skilled personnel. Else it could cause danger
for the life of the person working on the electric and/or third persons in the near of the crane. Also an
extensive damage is possible.
The following table lists all the messages of the PLC-system, its possible cause, and measures for repairing the
fault.
Error
No.
PLC-display in the cabin

outputs following message
01*
FREQUENCY CONVERTER
SLEWING DRIVE
IN PANEL
FAILED
The cause of the error is displayed

The frequency converter on the frequency converter (FC) in
of the slewing drive is
the panel (message depending on
switched off.
FC system in plain text or as error
no.)
See device-specific original

documentation of the supplier. If
the error cannot be eliminated,
please contact the crane
manufacturer.
02*
FREQUENCY CONVERTER
TROLLEY DRIVE
IN PANEL
FAILED

of the trolley drive is
switched off.
no.)

manufacturer.
03*
FREQUENCY CONVERTER
HOIST DRIVE
IN PANEL
FAILED

of the hoist drive is
switched off.
no.)

manufacturer.
04*
EDDY CURRENT BRAKE

HOIST MOTOR
FAILED
05*
06*
07*
08*
MOT. CIRCUIT BREAKER

HOIST MOTOR
HAS TRIPPED
-1Q1- IN PANEL
HOIST BRAKE OR FAN
HAS TRIPPED
-1Q2+1Q4- IN PANEL
HOIST GEAR SWITCHING
HAS TRIPPED
-1Q3- IN PANEL
TEMPERATURE
HOIST MOTOR
TOO HIGH
-1F3- IN PANEL
Error
No eddy current, the

monitor relay 1F2
(28 WB, 37 WB) or 1A1
(66 WB, 102 WB) fails to
respond, the hoist drive
is switched off.
Possible cause
The hoist drive is

switched off
The hoist drive is

switched off
The hoist drive is

switched off
The hoist motor is

overheated
Power supply (220 V) is cut

off
Rectifier 1V1 failed
Solution
Overcurrent due to sluggish

action.
Short-circuit in motor main
circuit
Phase missing

action.
Short-circuit in brake or fan
main circuit
Phase missing

action.
Short-circuit in main circuit of
gear switching
Phase missing
Driven too long in startup

stages
External fan on hoist
motordefective
Check power supply

cable,cable connections and
fuses
Check rectifier 1V1
Check mech. free-running of
the motor
Check entire wiring and
motor electrics
Check voltage
the brake and of the fan
Check entire wiring and brake
+ fan electrics
Check voltage
Check mech. free-running
Check entire wiring and
electrics
Check voltage
Let hoist motor cool down
Change travel mode
Check external fan on hoist
motor
* If there is more than one panel on the crane, the display shows to which of the panels the message refers
06.79
06.79
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK, SN
3.2 / 99
27.07.99
Error
No.

09
------------------PHASE SEQUENCE FALSE

CRANE IS OFF
--------------------
The asymmetry relay

0F11 has responded
10
RADIUS INDICATOR
FAILED
POTENTIOMETER IN
TROLLEY LIMIT SWITCH
The radius is less than

0.1% of L max
11
LOAD MEASURING PIN

FAILED
- CABLE BREAK
CALL ELECTRICIAN
12
SHORT-CIRCUIT IN
PLC-OUTPUT UNIT
SWITCH CRANE
OFF AND ON
Short circuit in output

unit of the PLC-system
13
WIND 64 km/h 40 mph

STOP CRANE OPERATION
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
RADIUS 36.8 m 120 ft
Wind speed is too high

(wind speed is
displayed, i.e. 64 km/h
or 40 mph)
14*

TROLLEY MOTOR
HAS TRIPPED
-3Q1- IN PANEL
The trolley drive is

switched off
15*

SLEWING SUPPLY
HAS TRIPPED
-2Q0- IN PANEL
All slewing motors are

switched off
16*
17*

SLEWING MOTOR 2
HAS TRIPPED
-2Q2- IN PANEL
The output signal of the

load measuring pin
amplifier is less than
0.05 V
Phase failure
False phase sequence
Asymmetrical phase
sequence
Potentiometer in trolley limit

switch is misadjusted
Cable break (potentiometer
current missing)
Reset potentiometer
Check cable connections
(panel, load measuring pin)
and cables
Reset zero point

Check cable connections
(panel, load measuring pin)
and cables
Zero point is misadjusted

Cable break between
amplifier and panel
Coupling relay of the

respective output group
defective
Error in external wiring
For at least 5 seconds the wind

speed was higher than 60 km/h or
37 mph
The slewing motor 1 is

switched off

switched off
18*
19*

SLEWING BRAKE SUPPLY
2Q4 OR 2Q5 OR 2Q6
IN PANEL IS OFF
All slewing motors are

switched off
Solution

switched off
GEAR IS CHANGING
- - - ATTENTION ! - - DO NOT OPERATE
THE HOIST DRIVE
Possible cause

SLEWING MOTOR 3
HAS TRIPPED
-2Q3- IN PANEL
20

SLEWING MOTOR 1
HAS TRIPPED
-2Q1- IN PANEL
Error
Switch crane off and on at main

switch (panel). If the message
reappears, then check
Coupling relay
External wiring
Stop crane operation
immediately!

action
circuit
Phase missing
Short-circuit in slewing drive

power supply
Phase missing

action
circuit
Phase missing

action
circuit
Phase missing

action
circuit
Phase missing
Short-circuit in slewing brake

power supply
Phase missing
Hoist drive operation is

Gear change in the hoist gear
not possible
Check power feed in

construction site distributor
Check power cable
Check power cable

the motor
Check entire wirings and
motor electrics
Check voltage
electrics
Check voltage
the motor
motor electrics
Check voltage
the motor
motor electrics
Check voltage
the motor
motor electrics
Check voltage
electrics
Check voltage
Wait a few seconds without

operating the hoist drive. Hoist
drive operation is possible again
as soon as the message
disappears
If there is more than one panel on the crane, the display shows to which of the panels the message refers
06.79
06.79
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK, SN
3.2 / 99
27.07.99
Error
No.
21*

24 V DC-OUTPUT FOR
TROLLEY BRAKE FAILED
Error
The trolley
switched off
Possible cause
drive
is
-0F6+0F7- IN PANEL
22*
**
***
DOOR IN PANEL
IS OPEN
------------------CRANE IS OFF
23
------------------HOIST DRIVE OVERLOAD

CHANGE GEAR !
--------------------
The crane is off
The hoist
switched off
drive
is
Short-circuit in trolley brake

power supply
Phase missing
CRANE IS OFF
The crane is off
25*
EDDY CURRENT BRAKE

LUFFING MOTOR
FAILED
Driven too long in wrong gear
Change gear
The "OFF" / "EMERGENCY OFF"

switch has pushed down
Insert the key into the "OFF" /

"EMERGENCY OFF" switch to
unlock it and then press the
pushbutton "CONTROL
VOLTAGE ON"
26

SLEWING DRIVE
HAS TRIPPED
2Q0+2Q1+2Q2+2Q3+2Q4
One of the slewing

motors or all slewing
motors is/are switched
off
27*

LUFFING MOTOR
HAS TRIPPED
- 3Q1 - IN PANEL
The luffing motor is

switched off
28*

LUFFING BRAKE OR FAN
HAS TRIPPED
- 3Q2 + 3Q4 - IN PANEL
29*
TEMPERATURE
LUFFING MOTOR
TOO HIGH
-3F3- IN PANEL

overheated
30
LUFFING DRIVE
LIMIT SWITCH FOR
UPPERMOST POSITION
HAS TRIPPED

switched off.

switched off

electrics
Check voltage
Close the door in panel
-------------------No eddy current, the

monitor
relay
3F2
(28 WB, 37 WB) or 3A1
(66 WB, 102 WB) fails to
respond, the
luffing
drive is switched off.
Door in panel is open
------------------24
Solution
Power supply (220 V ) is cut

off
Rectifier 3V1 failed

action
circuit or in slewing drive
power supply or in slewing
brake power supply
Phase missing

action
circuit
Phase missing

action.
Short-circuit in brake or fan
main circuit
Phase missing
Driven too long in startup

stages
External fan on luffing motor
defective
Boom is in uppermost position
Check power supply cable,

cable connections and fuses
Check rectifier 3V1
Check mech. free-running

ofthe motor
(motor) electrics
Check voltage
the motor
motor electrics
Check voltage
the brake and of the fan
Check entire wiring and brake
+ fan electrics
Check voltage
Let luffing motor cool down

Change travel mode
Check external fan on luffing
motor
Lower the boom
*
If there is more than one panel on the crane, the display shows to which of the panels the message refers
** If there is only one panel on the crane, the display shows which door is open by indicating the door number
*** For some crane types the message that the panel doors are open is an option and not included in the
standard version
06.79
06.79
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK, SN
3.2 / 99
27.07.99
Error
No.

31
LUFFING DRIVE
LIMIT SWITCH FOR
BOTTOMMOST POSITION
HAS TRIPPED

switched off.
Boom is in bottommost position
32
COUNTERWEIGHT
MONITORING
LEFT SIDE
HAS TRIPPED

switched off.
Loosened rope connection or rope

Fix the rope at the counterweight
breakage at the left side of the
carriage or reeve a new one.
counterweight carriage
33
COUNTERWEIGHT
MONITORING
RIGHT SIDE
HAS TRIPPED

switched off.
Loosened rope connection or rope

Fix the rope at the counterweight
breakage at the right side of the
carriage or reeve a new one.
counterweight carriage
06.79
Error
Possible cause
Solution
Raise the boom
06.79
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
06.80 1/4 PLC-system I/O module analog

Module installation or exchange
!ATTENTION
Observe the Chapter "Safty notes for the
user".
Switch off the system.
Loosen the plug connector screws.
Pull out the plug connector.
Screw off the PE-conductor.
After removing the four Philips screws

detach the connector sheet metal.
Ater adjusting the necessary jumpers and

addresses plug the module into an
unassigned module slot. The bus plug
connector must be free of damage and
has to be snapped into the socket
connector of the bus-PCB by exerting a
little pressure.
The module must be snugly and flush in

the guiding grooves of the housing.
Screwfasten the cooling rail.
Insert the module designation labels from

below into the groove of the front plate
unterneath the transparent strips.
Break the blanking plate of the

corresponding slot of the SUB-Dconnector-opening out of the connector
sheet metal.
Fasten the connector sheet metal with

screws to the housing.
Screwfasten the PE connecting cable.
Plug in the plug connector and fasten it

with the screws.
Module Type 4885.06.011

The module has 8x10 bit analog inputs (0 to
+10V or 0 to 20mA) and 4x10 bit analog
outputs (0 to +10V or 0 to 20mA each) and can
also be used in Digsyplus. The inputs are
individually configurable as current or voltage
inputs.
Module slot in the Digsy plus
When supplying the operating voltage
(+24V CPU) via the 9-pole SUB-D-jack of the
CPU-module, the I/O-module analog can be
operated on all module slots.
Addressing on two slots (8IW/4OW)
In this case the module is addressed in such a
way as if it would occupy two module slots.
This type of addressing is possible in Digsyplus.
HEX-Switch
Pos.
Y
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
06.80
I/O- Group
Input-Group
(1 X
4)
invalid
invalid
IW/OW1.X +
not
selectable
IW/OW3.X +
not
selectable
IW/OW5.X +
not
selectable
IW/OW7.X +
not
selectable
IW/OW9.X +
not
selectable
IW/OW11.X +
not
selectable
invalid
invalid
standard
Remarks
(1 X
4)
IW2.X
IW4.X
I/O address
range
IW6.X
IW8.X
IW10.X
IW12.X
I/O address
range
06.80
11.04.
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
SK / SN
Operating manual
1.1 / 00

!ATTENTION
!ATTENTION
HEX-switch positon 7 must now no longer

be used within the control unit
configuration!
The jumpers of inputs not in use must by

all means be in position "A" (=current
input) or in position "B" (=terminated
voltage input)!
A current signal on a voltage input, or a
voltage signal on a current input will
definitely cause undefined measuring
results! When connecting a voltage output
to an input with the jumper in "A"-position
(=current input) the voltage output may get
damaged!
With this type of addressing the 8 IWs spread

among two input-groups can read by the
Digsyplus-CPU. Per module the Digsyplus has
available 8IWs and 4Ows each. As regards the
address, two module slots (= two HEX-switch
positions) are occupied with the module.
Voltage or current inputs (J20 J27)
For this selection 8 jumpers (J20-J27) are
avaiable. The as-delivered condition is
indicated in the grey column.
Type
010
to
013
010
to
013
010
to
013
010
to
013
011
to
013
011
to
013
011
to
013
011
to
013
Jumpe
r
Input
wor
d
Position
A
J20
X.1
Current
input
J21
X.2
Current
input
J22
X.3
Current
input
J23
X.4
Current
input
J24
X.5
Current
input
J25
X.6
Current
input
J26
X.7
Current
input
J27
X.8
Current
input
06.80
Position
B
not
plugged
Voltage
input
terminated
= lowresistance
Voltage
input not
terminated
= highresistance
Voltage
input
terminated
= lowresistance
Voltage
input not
terminated
= highresistance
06.80
11.04.
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
SK / SN
Operating manual
1.1 / 00
11.04.

Diagnosis
Front connector pin assignement
A two-colour LED which is visible on the front

panel of the Digsy control unit is used for
monitoring the functions. At the same time the
diagnostic states are led to the outside via a
floating relay contact (changeover contact).
The diagnostic LED or the relay indicate the
following states:
LED red:
System in reset-mode or range of one or
several analog inputs is exceeded, make
contact is open, break contact is closed
(relay has dropped out).
LED green:
Proper operation, range not exceeded,
make contact is closed, break contact is
open (relay has picked up).
LED red / green flashing:

Watchdog Timer has responded or cyclic
exceeding of the range of one or several
analog inputs. The relay pulses with the
same frequency.
Voltage supply
The I/O-module analog draws both +5V and
+24V as supply voltages from the Digsy-BUS.
Z = 1 to 12 depending on HEX-switch position

Z corresponds to the word-group number
06.80
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Pin
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Pin-name
KR
KG
KA
GND/ANA
GND/ANA
GND/ANA
GND/ANA
O1I
O1U
O2I
O2
O3I
O3U
O4I
O4U
O4G
O3G
O2G
GND/ANA
GND/ANA
GND/ANA
I8G
I7G
I6G
I5G
Pin
Operand
name
8IW/
4IW/
4OW
4OW
O1G
I4G
O2G
I3G
O3G
I2G
O4G
I1G
GND/ANA
I8
GND/ANA
I7
GND/ANA
I6
GND/ANA
I5
O1G
I4
IW Z.4
I4
IW Z.4
I3
IW Z.3
I3
IW Z.3
I2
IW Z.2
I2
IW Z.2
I1
IW Z.1
I1
IW Z.1
Operand
Definition
Break contact relay
Common contact relay
Make contact relay
Analog - GND
Analog - GND
Analog - GND
Analog - GND
Current output 1
Voltage output 1
Current output 2
Voltage output 2
Current output 3
Voltage output 3
Current output 4
Voltage output 4
GND output 4
GND output 3
GND output 2
Analog - GND
Analog - GND
Analog - GND
GND input 8
GND input 7
GND input 6
GND input 5
OW Z.1
OW Z.1
OW Z.2
OW Z.2
OW Z.3
OW Z.3
OW Z.4
OW Z.4
Operand
8IW/
4OW
Operand
IW Z+12 IW Z+1.4
IW Z+12 IW Z+1.3
IW Z+12 IW Z+1.2
IW Z+12 IW Z+1.1
IW Z.4
IW Z.4
IW Z.3
IW Z.3
IW Z.2
IW Z.2
IW Z.1
IW Z.1
IW Z.4
IW Z.4
IW Z.3
IW Z.3
IW Z.2
IW Z.2
IW Z.1
IW Z.1
Definition
GND output 1
GND input 4
GND output 2
GND input 3
GND output 3
GND input 2
GND output 4
GND input 1
Analog GND
Input (U/I) 8
Analog GND
Input (U/I) 7
Analog GND
Input (U/I) 6
Analog GND
Input (U/I) 5
GND output 1
Input (U/I) 4
Input (U/I) 4
Input (U/I) 3
Input (U/I) 3
Input (U/I) 2
Input (U/I) 2
Input (U/I) 1
Input (U/I) 1
06.80
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.1 / 00

Pin assignment, listed acc. to input/output
channels
Channe
l
Definition
Pin-name
Pin
Input (U/I)
GND input
Voltage output
Current output
GND output
Input (U/I)
GND input
Voltage output
Current output
GND output
Input (U/I)
GND input
Voltage output
Current output
GND output
I1
I1G
O1U
O1I
O1G
I2
I2G
O2U
O2I
O2G
I3
I3G
O3U
O3I
O3G
49, 50
33
9
8
26
47, 48
31
11
10
28
45, 46
29
13
12
30
Channe
l
5
6
7
8
Definition
Pin-name
Pin
Input (U/I)
GND input
Voltage output
Current output
GND output
Input (U/I)
GND input
Input (U/I)
GND input
Input (U/I)
GND input
Input (U/I)
GND input
I4
I4G
O4U
O4I
O4G
I5
I5G
I6
I6G
I7
I7G
I8
I8GG
43, 44
27
15
14
32
41
25
39
24
37
23
35
22
I/O Cable Analog 8IW/4OW
I/O-cable analog, length: 1.7 m with individual and overall shield for 8IW/4OW, full metal hood,
individual crimp contacts are attached, cable end cleanly cut:
06.80
06.80
11.04.
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
11.04.
06.81 1/5 PLC-system I/O modules - binary

Functional description
Input group two
The modules are required for the processing

of binary signals. The modules are provided
with:
The inputs of the group one are plusswitching. Plus-switching means: +24V on the
input will be recognized by the module as
logical "HIGH", whereas 0V on the input will be
recognized by the module as logical "LOW".
16 binary inputs plus switching (+24V =

ON, logical "HIGH") with a signal level
from 0 to 24VDC.
Output group one
16 binary outputs with a signal level of

24VDC.
The binary output group (OX.1 to OX.8) has

eight outputs which are loadable with 2A each.
The in- and outputs are combined in two

I/O-groups with 8 equal channels each.
Output group two
The in-/output group two can also be

used as an input group with 8 binary plus
switching inputs (+24V = ON, logical
"HIGH").
The signal status of the in- and outputs is

indicated via an LED.
Input groups one and two

The two binary input groups (IX.1 to IX.8 and
IIX+1.1 to IX+1.8)from 0 to +24V are resistorcoupled in both module types and have eight
inputs per input group each.
NOTE:
The outputs of the output group two are
backreadable. e.g.: the output A2.2 can be
read-back via the input E9.2.
The 8 in-/outputs of the in-/output group two
can either be used as additional plusswitching inputs (IX+8.1 to IX+8.8) or as
outputs (OX+1.1 to OX+1.8) that are loadable
with 0.4A each.
NOTE:
A mixed operation of the individual in-/
outputs is possible.
NOTE:
X = slot-dependent
Slot 1 X = 1
Slot 2 X = 3
Slot 3 X = 5
X means:
e.g.: I1.1 to I1.8
e.g.: I3.1 to I3.8
e.g.: O5.1 to O5.8 etc.
Input group one

The inputs of the group one are plusswitching. Plus-switching means: 0V on the
input will be recognized by the module as
logical "LOW", whereas +24V on the input will
be recognized by the module as logical
"HIGH".
06.81
06.81
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
11.04.

Module slot and addressing
The module slots have a ficed address for
each I/O-module-binary. Only the slots 1 to 8
are allowed. The in- or output groups will be
slot-dependently addressed according to the
following table:
Input
Slot
group 1
group 2
I1.1 I1.8
I2.1 I2.8
I3.1 I3.8
I4.1 I4.8
I5.1 I5.8
I6.1 I6.8
I7.1 I7.8
I8.1 I8.8
5 I13.1 I13.8I14.1 I14.8
6 I15.1 I15.8I16.1 I16.8
7 I17.1 I17.8I18.1 I18.8
8 I19.1 I19.8I20.1 I20.8
Output
group 1
O1.1 O1.8
O9.1 O9.8
O3.1 O3.8
O10.1
O10.8
O5.1 O5.8
O11.1
O11.8
O7.1 O7.8
O12.1
O12.8
O13.1
O13.8
O21.1
O21.8
O15.1
O15.8
O22.1
O22.8
O17.1
O17.8
O23.1
O23.8
O19.1
O19.8
O24.1
O24.8
In-/output group 2
as
as outputs
inputs
O2.1 O2.8
I9.1 I9.8
O4.1 O4.8
I10.1 I10.8
O6.1 O6.8
I11.1 I11.8
O8.1 O8.8
I12.1 I12.8
O14.1
O14.8
I21.1 I21.8
O16.1
O16.8
I22.1 I22.8
O18.1
O18.8
I23.1 I23.8
O20.1
O20.8
I24.1 I24.8
Short-Circuit Flag (S.C.-Flag = KSM)

The short-circuit flags (s.c.-flags) serve for the
short-circuit recognition of the outputs in the
case of an external short-circuit between 24V
and GND.
An s.c.-flag will be set when an output (e.g.
O1.1) is driven by the application program and
a shortcircuit occurs externally on the same
output. The short-circuit flag remains set until
it is reset either by the application program or
by switching off and on the control unit (after
the short circuit has been removed).
NOTE:
= direct outputs
Short-circuit Protection
The output group one and in-/output group two
respond with installed constant-current
sources to too high output current and they
lower, depending on the size and type of the
short circuit, the output voltage on the
respective output. lf as a result of this the
output voltage becomes too low, the
respective short-circuit flag will be set.
The s.c.-flag will be set too, if only, the

operating voltage +24VI/O is switched off
(e.g. by an emergency-stop-button) and at
the same time one or several outputs of
this ouput port are driven.
Short circuit flag of the output group one
The s.c.-flag of the output group one is
determined by comparing the output voltage
levels.
lf due to a short circuit the output voltage on an
output, e.g. O1.1, falls for more than approx.
50 ms below the s.c.-flag response voltage, a
hardware-flipf lop which switches off the
complete output group one will be set, i.e., the
output voltages from O1. 1 to O1.8 will be set
to 0V- The red status-LED "MK 1" will be
illuminated.
The s.c.-flag remains set, even if the external
short circuit has in the meanwhile been
removed.
WARNING:
Continuous currents larger than allowed
in the data sheet are not permissible,
since the module can be destroyed.
06.81
06.81
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
11.04.

Behaviour in the case of wiring errors
WARNING
In this connection "wiring errors" means the

following: a polare reversal of the operating
voltages, a wrong connection of an operating
voltage to an in- or output, a short-circuiting of
two inputs or outputs, or the short-circuiting of
an input with an output.
When applying an operating voltage to

outputs the I/O-module can be damaged.
Polarity reversal of the operating voltage

+24VCPU
At present, in the case of a Digsy plus control
unit of an internal diode on the CPU module.
The protection, however, becomes only
effective, if the operating voltage +24VCPU is
led via a fuse .
Polarity reversal of the operating voltage
+24VI/O
A load-dump protective diode serves as a
reverse-connect protection. The protection,
however, becomes only effective, if the
operating voltage +24V I/O, is led via a fuse.
Incorrectly applying an operating voltage
to in- or outputs
lt is allowed to apply an operating voltage to
inputs of the input group one or two (I1.1 to
I1.8 and I2.1 to I2.8).
Whereas it is not allowed to apply an operating
voltage to the outputs (O1.1 to O1.8 and O2.1
to O2.8) and to the inputs of the in-/output
group teo (I9.1 to I9.8 = O2.1 to O2.8).
06.81
Short-circuiting of inputs
Each input may be short-circuited with an
output, with any number of inputs, against
GND or against the operating voltage +24VI/O.
Short-circuiting of outputs between each
other
A short-circuiting of outputs between each
other is impermissible due to unequal current
distribution.
WARNING
When short-circuiting outputs with
another both outputs of the module can be
damaged.
Short-circuit of outputs to GND
In case of a short circuit of one or several
outputs to GND, always the s.c.-flag of the
respective output group will be activated, i.e.:
the output group will be switched-off.
06.81
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
11.04.

Front connector pin assignment
Pi
n
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
Symbol
Operand
Input X.1
Input X.2
Input X.3
Input X.4
Input X.5
Input X.6
Input X.7
Input X.8
I/OX+1.1/X+8.1
I/OX+1.2/X+8.2
I/OX+1.3/X+8.3
I/OX+1.4/X+8.4
I/OX+1.5/X+8.5
I/OX+1.6/X+8.6
I/OX+1.7/X+8.7
I/OX+1.8/X+8.8
0V (GND)
Input X.+1.2
Input X.+1.4
Input X.+1.6
Input X.+1.8
Output X.1/X+8.1
Output X.2/X+8.2
Output X.3/X+8.3
Output X.4/X+8.4
Output X.5/X+8.5
Output X.6/X+8.6
Output X.7/X+8.7
Output X.8/X+8.8
UI/O
UI/O
UI/O
UCPU
Input X.+1.1
Input X.+1.3
Input X.+1.5
Input X.+1.7
Output X.1/X+8.1
Output X.2/X+8.2
Output X.3/X+8.3
Output X.4/X+8.4
Output X.5/X+8.5
Output X.6/X+8.6
Output X.7/X+8.7
Output X.8/X+8.8
UI/O
UI/O
UI/O
UCPU
I X.1
I X.2
I X.3
I X.4
I X.5
I X.6
I X.7
I X.8
OX+1.1 / I X+8.1
OX+1.2 / I X+8.2
OX+1.3 / I X+8.3
OX+1.4 / I X+8.4
OX+1.5 / IX+8.5
OX+1.6 / I X+8.6
OX+1.7 / I X+8.7
OX+1.8 / I X+8.8
06.81
I X.2
I X.4
I X.6
I X.8
O X.1 / O X+8.1
O X.2 / O X+8.2
O X.3 / O X+8.3
O X.4 / O X+8.4
O X.5 / O X+8.5
O X.6 / O X+8.6
O X.7 / O X+8.7
O X.8 / O X+8.8
I X.1
I X.3
I X.5
I X.7
O X.1 / O X+8.1
O X.2 / O X+8.2
O X.3 / O X+8.3
O X.4 / O X+8.4
O X.5 / O X+8.5
O X.6 / O X+8.6
O X.7 / O X+8.7
O X.8 / O X+8.8
Definition
Input 1 of input group one
Input/output 1 of output group t w o
Ground / (digital-) GND
Input 2 of input group t w o
Output 1 of output group one
Load operating voltage
Digsyplus operating voltage
Digsyplus operating voltage
06.81
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
11.04.

50
0V (GND)
Ground / (digital-) GND
NOTE:
X = slot-dependent
Slot 1 X = 1
Slot 2 X = 3
Slot 3 X = 5
X means:
e.g.: I1.1 to I1.8
e.g.: I3.1 to I3.8
e.g.: O5.1 to O5.8 etc.
Module installation or exchange
Break the blanking plate of the

corresponding slot of teh SUB-Dconnector-opening out of the connector
sheet metal.
Fasten the connector sheet metal with

screws th the housing.
Bring the system to ist regular starting

position (for safety reasons).
Switch off the system.
Loosen the plug connector screws.
Screwfasten the PE connecting cable.
Check wether the plug connectors are

marked with reference to the module slot.
Plug in the plug connector.
Pull out the plug connector.
Compare the plug connector with the slot

marking.
Srew off the PE-conductor.
Screw-fasten the plug connector.
Put the system into operation and check

function.
After removing the four Philips screws

detach the connector sheet metal.
After adjusting the necessary jumpers and

addresses plug the module into an
unassigned kodule slot. The bus plug
connector must be free of damage and
has to be snapped into the socket
connector of the bus-PCB by exerting a
little pressure.
The module must be sngly and flush in the

guiding grooves of the housing.
Screw-fasten the possibly available

cooling rail to the housing.
Insert the module designation label from

below into the groove of the front plater
underneath the transparent sprip. Possibly
attach a new connector marking.
06.81
06.81
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
12.04.
06.82 1/3 PLC-system CPU - module

Voltage range
Light emitting diodes

5V LED
14V 36V without limitation of the max.

current consumption of 4A from the +5V
logic voltage.
For safety reasons in the case of voltage
dips below 18V the 2A-outputs will be
switched off and the respective shortcircuit flag (KSM) will be set.
The voltage +24VCPU is monitored on the
CPUoutdoor.
DB16.1
set
14V
reset
16.5V
+24V CPU
LED
5V-LED
green
5V-LED
red
5V-LED
not
illuminated
EFFECTS
voltage
alright
CPU has
stopped
(reset) DIAGLED red
CPU has
stopped
(exept whenn
LED is
defective)
REASON
REMEDY
supply
< 4.65V
check
+24V-supply
if not *)
supply
missing
check
+24V-supply
replace
fuse S1
fuse S1
defective
*)
LED defective
(if DIAG-LED
is illuminated)
*)
Fuse
other
TR5/2.5AT IEC 127-3
5V-LED
flashing
red/green
Messrs. Wickmann
Annenstrae 113
D-58463 Witten
cyclic
restarts
watchdog
reacts
*)
red/orange
Current consumption of the +5V of the

CPU-module
permanent
component
*)
reset
defect
*) = return device (DIGSY) to manufacturer to have it checked.
approx. 220mA
06.82
06.82
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
12.04.

DIAG LED
LED
DIAG-LED
green
EFFECTS
programm is
executed
programm
status
unchanged
DIAG-LED
orange
DIAG-LED
red
DIAG-LED
not
illuminated
program is not
executed
program is not
executed
(exept if LED
is defective)
REASON
REMEDY
Temperature
in housing
too high
external
cooling
+24V CPU >

14V
increase
voltage
accumulator/b
attery voltage
too smal
charge
accumulator
or replace
battery
retentive
operands
deleted
(from
firmware 2.0
on)
check
connection of
backup
source
DIGSY in wait
loop after
voltage ON
wait
Programm
download
mode
EEPROM not
initialized
finish
programm
download
initialize
EEPROM
EEPROM or
RAM error
initialize if
error still
exists *)
start
program
stopped
no programm
load
otherwise
programm
LED is
defective
*)
receive
message on
DIAG-LED
SP
flashing
program
(programming
status
interface) or
colour
unchanged
SK
depends on
(communicatio
status
n interface)
correct
*) = return device (DIGSY) to manufacturer to have it checked.
06.82
06.82
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
12.04.

Component mounting diagram CPU-DIGSYoutdoor
NOTE:
Settings for TEREX-PEINER standard: underlined.
06.82
06.82
PEINER
TOWER
CRANES
Operating manual
SK / SN / SMK / SMH / SKC / TT
3.1 / 00
07.05.
07.01 1/2 General notes to maintenance

Symbols:
The symbols in the lubrication schedule
denote the type of lubrication in the lube points
requiring careful lubrication at regular
intervals. Proper lubrication prevents
unscheduled downtime and premature wear.
Carefully clean all tube nipples prior to
greasing and all oil drain plugs prior to
opening. Grease all bolts, pins and studs
affected by erection and assembly work.
Slewing bearing:
The slewing ring has the crane's most highly
stressed bearing and the shortest lubrication
interval and requires particularly conscientious
maintenance.
Anti-friction bearings:
The installed anti-friction bearings are lowmaintenance types.
Bearing lubrication:
Do not overgrease the bearings, since this
could lead to excessive in-service heat
generation.
Bearings without nipples:
All bearings without grease nipples are
maintenance-free. For each major
maintenance inspection (two-year intervals),
however, the bearings must be removed,
cleaned and coated with a suitable lubricant.
! Attention
The crane must always be shut down prior
to commencing with any repair work.
Oiling:
All guides on overload protection devices,
gearbox supports, brakes and limit-switch
rollers must be lubricated with al light oil to
keep them running smoothly. All fasteners, the
mating surfaces of which have been separated
for repair work, must be treated with a suitable
corrosion inhibitor prior to reassembly.
Intervals:
The lubricating intervals stated in the
lubrication schedule apply to normal operating
conditions and may hace to be shortened if
the crane is working under extreme conditions,
the goal being to maintain the crane's full
operational readness.
Clutch and brake maintenance
The following information does not give
specific adjustement needed for a particular
brake or clutch, but rather general information
which applies to all brakes and clutches.
Replacing linings
Brake and clutch linings should be examined
priodically for wear. Replace them before they
become thi enough to permit the rivets to
score the brake or clutch drum. All brake and
clutch linings should be ordered from TEREX
PEINER GmbH to insure the proper type and
grade for satisfactory operation. After
replacing the lining and during reinstallation of
bands, care should be taken in centering the
band assembly on the brake or clutch surface
many brakes and clutches have washers to
be positioned on both sides of the band end
on the band pin.
Greasing:
Apply a coat of acid-free grease to all ropes,
chains and the slewing-ring teeth at regular
intervals.
07.01
07.01
PEINER
TOWER
CRANES
Operating manual
SK / SN / SMK / SMH / SKC / TT
3.1 / 00
07.05.
07.01 2/2 General notes to maintenance

Cleaning linings
If a clutch or brake fails to operate properly it
should be checked for adjustement and for the
presence of grease or foreign material on the
lining. Clean linings by the following
procedure:
!
Remove bands.
Scrape grease and foreign material off.
Thoroughly clean lining s with acetone or

M.E.K. (Methy-Ethyl-Ketone).
Clean surface the lining comes in contact

with (brake or clutch drum) with acetone
or M.E.K. (Do not use carbontetrachloride because of possible
personal physical damage).
Replace linings lubricate (as stated

below) band end pins and center linings
with washers if necessary.
New brake or clutch linings must be

broken in by slipping a load through them
to heat up the lining. Slip a load through
the brakes to keep the lining heated for a
period of two hours. Avoid overheating
the drum as this may glaze it.
CAUTION
Do not over oil pins because the oil will
spread and get on the linings.
If a brake or clutch squeaks when first applied,
a thin layer of grease on the end of the
setscrew may correct this.
Lubrication pins and setscrews

All pivot pins should be lubricated and free
from bind. On rotating clutches and brakes the
pins should be removed and coated with a thin
layer of grease. If time does not permit this,
carefully lubricate pins with a few drops of oil.
07.01
07.01
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
2.2 / 00
06.06.
07.02 1/1 Oil-change intervalls

1st oil change afer 50 operating hours and each subsequent
Hoist gear (PU 15 and PU 24)
5000 operating haurs, of after each year of operation,

whichever comes first.
Depending on working conditions and gearbox operating
Hoist gear (range transmission)
temperature:
Luffing gear
Change oil after the first 300 600 operating hours and each
Crane gear
subsequent 1500 5000 operating hours, or after each 18

months of service, whichever comes first.
Trolley gear (only SK 56, 86, 206/1)
Change oil after each 10000 operating hours or 2 years of

service, whichever comes first.
Change oil after the first 50 operating hours and each
Trolley gear
subsequent 5000 operating hours, or each year of service,
Slewing gear
whichever comes first.
Pressure-oil pumps
Change oil after the first 200 operating hours and at least
once yearly there after.
Hydraulic system
Change oil after each 1000 operating hours or every two

years of service, whichever comes first.
07.02
07.02
PEINER
TOWER
CRANES
SK, SN
Operating manual
!
1.1 / 99
27.01.
07.03 1/2 Lubricant recommendation

An appropriate lubrication is of particular importance for the operating safety and service life of
TEREX PEINER cranes. The correct use of the selected lubrications which are the most suited
permits the achievement of maximum performances and the avoidance of failures and their effects.
To assist our customers, we have prepared a table of lubricants which have proved to be most
suitable for the lubrication of our cranes. Only if these lubricants or some which have proved to be
equivalent are used we are able to gurantee a perfect operation of our cranes.
In countries where an arctic or tropical climate prevails, the lubricants are to be selected in
accordance with the specific climatic conditions.
Lubricating points
S1
Spur gears, planetary gears
S1
Worm gears
Antifriction and friction bearings of the rope
sheaves, running wheels, drum bearings, chain
drives, chain wheels, slewing rings, jib pivot
points, lubricating nipples at the gears, drive
shaft axles, motors and generators, general
grease lubricating points
Friction bearings of the travel bogie, central
pivot, cross-beam and bridge bearings, rope
and chain suspensions, load hook yokes, brake
linkage, jib pivot points
Exposed toothed wheels of the slewing ring,
running whel drives, tansmissions, wire ropes,
load chains
S2
S3
S4
Lubricants
EP-gear oil
Lithium based
grease
NLGI-consistency 2
Lithium based
grease with
molybdenum
disulfide
NLGI-consistency 2
Adhesive
lubricant
More than
2
225 mm /s (cST)/100C
10 mm /s (cST)/40C
2
[9 mm /s (cSt)/50C]
2
22 mm /s (cST)/40C
2
[16 mm /s (cSt)/50C]
2
10 mm /s (cST)/40C
2
[9 mm /s (cSt)/50C]
SAE J 1703 C
or
FMVSS 166 DOT 3
S5
Joints and guides at switches and contacts
Low-viscous
lubricating oil
B6
Hydraulic units as e.g. luffing gear, climbing

device
EP-gear oil
B7
Pressure oil pump, Turbo-coupling
Hydraulic oil
B8
Hydraulic slewing gear brake, foot operation
07.03
Specification
2
220 mm /s (cST)/40C
2
[114 mm /s (cSt)/50C]
or
MIL-L-2105, SAE 90
2
460 mm /s (cST)/40C
Brake fluid
07.03
PEINER
TOWER
CRANES
SK, SN
Operating manual
!
1.1 / 99
27.01.
07.03 2/2 Lubricant recommendation

For further inquiries, please contact our company or the technical services of the respectitive mineral
oil company.
The following companies maintain a technical service whose employees shall be glad to render
assistance on all problems connected with proper lubrication of all machine parts.
Agip Deutschland AG, Mnchen

Agip companies all over the world
Aral AG, Bochum
Agencies of Aral AG in European countries
Avia Minerall AG, Mnchen
Avia-companies in serveral European countries
BP Oiltech GmbH
BP companies all over the world
Dea Minerall AG
Dea marketing companies and partners in Europe
Elf Minerall GmbH, Dsseldorf
Elf companies all over the world
Esso AG, Hamburg
Esso companies all over the world
Fina Deutschland GmbH, Frankfurt am Main
Petrofina and Fina companies all over the world
Mobil Oil AG, Hamburg
Mobil Oil companies all over the world
Deutsche Shell AG, Hamburg
Shell companies all over the world
07.03
07.03
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK
001
2.2 / 99
27.01.
07.04 1/1 Lubrication schedule

The lubrication schedule shows the time
intervals for the lubrication of special crane
components, which is necessary to guarantee
a safe crane operation.
Lubrication interval
Lube point(s)
Bearings of the wheel (crane travelling

mechanism)
S2
S4
Gear ring at the wheels of the crane travelling

mechanism
Slewing ring teeth
Antifriction bearing of the slewing ring
5
6
Every two weeks
Every six weeks
7
8
9
Every 500 hours

(every 2-3 month)
All listed lube points must generally lubricated

just before, during or right after crane erection.
No.
2
weekly
Note:
Lubricat
Bearings of the running and guiding wheels at

the trolley (if not greased for life!)
Axle fo the moving pulley *
Fixed pivots at the bogies (crane travelling
mecanism)
Pinion shaft bearing (crane travelling
mecanism)
Drive shaft axle slewing gear
S2
Important notes
Adhesive lubricat
! chapter lubrication and
maintenance
"Slewing
ring (...)"
S3
10
Antifriction bearings and transmissions
11
12
Rope pulleys (if not greased for life!)

Axial bearing of the block assembly
S2
13
Traverse of the block assembly **
S3
14
Bearings at movable struts
15
Shackle toogle joint hydraulic cylinder
16
All pins ***
S2
17
All ropes
S4
18
All joints and guides
S5
At least once a year
As necessary to
ensure smooth
running
*
**
***
valid only for SK 56,86,405,575

valid only for SK 315,405,575
If suspensionropes instead of
suspension bars are present at the
crane, then only lubricate the pins at
both ends of the suspension ropes.
07.04
S3
Adhesive lubricat
Plain bearing grease

(grease gun)
Antifriction bearing grease
(grease gun)
Grease (bulk) open lube points
Thin-bodied oil
07.04
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
Operating manual
SK / SN / SMK
1.1 / 00
27.03.
07.05 1/2 Maintenance of bearings

Keep Bearings Clean:
More than 90% of bearing failures are due to
dirt which has been allowed to get into the
bearing. When new bearings are received, do
not remove thern from the wrapper until the
moment when they are to be installed. Use
clean hands and clean tools and plent:y of
clean rags, not waste. Waste has lint and short
strands which may get into a bearing. If it is
necessary to leave a bearing partially
assembled for some time, it rnust be
thoroughly covered with clean rags or
newspaper.
Do not wash the lubricant out of a new bearing
unless absolutely necessary. If it is necessary
to wash a new or used bearing, use a clean
pail and clean kerosene. If the bearing has
been used and is very dirty, two or more clean
baths rnay be necessary. Dip the bearing into
the kerosene and spin Lt slowly. Blow it dry
with an air hose and oil it immediately to
prevent corrosion.
Bearing removal
Housing and bearing seats are made to the
proper sizes at the factory. These seats should
not be relieved at assernbly to obtain an easier
fit, since the tight fits used are necessary for
satisfactory bearing life. Loosening the fits will
seriously shorten the bearing's life.
It is much more difficult to rernove a bearing
than to install one. Do not use a hammer and
cold chisel, because the heavy blows will
cause the balls to dent the race grooves, and
the force applied at one side of the race may
crack it. Do not pull a bearing inner race by
applying force to the outer race unless it is
absolutely necessary.
07.05
lf there is no other way, be careful to keep the

load on the outer race square and steady. Use
a bearing puller or place the assembly in a
press. Obtain pressure on the full
circurnference of the race whenever possible
by using a pipe, split ring or circular type puller.
Selfaligning type bearings should never be
pulled by pressure on the outer race, and
bearings having a shallow shoulder on one
side should never be pulled by pressure on the
shallow side.
If a bearing is to be used again, it must be kept
absolutely clean during removal. After rernoval,
it should be inspected for nicked or dented
races or cracked ball or roller cages. Damaged
bearings should never be reinstalled, since
they may fail quickly.
Bearing installation
Do not attempt to dress a bearing seat with
ernery cloth, since such a practice will reduce
the shaft diameter and will destroy the
roundness of the seat. Rernove all burrs on the
shaft shoulder and clean all parts thoroughly.
Start the bearing squarely on its seat and force
it horne with a press or a dr-Lft pipe and
hamrner. Use pressure only on the inner race
when installing bearings on the shaft seat. Do
not use a hammer and cold chisel, since the
sharp blows will tend to dent the bearing races
and the force applied only at a single point will
cock the race in its seat and may crack it.
07.05
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
Operating manual
SK / SN / SMK
1.1 / 00
27.03.
07.05 2/2 Maintenance of bearings

Bearings may be assernbled by heating them
in oil. This rnethod, however, is not
recommended, since the bearings may be
overheated and softened, and it is very difficult
to keep the heating oil and bearings clean. If
this method is used, the oil should never be
heated above 107 C (225' F). and the
bearings should never be allowed to rest on the
bottom of the oil tank. They would then become
dirty and may be overheated if in contact with
the tank bottom. Support the bearings on
hooks or racks, or on a screen held some
distance from the bottorn. Keep the oil tank
covered.
Bearing check after installation
Be sure that the bearing bottoms against the
shaft spacer or shoulder at all points. This may
be checked by seeing if a light will penetrate
between the bearing and shoulder or spacer.
Make sure that the outer race is free on the
inner race. If the bearing is too tight, it will bind
and fail early. Check to rnake sure that the
bearing is clean. Check to make sure that all
lock nuts are as tight as possible, and that all
spacers, etc. are firrnly in place.
07.05
07.05
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.3 / 00
06.06.
07.06 1/1 Maintenance schedule

Time interval
daily
after 50 h
each 50 - 100 h
after 100 h
after 200 h
Component
hoist / slewing / crane travel gearing /
trolley travel gearing or luffing gearing
climbing hydraulic system:
before each climbing operation
pressure-oil pumps
brakes
all threaded connections
gearbox vent filters
oil filters
Operation
check oil level
check brake linings

retorque
check
replace
all control-box terminals
check for good seating

tighten as necessary

vent filters
clean (at least every 2 years)
after 1000 h
check for good seating,

(at least once a year)
every 6 weeks
guides and rollers of emergency stop switches clean, grease lightly
gearbox vent filters
every 3 month
slipring, collectors, brushes and brush holders check, clean
on motors
check for erosion,
contactor and switch contacs
every 6 month
slipring assemblies: slipring races
clean
slipring assemblies: brush holder hinges
lubricate lightly with acid-free oil
yoke / rope station, thrust bearings
check
hook and hook nuts as per DIN 15 405
once a year
visual inspection;
cables and wiring
replace as necessary
every 2 years
anti-friction bearings on motors and generators
extract and test
(major overhaul) anti-friction bearings on eddy current brake
Retighten all threaded connections from time
bolts to 1000 Nm / 738 ft lbs. Discard all flawed
to time, particulary within a short time following
bolts. Then, inspect all slewing-ring bolts and
initial commisioning on the crane. Using a
replace as necessary.
torque wrench, tighten all slewing-connection
all threaded connections
07.06
07.06
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK
3.2 / 99
27.01.
07.07 1/1 Motor maintenance

The antifriction bearings of the motors and
generators are factory-filled with grease that is
designed to last for some 4500 hours of
normal operationNonetheless the bearings
should be inspected at two-year intervals. To
that effect, the motor/generator must be
dismantled and the windings, etc. cleaned.
Thoroughly wash the bearings with
gasoline/petrol or benzene. Give the washing
fluid time to evaporate prior to filling the
bearings with roller bearing grease.
To keep the bearings from running hot as

a result of overgreasing, fill the space
between the rollers and races only halffull of grease. Also, apply a coat of grease
to the shaft seals in the covers.
The larger motors and generators have
lube nipples and appropriate notes on
their nameplates.
The slip rings, collectors, brushes and
brush holders should be inspected at
least every three months, depending on
their frequency of use. Vacuum cleaning
may be necessary, depending on how
much carbon powder has accumulated.
Use a clean, lint-free cloth (wool) to wipe

the sliding surfaces clean.
Use no cleaning fluids.
Ensure that the slip rings and collectors

are smooth and clean.
The carbon brushes must move easily,

with full contact area and spring force
applied to the slip rings/collectors.
Worn brushes must be replaced with new

ones and ground down to the proper
curvature with emery cloth.
Heavy wear and scoring of collectors and

sparking brushes are frequently caused
by deficient maintenance. In any such
case, an authorized expert must be
consulted at once.
This applies as well to the cleaning of

heavily soiled machine interiors.
!Attention
The crane's power must be turned off for
all maintenance work.
07.07
07.07
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK / SN
2.1 / 99
27.01.
07.08 1/1 Eddy-current brake

The antifriction bearings of the eddy current
brake are self-contained with a factory fill of
lithium-saponified grease, which, as
experience shows, only need be renewed after
several years of operation under normal
conditions.
The regreasing interval is approximately 5.500
6.000 operating hours. Under normal service
conditions, regreasing should not be
necessary between the biennial overhauls, at
which times the bearings are removed and
inspected. This entails dismantling the eddy
current brake and cleaning ist various parts,
including the winding. Thoroughly wash the
bearings with benzine / petroleum ether or
benzene.
Give the solvent time to evaporate before
filling the bearings with lithium-base roller
bearing grease (drop point at least 180 C /
356 F).
To keep the bearings from running hot as a
result of overgreasing, completely fill the
space between the rollers and the races with
grease, but fill the grease cavities themselves
only half-full. Also coat the shaft seals in the
bearing caps. If the regreasing interval expires
prior to the overhaul, grease the nipples while
they are running.
07.08
07.08
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
Slewing ring
3.2 / 99
27.01.
07.09 1/3 Slewing ring maintenance, lubrication and storage

For the slewing ring, use only acid-free, resinfree roller bearing grease , as listed in the
lubrication recommendation for TEREX PEINER
cranes. Press roller bearing grease into all
nipples on the slewing ring with the aid of a
grease gun. Then turn the crane approximately
15 degrees and press in more grease. Repeat
the procedure tour or five times, i.e., until grease
emerges through the bearing gap all around the
slewing ring. The resultant collar of grease
serves as and must be left intact. Refer to the
lubrication schedule for greasing intervals, and
grease after any prolonged period of stoppage.
As soon as any bare spots appear an the teeth
of the slewing gear, regrease without delay. lf
slewing is restricted to a confined range of, say 0
- 90 degrees. Turn the slewing gear every 6
months to a year, depending on the crane's
normal working load and range.
Accelerated lubrication intervals:
Lubricate more frequently for service in a

tropical climate, under high humidity, in
dusty, dirty areas, for high temperature
variation and in continuous-slewing
situations.
When cleaning the slewing ring, ensure that

no water gets into the race. Always apply
ampie grease afterwards.
07.09
07.09
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
Slewing ring
3.2 / 99
27.01.

Important factor for the service life of the gearing
and the bearing race.
Lubricant properties
Two types of grease are used for lubricating
slewing connections - each for a specific
purpose.
FOR THE BEARING RACE:
Grease with lithium- and lead-base thickeners
high stability
normal service temperature (-30C to
120C)
worked penetration up to 250C as per
ASTM D 217
new
269
after 10 000 cycles
284
drop point as per ASTM D 566
187C
viscosity at 50C (of basic oil)

110 cSt
Timken test (OK load in lbs) higher than 50
FOR THE GEARING:

High-pressure grease
viscosity (BTRA) at 25C
at least 1 00 cSt
- viscosity (Engler) at 50C

1.65 E
BEARING RACE:
Throughout Europe, bearing races are lubricated
via oil holes with 1O x 1 mm or 6 x 1 mm
threads, in both cases suitable for:
central lubrication (6 or 8 mm tube) as per
DIN 2391
point lubrication by means of nipples with
spherical, straight or crowned heads (DIN

3410)
Whenever the slewing connection is greased, it
must be turned and regressed several times in
succession.
STANDARD SLEWING CONNECTIONS:
Such slewing connections are factory-lubricated
with Esso Beacon EP2 grease.
Long-time lubrication: We recommend the use of
special-purpose grease; please contact our
sales and customer services organization.
07.09
The types of grease recommended for longterm lubrication - equating to =1 800 hours or
more - must be appropriate to the case at
hand, as discussed with our developmental
department.
Frequently recommended types:
Kluber
Isoflex NBU 15
Isoflex NB 52
Structovis PN 600 MF
GEARING:
Depending on the given service conditions, we
recommend:
MOBIL DORCIA 30
for high-vibration situations, and
ESSO SURRET FLUID 30 F
for normal service conditions.
In either case, the gearing must be cleaned in
advance, especially the bases of the teeth. Our
corrosion inhibitor, however, is compatible with
the types of grease recommended for the
gearing.
A thinner may be used, but no other lubricant
should be substituted, unless it has the same
lubricating properties as the aforementioned
types of grease (cf. comparison table).
Brand
Bearing race
Antar
BP
Castrol
Elf
Esso
Fina
Igol
Epexa EP2
Energrease LS-EP2
Spheeral EP2
Elf EP2
Beacon EP2
Marson EPL2
Perfect
Kluber
Centoplex EP2
Labo
Mobil
Shell
Texaco
Total
Tribol
GS 2061
Mobilux EP2
Alvania EP2
Multifak EP2
Multiss EP22
Molub-Alloy
Gearing
Pebron engrenage 1401
GR 154 GS
Elnera 4900 x fluid
Surett fluid 30 F
Grafloscon CG 901
GrafloscorT AC SG 40
Dorcia 30
Cardiurn EP fluid H
Crater 2 x fluid
07.09
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
Slewing ring
3.2 / 99
27.01.

Handling and storage
Slewing connections are mechanical components
that require careful handling. Jolting and impact
shock, particularly in the radial direction, must be
avoided. Store slewing connections in a horizontal
position in a dry room. Standard packaging
ensures moisture protection for the first six
months.
07.09
07.09
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK / SN
3.2 / 99
27.01.
07.10 1/1 Steel structure
Immediately repair or replace any bent,

fractured or broken parts/components.
To the extent that repair welds on loadbearing components are not being
performed by the manufacturer, a welding
engineer in the manufacturer's employ or
an expert from the Technical lnspectorate
must be consulted prior to commencing
with the work.
The factory-attached labels show the

respective subject numbers.
Inspection and maintenance of paintwork
In connection with the prescribed

structural steelwork inspections, the
condition of the paintwork should also be
checked. In particular, the primer coat
should not show through, and the paint
should not be cracked, worn down,
blistered, flaky, chalky or rusty (visible or
concealed).
Rust should be assessed in accordance

with DIN 53 210 "Designation of Degree
of Rusting of Paint Surfaces".
Maintenance and repair of painted
surfaces is subject to DIN 55 928,
sections 3 and 4.
07.10
07.10
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK, SN
2.2 / 99
27.01.
07.11 1/1 Monitoring of forged load hooks

Lifting hooks as per DIN 15405, part 1
The markings on forged lifting hooks must

comply with DIN 15404, part 1 (3/79
edition), section 4.7. The markings must
agree with the test certificate, as
necessary, in accordance with DIN
15404, part 1. At the same time,
dimension y or y1 and y2 across the
mouth of the hook (no. 6 hooks and
larger) must be checked with slide- gauge
accuracy as per DIN 15401 and/or 2 DIN
15402, sheet 2.
For drop-forged lifting hooks as per DIN

15401, sheet 1 and 2, and DIN 15402
sheets 1 and 2, up to and including no. 5
hooks, visual inspection and checking of
the hookmouth width will suffice. If the
mouth of the hook is more than 10 %
wider than the maximum permissible
width a2 (DIN 15401 and DIN 15402
sheet 1), the hook must be replaced. The
same applies to any deformation of 10 %
or more in relation to the initial dimension
of y, y1 or y2.
DIN 15405, part 1, section 5, specifies

further inspections for superficial cracks,
wear and corrosion.
The hook in general, in particular its

mouth and shaft, should be inspected for
deformation and wear at least once a year
or more frequently if required.
07.11
1
2
Identification
Demension "y" or "y1" and "y2" for
hammer-forged lifting hooks
07.11
comp. 2 - c:\eigene dateien\betriebsanleitungen\sprache\englisch\gruppe\sk_sn\kp07\kp0711.doc
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
1.1 / 00
25.02.
07.12 1/8 FN slewing gear

Commissioning
Insulating resistance test
The insulating resistance of the winding
against mass as well of the wound parts in
relation to one another must be measured prior
to commissioning or to re-commissioning after
lengthy storage periods and must comply with
the regulations in force in accordance with use.
Test voltage: 1000 V (DC).
The minimum requirement for operating
readiness is 300 MOhm, referring to a 20 C
winding temperature.
Clean, dry windings show a multiple of the
indicated limit values. For comparison
purposes: smaller motors must show higher
values than large motors, owing to shorter
creep distances.
The measuring of the insulating resistance
should be carried out while the motor is
disconnected; the motor and the interior of the
terminal box must be clean.
For larger rotary current induction motors, the
polarisation index (PI) can be used for further
assessment of the winding insulation. The
insulating resistance or the loading power is
measured after one minute and again after 10
minutes. The 10-minute value is then divided
by the one-minute value. The result should
come to 1.5 at least.
The subsequent drying process can be

completed e.g. by means of winding heating
using direct current (e.g. welding motorgenerator). During the process, the electric
power may not exceed half the winding
nominal current and the winding temperature
must be permanently supervised in
accordance with the relevant insulation
material category (possibly on the basis of the
measurement of the copper-resistance
increase).
The winding phases will need to be changed
from time to time!
For the subsequent drying of short circuit rotor
motors, the use of rotary current feed with
correspondingly reduced voltage (approx. 5 to
6% of the machine nominal voltage) with
locked rotor is also possible. This procedure
could cause problems owing to inductive
additional heating where welding rings with
winding steel bands are involved. It is also
imperative that the forming of power transition
indentations on the rings be prevented while
the rotor is inactive!
Closed construction shapes must be opened
by removal of possible coolers or at least in the
area of service traps, air gap measurement
openings, clamping plates or blind covers, in
order to allow for air exchange (if necessary,
blow dry air through).
CAUTION!
If the indicated limit values of the insulating
resistance fall short owing to humidity, careful
subsequent drying of the winding should be
performed only after consultation with the
TEREX PEINER Service team!
07.12
07.12
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
1.1 / 00
25.02.

PTC resistor temperature sensor
Smoothness of running
With rotary current induction motors with

thermal winding protection by means of
resistors, special attention must be paid to the
drying temperature that needs to be below the
authorised temperature of the relevant
insulating category of the motor. PTC resistors
may only be tested applying a measuring
voltage of less than 2.5 V (DC).
The rotary current induction motors have been

tested with regard to smoothness of running
prior to delivery. Should inexplicable vibrations
occur, however, the motor must be uncoupled
from the working machine and be started again
to determine the cause of the vibrations.
PT 100 platinum measuring resistances

Pt 100 measuring resistances (100 Ohm at 0
C), in conjunction with the test amplifiers and
display units that are gauged accordingly, allow
for correct winding thermometry. Monitoring is
also possible by means of a resistance bridge
or an ohmmeter with low holding-wire current
(resistance alteration = 0.385 Ohm/K, i.e.
138.5 Ohm measured e.g. = winding
temperature of 100 C).
Initial commissioning
WARNING
Prior to initial commissioning of the motor,
please read operating and maintenance
instructions carefully !
Prior to commissioning, turn the rotor by hand
and listen to hear whether any unusual noises
can be heard.
The motor be kept running, to begin with, for
approximately one hour in unloaded state, i.e.
uncoupled from the working machine. Correct
running is given when no unacceptable
vibrations or irregular bearing noises are noted.
07.12
If the running smoothness remains

unsatisfactory, the cause could be a different
balancing level of the components (coupling,
pulley etc.) or the proper sequence of the
fundament is located too near the motor
revolving frequency. Experience has shown
that proper frequency problems as a rule arise
only with 2-pole motors. In order to check the
kinetic quality of the motor alone, it must be run
without composite parts and with the indicated
kinetic agreement (agreement: "full gauge
spring", "half gauge spring" "without gauge
spring"), on neutral underlay (e.g. rubber mats
or vibrating metals), and the vibrating speeds
(mm/sec) measured.
Motors in coupling operation, i.e. with reduced
radial load, show unexpected vibrations
regardless of correct balancing. One reason
might be a "jumping" of the rotor owing to
increased storage air. Where bearings with
reduced storage air are involved, these
problems can be solved.
For motors with 2-groove ball bearings, the
movable bearing should be pre-stressed (e.g.
by means of disk springs).
07.12
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
1.1 / 00
25.02.

Bearing noises
Electric wiring
Tapping or knocking noises emerging from the

bearing chambers indicate bearing damages.
Bearing damages can arise from shipping,
extensive storage periods etc. Screeching
noises indicate skidding rollers inside the
cylinder roller bearings. The cause could be a
lubrication film that has not yet been fully built
up (occasionally observed while roller bearings
are unloaded).
CAUTION!
In addition to a sonar rod or a stethoscope for

subjective assessment by an expert, portable
SPM 43 A or T 2000 testing devices can be
used for bearing tests.
For any and all running noises, the differing
design types of the motor casing must be
taken into account with regard to loudness.
(Cast casings always seem to be quieter than
welded steel structures with tube coolers, for
example.).
Lubrication
The lubrication and maintenance instructions
are to be strictly observed !
Anti-friction bearings are provided, prior to
delivery, with the required amount of lubricants
for initial lubrication.
The temperature of the anti-friction bearings
may exceed the ambient temperature of 40 C
by up to 50 K, higher temperatures may be
acceptable, but are subject to certain
conditions.
07.12
Please compare the mains and desired

operating data with the specifications on the
motor rating plate !
NOTE THE WIRING MODE!
As regards admissible voltage fluctuations, the
DIN VDE 0530 standard is applicable to
electric machines; it is harmonised with the
IEC 34-1 and standardises a tolerance of 5
%. The reference value is the nominal voltage
indicated on the rating plate.
The data on the rating plate relate to (with
tolerances) a maximum ambient temperature
of 40 C, unless otherwise specified, with a
maximum set-up altitude of 1000 m above sea
level.
The connection must be performed using
cables conforming to regulations, in expert
fashion and in accordance with the local set-up
regulations.
All connecting clamps must be firmly tightened,
as otherwise strong warming-up and
subsequent destruction of the insulating
material may be expected.
Connections of possible temperature
monitoring devices (Pt 100- measuring
resistances, PTC-resistors, bi-metallic
temperature monitors) for winding and
bearings as well as for out-of-service heating
etc. are either located in an additional auxiliary
terminal box or in the master terminal box,
inclusive of wiring diagram and technical data.
The use of these appliances is required for
operating safety purposes.
07.12
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
1.1 / 00
25.02.

For the grounding of casings, the terminal
points are either located inside the terminal box
or below, on the motor pedestal.
In order to prevent damages caused by wrong
connections that might turn out to be serious,
please get in touch with us as necessary.
The wiring diagram inside the cover of the
terminal box must be observed. Special care is
required with motors that are voltage- or polechanging.
Where star/delta starting is involved, the
change-over time relay must be adjusted so
that the relaying star to delta switching occurs
only after the tilting moment has been
exceeded (after fade of the star starting
power). Only in exceptional cases can differing
conditions be scheduled after discussion and
testing of the run-up period (e.g. with ventilated
drives with higher mass number).
Furthermore, the thermal circuit breakers must
grasp the winding lane current in the delta
connections between motor and switch
(contactor) where start switching of rotary
current induction motors with short-circuit rotor
are involved; they must therefore be adjusted
to the lower star power (=0.577 x motor
nominal current).
Where motors are suitable for only one

direction, because of direction of rotation
dependent ventilators or external ventilators, an
appropriate identification in the form of a
direction arrow is affixed to the motor casing
or to the ventilator cap. An opposite direction is
unacceptable, as overheating caused by the
lack of cooling air would occur. In such an
event change of direction can be carried out
only by means of new or modified ventilators,
re-balancing of the rotor will probably also be
required !
WARNING
Voltage and revolving machine elements

mean danger to life !
Inexpert set-up, operation and
maintenance lead to material damage and
personal injury!
Connecting must be performed in
accordance with national regulations !
Prior to commissioning, all supervisory
and protective equipment must be
completely mounted and checked to see
that it functions !
The electric motor may be operated only in
compliance of rating plate indications !
Cooling must be reliably guaranteed during
the entire operating time!
Casing temperature increase during
operation can cause burning !
Easily inflammable materials must be kept
away from the machine !
For the line-side motor protection, a switching

device must be used in conjunction with a
short-circuit fast release designed for the
motor and the thermal releases adapted to the
winding nominal power.
If the connection of the net phases L1 L2 L3

(RST) to the motor clamps U1 V1 W1 is in the
same direction, the motor shaft will revolve in
right-hand direction viewed from the outside
toward the shaft bolt (revolving in clock-wise
direction). If left-hand revolving is desired, two
phases have to be exchanged.
If the machine is re-commissioned after

extensive idle periods, the process is the same
as under item 7.1 Insulating resistance test
and item 7.2 Initial commissioning.
07.12
Re-commissioning
07.12
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
1.1 / 00
25.02.

Switching-on
Maintenance and inspection
The electric wiring of the motor must be such

that the switch-on can be operated only via
deliberate activation of a command device
expressly provided. Upon direct switch-on, the
safety equipment must be applied so that upon
switching all external conductors are
disconnected.
Any danger to persons must be excluded in
accordance with DIN EN 292.
The maintenance concerns mainly the bearing

materials, the insulating materials and the
cleaning in conformity with operating
conditions.
For this purpose, our lubrication and
maintenance instructions for anti-friction
bearings as well as the notes contained in the
specific set-up, operating and maintenance
instructions are to be observed.
Overload release protective device
Cleaning
Placing an unacceptably high power load on

the motor is prohibited!
Depending on power, retarding releases or
relays must be adjusted to the motor nominal
power. Furthermore, they must be so selected
that the motor is thermally protected even in
the event of a short-circuit (i.e. with locked
rotor). This requirement is assumed as
complied with if the release period that can be
seen from the release characteristic curve
(starting temperature 20 C) for the ratio IA/IN
does not exceed the heating time tE indicated
for the relevant temperature brackets.
The cleaning of dust deposits from motors

should be performed with a vacuum cleaner or
bellows. In no circumstances may
compressed air containing oil or water be
used.
Temperature monitoring
Upon client request, temperature monitoring
can be ensured by means of PTC resistors
(according to DIN 44081 or 44082), bi-metallic
temperature monitors (according to VDE 0631)
or Pt 100 platinum measuring resistances
(according to DIN IEC 751).
It is imperative that dirt be prevented from

being blown inside the motors.
Motors with tube coolers require special care
so that no dirt can block up the tubes. The
tubes can be easily cleaned with a brush.
Motors that stand still for an extensive period
under extreme climatic conditions with an
ambient temperature exceeding 40 C and
relative air humidity exceeding 95%, can still be
commissioned provided their insulating
resistance is located slightly below the
restrictive value of 300 MOhm, and they are in
clean condition.
If the temperature monitoring consists of PTC

resistor temperature sensors, the motor is
identified by an adequate additional plate
"resistor temperature sensor").
07.12
07.12
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
1.1 / 00
25.02.

Outdoor operation
Where the motors are operated outdoors
without protective roof (possible only for
motors of IP 44 minimum protective type and in
normal climate), an increased maintenance
effort is required, particularly where extensive
standstill periods are involved.
The motors operated outdoors should be taken
into operation at least one hour per month to
limit corrosion risk from condensation and
precipitation. Where motors stand still during
winter time, blocking of the external ventilator
by snow and ice must be prevented.
WARNING
Inexpert maintenance leads to material
damage and personal injury !
All work with the motor, excepted for relubrication, may be performed only during
out-of-service periods, in a disconnected
state and protected from inadvertent
switching-on.
Assembly and maintenance activities as
well as operation may be performed only by
specially trained staff !
The operating and maintenance instructions
are to be observed.
Lubrication and maintenance instructions
for anti-friction bearings
General
Anti-friction bearings are precision parts.
Appropriate lubrication is imperative to ensure
long operation.
A low-vibration run and keeping to the relevant
admitted loading capacities are a must for a
long working life.
07.12
The proper lubrication type as indicated on the

index plates for re-lubrication is a must. This
will avoid damages to the bearings owing to
use of wrong lubricants .
The indicated lubrication intervals must be
observed; excessive lubrication of the bearings
can entail damages.
Unfavourable operating conditions could make
corrections to the lubrication instructions
necessary - if required, please consult us.
CAUTION!
The bearing grease loses its good lubricating
features when the machine has been
inoperative for some time, under unfavourable
conditions and environmental influences!
Motors without re-lubrication device
As a rule, the initial lubrication will do for the
entire service life of the designed bearings, as
motors without re-lubrication equipment are
provided with a for life lubrication, i.e. the
usable life of the grease exceeds the durability
of the bearings.
The for life lubricated bearings are filled with
appropriate grease ex works for 30% to 40% of
the available space..
A change of grease or an exchange of
bearings where bearings with face-and-back
sealing discs are concerned, is required
where, owing to higher temperatures, influence
of pollution (water, aggressive media) or from
high dynamic-mechanical charges of grease
film on the functioning surfaces, the usable life
of the grease is considerably shorter than the
anticipated durability of the grease bearings.
07.12
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
1.1 / 00
25.02.

Should a new lubrication - also after extensive
down time - be required, the old grease must
be entirely removed, while the bearing cover
and the bearing must be washed carefully,
using petrol or cold cleaner. Then spread fresh
grease on roll bearings and fill both bearing
covers up to two thirds level grease.
A larger filling of grease causes inadmissible
heating of the anti-friction bearings and must
therefore be avoided in any events !
If possible, after the bearing covers have been
replaced, check the smooth running of the
motor by hand.
When re-commissioning is started, monitoring
the motor is recommended. Noises and
strongly increased heating suggest
malfunctions. A careful examination of the
procedure of re-lubrication must be undertaken
in this event.
Motors with re-lubrication device
At every lubrication point of the motors a relubrication index plate is mounted, specifying
the grease amount and the deadlines for relubrication. After re-lubricating three times, the
external bearing covers must be dismounted
and the old grease deposits removed from the
inside. The bearing covers are then fitted again
in cleaned and grease-free state.
After the bearing covers have been re-fitted,
please check the smooth running of the motor
by hand.
CAUTION!
Re-lubrication should always be carried out
while motor is running, if necessary, provide
lubricating pipe extensions. The pipes need to
be always filled with grease.
07.12
Motors with re-lubricating device and

automated grease volume governor
Re-lubrication should be carried out while the
motor is running. Re-lubrication index plates
are also installed for your information. The
grease collectors are identified by special note
plates.
An integrated centrifugal disk ejects the old
grease that has been pressed out of the antifriction bearings and that is then collected in a
chamber. The chamber is arranged in
conformity with the table below; it is emptied
after several re-lubrication processes in the
indicated manner. A check-up must be
performed after 2 to 3 hours.
CAUTION!
If an excessive grease volume is re-pressed in
one process, that could lead to considerable
bearing heating, as the excess amount of
grease will be ejected only after hours.
Arrangement of the
grease chamber
Grease chamber
below the ventilator
cap - drive-side
Grease chamber
below the external
bearing cover
Grease chamber
below the internal
bearing cover
Evacuating
procedure
Loosen screws,
remove grease
chamber, and empty
Horizontal tubes
below the ventilator
cap - drive-side
Unscrew both stoppers,

push out old grease
with a rod
Pull out slide, empty

chamber
Reach into the bearing
shield opening, pull out
slide, empty chamber
07.12
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
1.1 / 00
25.02.

Notes on re-lubrication
the lubricity of the greases is definitely impaired

by the mixing process.
A regular maintenance of the anti-friction
bearings in the outlined manner helps avoid
anti-friction bearing damages.
Prior and subsequent to every re-lubrication

process, make sure the motor is running
smoothly by applying a listening rod or a SPM
measuring device to it.
If the indicated grease or grease showing the
same soaping criteria is not available for
motors with re-lubrication device, the bearings
must be opened and the grease they contain
be completely removed. A cleaning and new
lubrication (as described in paragraph "motors
without re-lubrication device") must be
performed using a lubricant of equal quality.
A mixing of anti-friction bearing greases with
differing soaping criteria is not acceptable, as
Grease quantity and relubrication intervals

The lubrication and maintenance instructions
are to be stictly observed!
Motors with lubricating devices must be
lubricated at the set intervals using the
specified grade and quantity of grease. The
relevant details are stated on the plates next to
the lubricating points, or evident at lubrication
specification..
Motor-type
Bearing:
Grease:
FN132M4/WB4,5/
B/F
6309 DDU
6308 ZZ
6207 ZZ
-.
-
Re-lubrication
interval: [h]
-
Grease quantity:
[g]
-
8.4. Spare parts

In case rotating parts of the machine have
been exchanged, particularly of machines with
high revolving speed, a dynamic re-balancing
must be performed under observation of the
applied balancing agreement.
When ordering spare parts, the rating plate

data and the serial number of the motor must
be indicated, specifically the entire type
denomination inclusive of all additional letters
and figures. If a spare parts list is on hand, the
spare parts designation and their current
number according to list should be indicated.
50
46,70,80,81,90,91
151,206,207,208,209,210
20
120
07.12
60
52
140
138
150
135
130
20
46
50
51
60
70
80
81
90
91
120
130
135
138
140
150
151
206
207
208
209
flange bearing shield

terminal block
ball bearing
ball bearing
housing
terminal block
terminal box
box sealing
cover
cover sealing
ring
van
cover
ball bearing
WB-cover
brake
terminal block
terminal block
terminal box
box sealing
cover
210
cover sealing
07.12
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
1.1 / 00
23.02.
07.13 1/4 Brake for FN slewing gear size M60

Assembly Conditions
The eccentricity of the shaft end against

the fixing hole p.c.d. must not exceed 0,2
mm.
The positioning tolerance of the threads

for the cap screws (8) must not exceed
0,2 mm.
The deviation in the true running of the

screw-on surface to the shaft must not
exceed the permissible true running
tolerance acc. to the german DIN 42955.
Bigger deviations can cause a drop of the
torque, a confinuous grinding of the rotor (4)
and an overheating.
The fits from hub (1) and shaft are to be

selected in such a way that toeth of the hub
(1) are not distorted. A widening of the teeth
causes a clamping of the rotor (4) and hub
(1) and following a functional problem of the
brake. (recommended hub - shaft fit H7/k6).
The hub (1) must be brought into poshion in

such a way that the teeth of the rotor (4)
carries all-over.
Rotor (4) and braking surfaces must be free

of oil and grease.
Installation
1.1
Mount gear hub (1) to the shaft (observe

complete sur)porting lencith of the
kevwayll) and lock it axially, (e.g. with a
locking ring)
1.2
Push rotor (4) manually onto the gear hub

(1). Observe an easy going of the teeth.
No damage!
07.13
1
2
2.1
3
4
5
6
7
7.1
7.2
8
9
10
11
12
13
hub
coil carrier complete
coil
armature disk
rotor
flange plate
hand release complete
interlock device against wind complete
single stroke magnet
micro switch
cap screw
cap screw So
plug screw
thrust spring
O-ring
type tag
07.13
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
1.1 / 00
23.02.

1.3
Insert 0-rings (12) into the coil carrier (2)

and flange plate (5). No damage!
1.4
Attach brake at the bearing bracket of the

motor or at the machine wall via cap
screws (8) - tightening torque 22 Nm.
Actuation of the interlock device against

wind
Interlock clevice aciainst wind on:
(Attention! observe correct sequence in any
case)
-
Energise brake
Energise stroke magnet (7.1) (stroke
magnet attracts).
Micro switch (7.2) gives signal "on"
Brake de-energised
De-energise stroke magnet (7.1) (brake
remains released).
Interlock device against wind off:

-
Energise brake
Interlock device unlocked (by restoring
spring in stroke magnet 7.1)
Micro switch (7.2) gives signal "off"
Brake ready for operation again.
Braking torque adjustment

The M-brake is adjusted to the braking torque
requested in the order. The existing adjustment
can be changed via the cap screws (9).
Adjustment of the braking torque
The braking torque range is between 60 Nm
max. an 40 Nm min. (see diagramm).
The cap screws (9) should always be turned to
contact to be able to define a new adjustment.
The screws should be released by the number
of revolutions according to the desired
adjustment (see diagram).
07.13
07.13
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
1.1 / 00
23.02.

Electrical connection
The coil voltage is indicated on the type tag as
well as on the brake, too. The brakes are
designed acc. to Euro-voltage DIN IEC 38. For
the operation DC current is necessary which
can be generated via a transformer-rectifier or
half-wave/bridge connected rectifiers. The
switching can be made in the D.C. or A.C.
current sides. A faster connection time,
however, is obtained by a switching in the D.C.
side (engage of the brake).
Demonstration:
When switching-off electromagnetic units cutoffs may arise. These can cause a damage of
the unit and are to be damped, therefore. The
connectio times indicated in the catalogue can
be deteriorated due to this damping. A protection
of the voltage supply according to the current
values must be provided. The brakes are
designed for a relative switching-on period of 100
%.
Connection micro switch (7.2):
Switching behavior
max. DC voltage as
function of the current
load with silver contacts
and contact distance Ec=0.8 mm.
Wiring diagramm
Neutral position of a min.
switch without auxiliary
acuating part.
Nominal data for single stroke magnets (7.1):

Nominal A.A. voltage UN:
24 VDC
Relative switching-on period:
5 % ED
Power:
120 W
Maintenance:
M - brakes don't nearly require any maintenarice.
The friction lining, however, is a part which can
be worn down.
The friction lining pairing is robust and wear
resistant and allows a very long service life of the
brake. In case the rotor (4), however, is worn
due to a high total friction work and, therefore,
the function of the brake not guaranteed any
more, the brake can be brought again to its
original condition by an exchange of the rotor.
The wear condition of the rotor (4) is determined
by measuring of the release voltage. The release
voltage may only amount to max. 90 % of the
nominal voltage in case of a warm brake.
Exchange of the rotor (4):
Unscrew the brake from the motor bearing
bracket or from the machine wall for exchanging
the rotor (4).
4.1 Remove fixing screws (8).
4.2 Clean brake, remove abrasion by the aid of
air pressure..
4.3 Pull off rotor (4) from hub (1).
4.4 Check rotor thickness. The min. rotor
thickness 10.85 mm; the new rotor
thickness 11.15 mm. The min. rotor
thickness must not fall under these values.
4.5 Check rotor thickness of the new rotor (4).
_____: pure ohmic load

- - - - -: inductive load
07.13
07.13
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
1.1 / 00
23.02.

4.6 Push rotor (4) onto the hub (1) and check it
as to radial play. In case there is a
clearance in the toothing between hub (1)
and rotor (4), the hub (1) must be pulled off
from the shaft and replaced.
4.7 Screw brake onto the motor bearing bracket
or machine wall by means of the fixing
screws (8). (Observe tightening torque 22
Nm).
!Caution!
In order to guarantee a safe braking function the
min. rotor thickness must not fall down.
This has to be observed especially in case of an
operation with fast acting rectifiers or in case of
a reduced braking torque.
Failures
Possible rasons
Brake does not release
Brake does not brake
Brake engages with delay

Micro switch of the interlock
device does not give any
signal
07.13
False voltage measured at

the recifier
Rectifier failed
Air gap too big (rotor worn
down
Coil interrupted
Brake is getting to warm
Play at the shoulder screw is
not existing any more. (Rotor
is worn via the min.
thickness.)
Brake is switched to A.C.
side
Micro switch defective
Stroke magnet defective
Remove
Apply correct voltage
Exchange rectifier
Renew rotor
Exchange brake
Use fast acting rectifier
Renew rotor
Switch DC side
Exchange micro switch

Exchange stroke magnet
07.13
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
3.1 / 00
10.05.
07.14 1/1 Hoist winch 37 / 66 / 76 / 102 WB

Oil check 1 oil change:
All oil-lubricated gearboxes/transmissions are
delivered with an initial oil fill. Please note
instructions on the gearbox. Oil should always
be selected with due to regard for the
recommended viscosity on the gearbox
information plate. That recommendation,
however, refers to normal operating conditions.
Pour transmission oil into the filler until the

oil level reaches the markings on the sight
glass or dipstick, or until oil emerges from
the overflow port.
The sight glass or dipstick on the gearbox

has two marks, the upper and lower lines
indicating the maximum and minimum fill
levels, respectively.
Always check the oil with the gearbox at

rest and the oil in a cool condition. Never
allow the oil level to drop below the bottom
mark.
Top up with transmission oil. Heed oilchange intervals listed in Chapter

Lubrication and Maintenance
"Lubrication Schedule".
To drain the oil, open the plug immediately

after shutting down the gearbox, i.e. as
long as the oil is still at service
temperature. Refer to Chapter
Lubrication and Maintenance
"Lubricants and Operating Media Quantities".
Clean the gearbox and the oil drain plug

well before filling in new oil.
lt is advisable to replace the washer on the

oil drain plug each time the oil is changed.
07.14
Cleaning the vent filter:
Clean the vent on the gearbox at regulr

intervals.
Unscrew the vent, clean it in benzine and

blow it off with compressed air.
07.14
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK
1.1 / 00
11.05.
07.17 1/1 Hoist winch gearing (Range transmission)

Changing the oil
The worm gear motor, which powers the gear
speed changer, comes with an initial oil fill for
the serveral years of operation. The motor is
therefore maintenance-free for that period.
After several years of service, change the oil in
the gear motor throughly clean the gearbox
internals. Please refer to the "Lubrication
Schedule" for oil change intervals. The use of
unsuitable lubricants is detrimental to the
equipment and should therefore be avoided.
Use only tried and approved brands of
lubricant, as specified in the recommendation
for TEREX PEINER cranes.
07.17
07.17
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
04.02.
07.21 1/1 Shoe brake SB - technical instructions

The data about braking torque in our
documents are based on the coefficients of
friction determined experimentally of = 0.4
resp. = 0.3. These are valid for the following
operating conditions, adequate brake
dimensioning by the user is presupposed:
used brake drums according to DIN 15431
clean, fat free surface of brake drum
material of brake drum GG 26 (grey cast),

GGG 40 (nodular cast iron), GS 52 or St
52, respective of the case of application
The coefficient of friction is not

guaranteed for hard-chrome plated
brake drums.
Brake suraces have to be protected

from oil and grease, rain, splash water,
snow and ice.
The used brake linings are generelly free of

asbestos.
In principle are valid:
sliding speed max. 30 m/sec at full braking

force,
braking time max. 5 sec.,
steady-state temperature of brake drum

max. 180C
Brakes with new brake linings need a

running-in process in order to get an
adequate contact pattern of the friction
surface and to reach the full braking
torque. The braking effect can be reduced
in this phase, and an increased wear of
brake lining can occur.
07.21
Please contact us in limit cases for

dimensioning the brake.
Recommendation for grinding-in the

friction linings (running-in phase)
brake ap. 10 times without load starting at
nominal speed or lower;
brake ap. 10 times with 50% of the
nominal load;
Avoid overheat of the friction linings
during running-in phase! Annealing
colour of the brake drum during
running-in phase indicates
overstressing! Let the brake drum get
cool between the brake operations.
brake with nominal load;
After numerous braking cycles the
permissible braking distance/ time should
occur. Detailed informations about the
running-in phase are stated in the
"Mounting and Operating Instructions".
Bolts, adjusting screws, greased bearings, the
graduated scale of braking torque, brake
linings, brake drum as well as hydraulic,
pneumatic and electrical equipment and
switches must not be covered with paint in
case of spray-painting carried out by the user,
because a restriction of function can
commence.
Faults
A failure of the brake is improbable if mounting
and adjusting is done correctly and the user
adheres to the operating conditions.
Should a reduced braking effect
occur (long braking distances/times "falling
down" of the load), check the following items:
- Is the braking torque value on the
graduated scale adjusted to the necessary
value?
- Is the reserve stroke (X) of the releasing
device (9) sufficient?
- Are the brake linings grinded in?
If all those items can exluded as source of
error, please contact TEREX PEINER service
team.
07.21
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK /SN
1.1 / 00
04.02.
07.22 1/8 Shoe brake SB mounting /operating

instructions
INSTALLATION:
Before starting installation you have to pay

attention to:
Check the condition of the brake drum:

remove means of preservation, paint or
dirt, test the braking surface (more than
lmm wear is unacceptable) and the
concentricity.
If necessary fasten suitable compensating

shims (8) to the brake's substructure
conforming to the drawing of the
substructure.
For transport and holding of the brake

attach a slip of a hoist to the overhead
lever (3); the brakes must be protected
during transport against jerks, knocks and
electrical contacts. Use rubber slips or
hemp ropes when transporting the brake
or lifting it during mounting. The use of
bare steel cables is not permitted!
Adjusting screws (23) of the positive stops

do fasten the whole rod assembly of the
brake, unscrew those screws before
starting the installation.
For pushing the brake over the brake drum

in axial direction the distance between the
brake shoes must be bigger than the
diameter of the brake drum, this can be
obtained by means of:
Turning the connecting rod (4) at the

nut (43) to the right (when looking
from crossbolt (42) or AWA (42) or;
releasing the brake either by lifting

high the overhead lever (3) by hand or
by actuating the releasing device (9)
after connecting to it's power supply
(see item 3.1).
07.22
07.22
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK /SN
1.1 / 00
04.02.

instructions
If it is inpossible to push the brake over the

brake drum in axial direction, remove bolt
(61) from it's bearing after removing the
appropriate cotter pin; hold tight the
connecting rod (4), swing the brake arm
(2) upwards and push the brake over the
brake drum in radial direction; mount the
bolt (61) again and secure it via it's cotter
pins.
Adjust the brake towards height by adding

or removing of shims (8) so that the brake
drum axis is located on the same height
like the middle of the brake shoe bolts
(62).
Adjust it towards sides so that the brake

drum axis is in the middle between the
brake shoes (5) and that the brake drum
protrudes uniformly at both sides of the
brake shoes.
Insert fastening screws (property class at

least 8.8) in the borings of the base frame
(1) and tighten them only a little.
Apply the brake and turn the connecting

rod (4) on the nut (43) to the left (when
looking from crossbolt (42) or AWA (42) till
both brake linings with their whole surface
and without gap are put against the brake
drum.
By turning the dome headed nut (71) to

the right, pretension the brake spring (72)
until the top edge of the spring base plate
(73) shows approximately the half of the
maximum value on the braking torque
scale (74).
Release and apply the brake two or three

times; because of the brake shoe's
application force acting against the brake
drum, the brake is centreing in effect itself.
07.22
07.22
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK /SN
1.1 / 00
04.02.

instructions
Tighten the fastening screws with the

neccessary torque according to VDI 2230
and remove the slip of the hoist.
Brakes of type SB can operate with an

angel of inclination of it's longitudinal and
transversal axis up to 30.
Brakes with cover: Ensure that, after

installation of the cover hood, the hood
makes a straight fit, does not touch any
brake part or impairs braking.
ADJUSTMENTS
! Attention !
Before any adiustment of brakes already
operating in oparable machines make sure that
the machine can not be operated by itself or by
outside influences!
RESERVE STROKE OF THE RELEASING
DEVICE
Apply the brake.
By turning the dome headed nut (71) to

the right, pretension the brake spring (72)
untill the top edge of the spring base plate
(73) shows approximately 70 up to 80% of
the maximum value on the braking torque
scale (74).
By turning the connecting rod (4) at the nut

(43) to the left (when looking from
crossbolt (42) or AWA (42) the piston rod
will be pulled out of the releasing device.
The length of the piston rod jutting out of

the releasing device (9) in case of the
brake is applied is called the Reserve
stroke (X).
07.22
07.22
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK /SN
1.1 / 00
04.02.

instructions
The reserve stroke has to be adiusted to a

value of approximately:
8 mm at releasing devices with
50 mm stroke
60 mm stroke
100 mm stroke
120 mm stroke
BRAKING TORQUE
Apply the brake.
By turning the dome headed nut (71),

pretension the brake spring (72) until the
top edge of the sring base plate (73)
shows the required value on the braking
torque scale (74). Please not: it is not
allowed to adjust and to secure the
nominal value of the braking torque without
grinding-in the friction linings according to
item "Running-in phase"!
AIR GAP (SHOE CLEARANCE) OF THE

FRICTION LININGS
Apply the brake. After unscrewing the

counter nuts adjust the adjusting screws
(22) so, there is a distance between the
screws (22) and the brake shoes (5) of
approximately 0.5 up to 0.8 mm on both
sides.
Release the brake and keep on the

released position. Adjust the adjusting
screws (23) so, there is the same
distance between the brake drum and the
brake linings on both sides, that means
the air gap must be of the same size at
both linings and constant along the full
length of the linings. If neccessary adjust
the screws (22) accordingly.
07.22
07.22
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK /SN
1.1 / 00
04.02.

instructions
The air gap now has to correspond to the

value indicated on the type plate (check
the value by using a feeler gauge), if not
the brake has to be adjusted again.
After finishing secure the adjustments by

tightening the counter nuts of the adjusting
screws (22) and (23).
AUTOMATIC WEAR ADJUSTMENT AWA

This adiustment is only necessary in case of
the brake is equipped with an automatic wear
adiustment (42). Is those adjustment carried
out not carefulzy, a failure of the brake can
occure!
Apply the brake, screw the adiusting

screw (47) totally out of the guide hole (45)
and push down the driving pin (46) in the
guide hole as far as possible.
Release the brake once and apply it again;

the driving pin is now positioned.
Now screw the adjusting screw (47)

againinto the guide hole so that it does not
touch the driving pin (air gap of approx. 0,5
mm) and secure it with the counter nut
(48).
Independent if the brake is equipped with

an AWA or not must be regulary checked
if the shoe clearence of both brake linings
is of the same size. If not, the adjusting
screws (22) and (23) have to be
adjusted according to item "Air gap of the
friction linings".
Nevertheless the brake is equipped with

an AWA the user has to carry out regulary
visual inspections (Reserve stroke) and
checks of the brake's efficacy.
07.22
07.22
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK /SN
1.1 / 00
04.02.

instructions
INITIAL OPERATION
The initiation of the brake mainly requires to
connect the releasing device (9), the sensors
or switches to their power supply and to grindin the brake linings.
RUNNING-IN PHASE
A running-in phase is always necessary when
mounting
- a new brake
- new friction linings
- a new brake drum
in order to get an adequate contact pattern of
the friction surfaces and to reach the full
braking torque. In this phase the braking effect
can be reduced, and an increased wear of the
brake linings can occur.
In case of the whole drive which has to be
braked is already mounted and test brakings
with load can be carried out at justifiable
expense the following items have to complied
with:
Brake up to 10 times with nominal load

and step by step increasing speed up to
the nominal rotations.
In case of test brakings with load are

inpracticable, the friction linings should be
grinded-in by means of the drive's motor
operating against the applied brake:
Brake up to 10 times with a decreased

braking torque (adjust approximately a
third of the nominal value) and a half of the
nominal rotation of the brake drum;
release the brake between the brake
operations and let the brake drum and the
linings get cool; - check the reserve stroke
(X) of the releasing device (9) and adjust it
if necessary; check the solidity of all
srewings of the distant bolts.
Brake up to 10 times without load and with

approximately the half of the nominal
rotations of the brake drum
Brake up to 10 times with step by step

increasing torque up to the nominal value;
check the solidity of all srewings of the
distant bolts.
Brake 5-8 times with nominal braking

torque and nominal rotations.
Brake up to 10 times without load and with

Avoid overheat of the friction linings during

running-in phase! Annealing colour of the
brake drum during running-in phase
indicates overstressing! Let the brake
drum get cool between the brake
operations. After numerous braking cycles
the permissible braking distance/time
should occur.
Brake up to 10 times with half of the load

and half of the rotations.

and step by step increasing speed up to
check the reserve stroke (X) of the

releasing device (9) and adjust it
according to item 2.1 if necessary; check
the solidity of all srewings of the distant
bolts.
The following characteristic values are not

allowed to be exeeded during running-in phase:
* max. sliding (peripheral) speed of 30 m/s
* max. allowable braking time 5 s
* max. temperature of the brake drum 180 C

and half of the rotations.
07.22
07.22
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK /SN
1.1 / 00
04.02.

instructions
Don't touch brake drum and brake linings
during running-in phase (danger of burning)!
Keep adequate safe distance to the brake
drum (danger of wounding because of rotating
parts and abraded particles)!
! Attention !
In case of total used up reserve stroke a
failure of the brake can occure!
! Attention !
The brake is operable only when all
adjustments had been carried and the runningin phase had been finished.
MAINTENANCE
! Attention !
Before starting any maintenance work at the
brake system make sure that the machine can
not be operated by itself or by outside
influences!
Because of the various strains of brakes
resulting from very different operating
conditions the following items are valid
generally:
A check respectively a maintenance of a

brake should take place after 100
operating hours, after an emergency stop
event and in case of brake distance
respectively brake time do increase
considerably.
To it the following checks have to be

realised respectively the following
maintenance works have to be carried out:
CHECK OF THE RESERVE STROKE

The reserve stroke (X) of the releasing device
(9) decreases with increasing lining wear and
must therefore be checked regularly and
readjusted in case of the brake is not
equipped with an automatic wear adjustment
AWA (42).
lf the reserve stroke of the releasing device
07.22
has decreased to the half of the value, the

brake must be readiusted.
CHECK OF THE AIR GAP (SHOE

CLEARANCE)
Resulting from friction lining's wear the air
gap between the linings of the released brake
and the brake drum increases and the
reserve stroke (X) of the releasing device (9)
decreases if the brake is not equipped with
an AWA (42). In this case a check
respectively a readjustment according to item
2.3 is always necessary in combination with
checking respectively adjusting of the reserve
stroke (X).
But if the brake is equipped with an AWA the
reserve stroke (X) and the air gap is kept
approximately constant resulting from the
readjusting movement of the AWA (42) also
in case of increasing friction lining's wear.
That's why the distance of the adjusting
srews (23) and the positive stops of the base
frame (1) is increasing when the brake is
applied. Now the released brake is tilting at
one side up to one adjusting screw (23) is
supporting against one positive stop.
his results in air gaps of different size on left
hand and right hand side of the brake drum.
These effect can lead in case of considerable
friction lining's wear to a permanent grinding
of the left or the right lining on the brake drum.
That's why the air gap has to be checked
regulary and if it is necessary to be
readjusted in order to guarantee a constant
shoe clearance on both friction linings also in
case of the brake is equipped with an AWA
(42).
07.22
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK /SN
1.1 / 00
04.02.

instructions
CHECK OF THE FRICTION LININGS
For properly operation of the brake and for
application of the nominal braking torque a
minimum thickness of the friction linings of 3
mm in case of bonded linings and of 4 to 5 mm
in case ot riveted linings is required.
Because of the friction lining's wear due to
various duties is very different, a regulary
check of the lining-thickness is absolutly
necessary, if the brake is not equipped with a
lining's wear indication.
REPLACEMENT OF THE BRAKE SHOES
! Attention !
Before any dismantling of the brake system
make sure that the machine can not be
operated by itself or by outside influences!
When achieving the minimum lining thickness
the worn-out friction linings must be replaced;
for this purpose the brake must not be
dismantled if the following instructions are
adhered to:
Readjust the reserve stroke (X) and the air

gap.
Check the adiustment of the braking

torque and of the AWA and correct it if
necessary.
Grinding-in the new friction linings.
LUBRICATION
Drum brakes are equipped with self lubricating
bushes made from sintered bronze and with
lubricated brass bushes.
Before assembling the brake by the
manufacturer all pivoting pins are lubricated
additionally. Regreasing during normal
operation of the brake is not necessary.
MOREOVER
The inspection and maintenance works
comprise moreover:
Adjustment and properly operation of the

AWA.
Value of the adiusted braking torque.
Release the brake.
Solidity of all screwings.
Unscrew the adjusting screws (23) and

open the brake a few milimeters by turning
the connecting rod (4) at the nut (43) to
the right (when looking from crossbolt (42)
or AWA (42).
Properly operation of all switches.
Cleanness and soft running of all bearings

(the bearings including the pivoting pins
must not be covered with paint in case of
spraypainting is carried out by the user!),
Existense of all cotter pins in the pivoting

pins.
Condition of the brake drum.
Condition of the piston rod and

impermeability of the releasing device (9).
Remove brake shoe bolt (62) after

removing the cotter pin and pivot the brake
shoe (5) upwards. When replacing the
brake shoes (5) of some sizes it is
possible to remove them through the both
brake arm webs.
Mount the new brake shoes in reverse
sequence.
07.22
07.22
PEINER
T O W E R
C R A N E S
Operating manual
SK / SN / SMK /SKC / SMH
2.1 / 00
06.06.
07.23 1/1 Sheave checking

Before installing a new rope, inspect
all sheave and drum races for evident
signs of wear and deformation due to
reeving of the old rope.
right
wrong
wrong
If defective races are discovered, take

corrective action to restore the original
condition by griding their profiles.
It's very important that the sheave wheels turn
freely without excessive clearances. Replace
any defective bearings and bushes necessary.
Lastly check that there is no rope wear
marks or grooves on the sheave.
07.23
07.23
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
1.1 / 98
SK, SMK, SN, SMH, SKC
27.01.
07.24 1/7 Notes on handling wire ropes

Handling, mounting, replacement
Every crane delivered ex works is fitted

with the ropes listed in the "Table of ropes
used". When handling and especially
when replacing ropes, pay particular
attention to the following:
Ropes may only be replaced by ropes of

the same type and strength.
The new rope must be correctly and

clearly marked.
Ropes may only be replaced by trained

and qualified personnel.
The new rope must be subjected to a
thorough visual inspection, in order to
Right
Winder
Drum
detect influences caused by transport,

storage, manufacture and installation
before commissioning.
WRONG
Ropes must be unwound from rings,

winders or drums in such a way that no
unacceptable twist is transferred to the
rope.
Winder
Drum
07.24
07.24
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
1.1 / 98
27.01.

When mounting ropes, particularly with
hoist ropes and complicated rope drives,
appropriate measures must be taken to
ensure that no unacceptable twisting can
occur.
old rope
new rope
Appropriate measures are:
Fitting the new rope with the old rope (if there
was no rope breakage) using a connection to
compensate for twisting.
Fitting the new rope with a thin, low-twist pilot

rope.
The rope connections between the mounting

rope and the new rope must be such that the
connecting points do not catch at restricted
points in the rope route.
rope stocking
rope stocking
hemp rope
old rope
new rope
The following can be rope connections:
Rope stocking connections
Rope stockings are braids made of single

strands; they are pushed over the rope ends
and secured at the ends with adhesive tape.
To allow additional compensation for twist, the
ends of the rope stockings were connected to
an approx. 3 to 4 m long hemp rope.
Connections of rope ends that have eyelets or

chain links of a suitable size welded onto the
ends.
eyelet
eyelet
hemp rope
07.24
07.24
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
1.1 / 98
27.01.
It must be ensured that the new rope (hoist

rope) has sufficient pretension when it is drawn
onto the drum (e.g. with the help of suitably
clamped wooden blocks).
If the required piece of rope is taken from a

length of stored rope, then it is important to
ensure that in the long term the rope strands at
the point of separation do not become loose.
When the wire rope is unwound from the

winder or from a ring, and when mounting in
the rope drive, the wire rope must not be
untwisted or overtwisted, since otherwise the
rope structure will be disturbed and kinks,
twists or buckling may occur.
The rope must be mounted exactly according

to plan and must be correctly reeved.
The specified connecting elements must be

used for all rope connections.
All functioning parts connected with the rope or

rope drive (e.g. safety equipment, such as limit
switches) must be checked again before
restarting to ensure that they function correctly.
New ropes must be stretched slowly when they

are already mounted. For this reason, the new
rope must first be tested under low load (10%
of full load), and then the load must be
gradually increased to maximum load. Traction
ropes must be moved over their entire length
before
commissioning.
Maintenance and care
Wire ropes must be serviced and lubricated

regularly.
The shorter the expected service life of a rope

is, depending on operating conditions, the
more carefully the care and maintenance
measures have to be carried out.
Monitoring
The safe operating condition of wire ropes
must be inspected regularly by qualified staff.
The intervals between the inspections must be
adapted to the load and operating conditions,
and they must be regulated so that damage is
recognized in good time.
Notes:
All ropes must be properly greased during

mounting. It is important to ensure that the
ropes do not touch the ground. (Dirty ropes
must be carefully cleaned, since dirt
accumulation has an adverse effect on the
service life of the ropes and rope pulleys.)
For rope maintenance, the lubricants

specified in the "Recommended lubricants"
must be used.
The lubricant used must be compatible

with the previously used lubricant.
Before greasing, ropes must be cleaned if

necessary.
07.24
07.24
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
1.1 / 98
27.01.

Inspections must be carried out at shorter
intervals if
ropes show first perceptible wire breakages
ropes have been exposed to extraordinary

loads
ropes have been newly mounted and invisible

damage is suspected
All results of inspections of this kind must
be recorded in the log book!
Replacement state of wear

Replacement state of wear has been reached
when there is a concrete danger arising from
the state of the rope, for example:
breakage of a strand
occurrence of wire breakage tangles
corkscrew-type deformation around more

than 1/3 of the rope diameter
Objects of inspection are:
type and number of wire breakages
location of wire breakages
chronological sequence of occurrence of wire

breakages
reduction of wire diameter during operation
corrosion
wear by friction
rope deformation
effects of heat
service life
see DIN 15 020 Sheet 2
07.24
07.24
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
1.1 / 98
27.01.
Reaching the wire breakage figures defined in the table.

No. of
bearing
wires in
the outer
strands of the
wire rope
Number of visible wire breakages at replacement state of wear

Drive groups
Drive groups
1Em, 1Dm, 1Cm, 1Bm, 1Am
2m, 3m, 4m, 5m
Crosslay
Parallel lay
Crosslay
Parallel lay
over a length of
over a length of
over a length of
over a length of
6d
30 d
6d
30 d
6d
30 d
6d
30 d
n
000 to 050
2
4
1
2
4
8
2
4
051 to 075
3
6
2
3
6
12
3
6
076 to 100
4
8
2
4
8
16
4
8
101 to 120
5
10
2
5
10
19
5
10
121 to 140
6
11
3
6
11
22
6
11
141 to 160
6
13
3
6
13
26
6
13
161 to 180
7
14
4
7
14
29
7
14
181 to 200
8
16
4
8
16
32
8
16
201 to 220
9
18
4
9
18
35
9
18
221 to 240
10
19
5
10
19
38
10
19
241 to 260
10
21
5
10
21
42
10
21
261 to 280
11
22
6
11
22
45
11
22
281 to 300
12
24
6
12
24
48
12
24
4)
over 300
0.04 x n
0.08 x n
0.02 x n
0.04 x n
0.08 x n
0.16 x n
0.04 x n
0.08 x n
In rope constructions with particularly thick wires in the outer layer of the outer strands, e.g. round strand rope 6 x
19 Seale acc. to DIN 3058 or round strand rope 8 x 19 Seale acc. to DIN 3062, the number of visible wire
breakages at replacement state of wear is to be assumed two lines lower than given in the table. Drive groups
acc. to DIN 15 020 sheet 1 d = wire diameter
3) Filler wires are not regarded as load-bearing. For wire ropes with several strand layers only the strands of the
outermost strand layer are regarded as "outside strands". For wire ropes with steel insert, the insert is to be
regarded as an inner strand. 4) the calculated figures must be rounded up.
07.24
07.24
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
1.1 / 98
27.01.
Basket formation
Hairpin-type emergence of wires or groups

of wires from the rope
Reduction of rope diameter compared with

nominal diameter by 15 % or by 10 % with
simultaneous occurrence of corrosion
and/or wear by friction
Loosening of rope structure
Contraction
07.24
07.24
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
1.1 / 98
27.01.
Warps and crushes
Kinks or other permanent deformations

If a rope has to be removed because of
particular damage, the causes must first
be detected and eliminated before a new
rope can be mounted. Important
indications here are for example wear
marks on rope pulleys or drag marks on
construction
ropes.
You
are
recommended to measure the actual
rope diameter of the ropes used (at
several
points)
before
initial
commissioning and to compare these
figures with later control measurements
(log book).
07.24
07.24
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK
2.2 / 98
27.01.
07.26 1/1 Electrical equipment

!Attention
The cranes power must be turned off prior to
any electrical work.
Control box
Tighten all terminals in the control box and on
all electrical devices as specified in Chapter
Lubrication and maintenance "Maintenance
schedule". This also applies to vacant
terminals, because loose terminal scews could
give rise to electric hazards. After any tapchanging,
check
all
terminals.
Use
compressed air to blow off the dust. Store no
tools in the control box.
Cables and conductors
Inspect all cables and conductors in
accordance with in Chapter Lubrication and
maintenance "Maintenance
schedule".
Replace brittle cables and conductors. Pay
special attention to the power supply cable.
Contactors and switch contacts
Check all contactor and switch contacts for arc
erosion, as defined in Chapter Lubrication
and maintenance "Maintenance schedule".
The contacts are coated with wilver for fullarea, noslip contact. Do not lubricate,
beccause oil and grease promote sparking.
The silver oxide resulting from arcing is fully
conductive (unlike copper oxid) and must be
left intact. Indeed, the contacts must be
allowed to burn in, so that the entire contact
face serves to conduct the current. Sooting
and pitting of working contacts is unavoidable.
Keep all contact grease, files and emery cloth
away from electrical wear (bead formation on
the contact faces) consuls an expert without
delay
07.26
07.26
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
SK
Operating manual
!
2.2 / 98
27.01.
07.30 1/1 Slipring body
Monitor the carbon brushes for wear and

the brushholders for flexibility.
Clean the running faces of the sliprings

with a contact-promoting cleanser
Lubricate the pivot joints of the brush

holders from time to time with a thinbodied, acid-free oil.
Be sure to apply only a very thin coat of oil

to the joints in order to prevent
contamination of the slipring assembly with
dropping oil.
The slipring assembly is supported by a

plain bearing.
Lubricate the bearing with plain-bearing

grease as specified in Chapter Lubrication
and Maintenance "Lubrication schedule.
07.30
07.30
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK / SN
2.2 / 99
27.01.
07.31 1/1 Version E Travelling mechanism gear

Checking and Changing the Oil
All oil-lubricated gearboxes / transmissions are
delivered with an initial oil fill. Please note
instructions on the gearbox. Oil should always
be selected with due regard for the
recommended viscosity on the gearbox
information plate. That recommendation,
however, refers to normal operating
conditions.
Pour transmission oil into the filler until

the oil level reaches the marking on the
sight glass or dipstick, or until oil emerges
from the overflow port.
The sight glass or dipstick on the gearbox

has two marks. The upper and lower lines
indicating the maximum and minimum fill
levels, respectively.
Always check the oil with the gearbox at

rest and the oil in a cool condition. Never
allow the oil level to drop below the
bottom mark.
Top up with transmission oil. Heed oilchange intervals listed in Chapter

Lubrication and Maintenance "Lubrication
schedule".
To drain the oil, open the plug

immediately after shutting down the
gearbox, i.e. as long as the oil is still at
service temperature. Refer to Chapter
Lubrication and Maintenance "Lubricant
and Operating Media - Quantities" for oilfill volumes.
Clean the gearbox and the oil drain plug

well before filling in new oil.
It is advisable to replace the washer on

the oil drain plug each time the oil is
changed.
07.31
Cleaning the vent filter:
Clean the vent filter on the gearbox at

regular intervals. Unscrew the vent filter,
clean it in benzine and blow it off with
compressed air.
07.31
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK / SN
2.2 / 99
27.01.
07.32 1/3 Version E Travelling mechanism brakes

Function
The magnet (solenoid, 1.1) of the springloaded (fail-to-safety) brake has a stationary
field winding (1.2) and is connected to the
spacing ring (5) and the flange (6) by three
screws (8). The pressure springs (11) act on
the backing plate (4) to press the friction ring
(18; with square socket running on the driver,
20) up against the flange (6) to generate a
braking effect. When the field winding (1.2) is
energized, the magnet (1.1) pulls the backing
plate (4) in opposition to the pressure springs
(11). This releases the friction ring (18) to
cancel the braking force. Since the springloaded brake is a self-contained system, no
axial forces are liberated. The spring-loaded
brake is protected against dust ingress by a
cover (17) and labyrinth seal (22).
Adjusting the braking torque
The brakes come adjusted to the nominal
braking torque stated on the rating plate. The
adjusting ring (14) is locked in position by the
setscrew (15). Loosen the setscrew to turn the
adjusting ring with the aid of a spanner
wrench. Turning the ring to the left reduces the
braking torque. The nominal torque, however,
should not be increased by more than 10%.
After the adjustment, turn in the setscrew to
lack the adjusting ring in place. The amount
by which the adjusting ring should protrude
beyond the shoulder of the magnet with the
torque adjusted to the nominal value (rating
plate) is stamped onto the shoulder of the
magnet next to the setscrew. Consequently,
the original position can always be reverted to
at will, despite the setting having been
changed.
07.32
1.1
1.2
4
5
6
8
9
11
12
14
15
17
18
20
22
23
Magnet
Field winding
Backing plate
Spacing ring
Flange
Fillister head screw
Gasket
Pressure spring
Thrust bolt
Adjusting ring
Setscrew
Cover
Friction ring
Driver
Labyrinth seal
Anti-adhesive plate
07.32
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK / SN
2.2 / 99
27.01.

Brake disassembly and worn-parts
replacement
To dismantle the brake, first remove the cover
(17) and turn out the setscrew (15). Unscrew
the adjusting ring (14) and the hexagon socket
screw (8). Due to the protective seal between
the flange (6) and the spacing ring (5) on the
one hand, and between the magnet (1.1) and
the spacing ring (5) on the other, separation of
the parts requires some twisting. Prior to
reassembly, clean all parts - with the exception
of the friction ring (18) - in kerosine. Lightly
lubricate the threads of the adjusting ring (14),
the thrust bolt (12) and the pressure springs
Remove all sealing compound from the center
bore of the spacing ring (5), the flange (6), the
anti-adhesive plate (23) and the magnet (1.1).
Now, on a perpendicular center axis, install the
spacing ring (5) on the magnet (1.1) after
coating it with a suitable sealant, e.g.
moistureproofing compound no. 190 (supplier:
Dr. Beck, Hamburg). After a short drying time,
install the flange (5) as described and in
accordance with the instructions of the sealing
compound supplier.
When screwing on the adjusting ring (14),
ensure that it projects above the shoulder by
the specified amount (stamp on the shoulder).
Hexagon screw
Screw torque
Air gap (nominal)
Max. perm. Axial
clearance of driver
07.32
[daNm]
[mm]
[inch]
[mm]
[inch]
Brake size
B5
B 10
B 25
B 50
B 100
B 200
M5 x 60 M5 x 65 M5 x 85 M6 x 100 M6 x 100 M8 x 130
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.8
0.8
2.1
0.1 0.3 0.1 0.3 0.1 0.3 0.1 0.3 0.1 0.3 0.2 0.4
1
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
/256- /256 /256- /256 /256- /256 /256- /256 /256- /256
/128- /64
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1
1
5
5
5
5
/32
/32
/128
/128
/128
/128
07.32
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK / SN
2.2 / 99
27.01.

This is the only way to achieve the prescribed
nominal torque. In that connection, ensure that
the setscrew (15) does come to rest on one of
the thrust bolts (12). Remove the setscrew to
check if that is the case. Any requisite spare
parts can be ordered in accordance with the
nomenclature of the illustration on the
preceding page.
Note:
If the "EMERGENCY OFF" button is actuated,

the travelling mechanism brakes engage
immediately.
Minimum braking distance
Maximum braking distance
0.5 m / 1'-8"
0.8 m / 2'-7"
If the actual braking distances are found to be

much longer, adjust the brakes to a higher
torque and repeat the tests.
For any relevant inquiry, please always state

the type and number of the spring-loaded
brake, as shown on the rating plate.
Adjusting the travelling mechanism brakes
on the basis of stopping distance.
The traveling mechanism brakes must be set
to bring the crane to a standstill within an
acceptable distance. Prompt braking is
particularly important for rail-mounting tower
cranes.
The acceleration associated with braking can
be ascertained by determining the no wind
stopping distance.
Proceed as follows:
Turn the crane superstructure such as to

apply pressure on the driven bogies. For
an unloaded jib, this means that the
drives must be positioned beneath the
counterweight. If the drives are arranged
diagonally, the crane should be centered
as closely as possible.
The braking test should be carried out, if

possible, under no-wind conditions. If the
wind is blowing, perform two braking tests
one with and one against the wind
and average the results.
07.32
07.32
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK / SN
2.2 / 99
27.01.
07.33 1/3 Version E Cable drum motor

The gearing and geared motors come with a
factory fill of oil / grease and are therefore
ready for service. First, however, remove the
plastic plug from the vent screw!
! Caution
For normal service conditions and ambient
temperature ranging from approximately
20C / -40F to 50C / 122F, transmission
oil with a viscosity of roughly 115 cSt/5OF
/ 115 cSt/122F (15E) - ESSO EP 220 or
equivalent should be used. For ambient
temperatures above 50C / 122F and below
20C / -4F, use special-purpose oils. For
extra-low ambient temperatures, choose an
oil with a commensurate pour
(solidification) point. Change the oil after
the first year of service by opening the oil
drain plug and vent screw. Thoroughly
clean out the gearbox with a suitable type
of flushing oil, and then refill with new
transmission oil. We recommend changing
the oil and thoroughly cleaning the gearing
and gearbox at two year intervals
thereafter.
Gear size
0
39
59
11
5.5 kg
8.5 kg
For horizontal installation

Transmission
oil filling
quantity
0.1 kg
0.3 kg
0.4 kg
0.8 kg
0.9 kg
1.8 kg
2.1 kg
2.4 kg
3.7 kg
0.22 lbs
0.66 lbs
0.88 lbs
1.76 lbs
1.98 lbs
3.97 lbs
4.63 lbs
5.29 lbs
8.16 lbs
5.2 kg
6.8 kg
12.13 lbs 18.74 lbs
For vertical installation
07.33
0.2 kg
0.5 kg
0.6 kg
1.6 kg
2.9 kg
0.44 lbs
1.10 lbs
1.32 lbs
3.53 lbs
6.39 lbs
4.6 kg
9.5 kg
22.0 kg
10.14 lbs 11.47 lbs 14.99 lbs 20.95 lbs 48.51 lbs
07.33
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK / SN
2.2 / 99
27.01.

Principle of operation
The built-in magnetic coupling of
electroniccontrol cable drums provides the
requisite 100 % slip for the drum drives. It
transfers torque from the motor to the drum for
reeling the cable in and out. The drive motor
and the input side of the magneiic coupling
always run in one direction at the motor's
nominal speed. The output side of the
magnetic coupling is out of action as long as
the drum is not moving and is pulled in the
respective direction when the cable is being
reeled in/out.
Switching
Since the magnetic coupling is designed for
continuous operation, the electric motor can
remain energized without interruption. In case
of a switching depending on function of
travelling-mechanism action, the operating
time of the electric motor roughly
corresponding to twice the braking time, would
have to be provided. The shut-off retarding
time lag relay prevents rope sag for this
method of connection. Motor protection is
required.
Commissioning
The installed coupling is set to the required
pull (traction capacity), and subsequent
adjustment is neither necessary nor possible.
The drum takeoff direction is indicated by
arrows on the motor and slipring cover. Briefly
turn on the motor to see if the magnetic
coupling (8) turns. If the anti-backslide device
(11) is blocking the motor, reverse the polarity
of the electric motor.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Shield
Hexagon screw
Hexagon screw
Hexagon screw
Hexagon screw
Intermediate flange
Special deep-groove ball bearing
Permanent-magnet coupling
Intermediate coupling with plastic cam
ring
10 Clutch hub
11 Backslide preventer
12 Electric motor
To replace worn parts, begin by unscrewing

the electric motor (12). Now, extract the
antibackslide device (backslide preventer 11)
and replace as necessary. If the permanentmagnet coupling is to be removed, unscrew
the hexagon head screws (4).
For reassembly, ensure that the stop pin for
the backslide preventer engages in the
groove. Prior to removing the coupling, block
the drum to prevent it from turning.
If a different sense of rotation is desired,

request a different free-wheel clutch from the
factory.
07.33
07.33
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK / SN
2.2 / 99
27.01.

! Attention
Do not expose the magnetic coupling to
magnetizable objects.
Maintenance
The (prelubricated) special-purpose deepgroove ball bearing in the permanent-magnet
coupling should be either replaced or greased
(silicone grease type TK44N2, Klber, or
equivalent) every three years. The plastic cam
Intermediate coupling with plastic cam ring
ring (wearing part) between the coupling and
the electric motor can be replaced by
unscrewing the electric motor.
07.33
07.33
PEINER
TOWER
CRANES
SK, SN
Operating manual
!
1.2 / 99
27.01.
08.64 1/1 Dismantling of the tower sections

The following working steps must be carried
out in order to dismantle the tower sections:
Unbolt the bottom part of the ladder of the

ascent belonging to the tower section TS
which is to be dismantled.
Remove the connecting elements

between the tower section which is to be
dismantled and the tower section which is
placed underneath it (TS or TSV).
Attach the tower section TS which is to be

dismantled to the assembly crane
(weights - see Chapter Crane Erection
"Attachment points and weights tower sections" ).
Lift the tower section TS using the

assembly crane and set it down on even
ground.
This procedure is repeated until all tower

sections TS have been dismantled (version E
and F) or until only the bottom tower element
is left to dismantle (version A).
08.64
08.64
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK, SN
2.2 / 99
27.01.
08.68 1/1 Version A dismantling of the crane substructure

Crane on single foundation
The following working steps must be carried
out in order to dismantle the crane
substructure:
Attach the bottom tower section to the

assembly crane (see Chapter Crane
Erection "Attachment points and
weights - tower sections)
Remove the bolt connections between the

bottom tower section and the foundation
anchors.
Lift the bottom tower section off the

foundation anchors.
Note:
Further procedure for dismantling the crane
substructure depends on the building owner's
demands and the applicable local regulations.
Depending upon whether the concrete
foundation is to remain on site or not, the
foundation anchors are
burned off to the top edge of the concrete

foundation (the concrete foundation
remains where it is).
disposed of together with the concrete

foundation.
! Caution
Already used foundation anchors must
under no circumstances be used again!
08.68
08.68
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK, SN
2.2 / 99
27.01.
08.72 1/2 Version E dismantling of the crane substructure

Crane on rail-mounted travelling
mechanism
The following working steps are necessary in
order to dismantle the crane substructure:

Pull the power supply cable plug out of

the socket in the electrical panel.
Remove both cables between the

electrical panel and the travel unit motors
of the driven bogies.
Attach and lift off the central ballast

blocks BZ from the undercarriage /
foundation cross.
Attach one strut to the assembly crane.
Remove the pin connection between strut

and undercarriage or between strut and
tower section TSV.
Dismount the ascent ladder and the cable

drum.
Lift the strut off.
Remove the bolt connections which are

provided to make the pivot pins of the
bogies remain in their proper bores in the
Support the bogies or secure the bogies

against tilting by way of suitable means.
Loose the track pinch bars and fold them

in.
Repeat the last three working steps until

all struts have been dismantled.
Install the transport restraints on all

bogies.
Attach the last tower section to the

Attach the undercarriage / foundation

cross to the assembly crane (see
Chapter Crane Erection "Attachment
Points and Weights - undercarriage /
foundation cross").
08.72
08.72
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK, SN
2.2 / 99
27.01.
08.72 2/2 Version E dismantling of the crane substructure
Lift the undercarriage / foundation cross

off the bogies and lift it up to a height of
approx. 0.5 - 1 m / 2' - 3'.
Remove the swivel arm supports and fold

in the swivel arms.
Install the transport restraints between the

undercarriage / foundation cross and the
swivel arms on the front sides of the
undercarriage.
Attach the bogies to the assembly crane

(one at the time!).
Lift the bogies off the rails.
08.72
08.72
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK, SN
2.2 / 99
27.01.
08.76 1/1 Version F dismantling of the crane substructure

The following working steps are necessary in
order to dismantle the crane substructure:

Pull the power supply cable plug out of

the socket in the electrical panel.
Dismount the ascent ladder.
Attach the undercarriage to the assembly

crane (see Chapter Crane Erection
"Attachment points and weights
undercarriage / foundation cross").
Lift the undercarriage off the foundation

blocks BF and lift it up to a height of
approx. 0.5 - 1 m / 2' - 3'.
Remove the swivel arm supports and fold

in the swivel arms.
Install the transport restraints between the

undercarriage and the swivel arms on the
front sides of the undercarriage.
Attach and lift off the central ballast

blocks BZ from the undercarriage /
foundation cross.
Attach one strut to the assembly crane.
Remove the pin connection between strut

and undercarriage and between strut and
tower section TSV.
Lift the strut off.
Repeat the last three working steps until

all struts have been dismantled.
Attach the last tower section to the

08.76
08.76
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.2 / 00
18.04.
09.01 1/5 Version D building anchorage

A building anchorage is available as an option
for most TEREX PEINER tower systems. All
tower systems which can be used with building
anchorage are listed in the following table:
Tower system
Building anchorage
TS 14
TS 18
TS 19
TS 20
TS 211
TS 212
TS 213
GV 14
GV 18
GV 19
GV 20
GV 211
GV 212
GV 213
The location or arrangement of the building

anchorage depends on the statics
of the crane
of the building
The assembly of a single anchor frame of the

building anchorage takes place in several
phases:
Fixing the tower stiffening struts to the

tower section at the height of the
respective anchorage position. Mounting
the anchor pads on the building.
Lift and connect both halves of the anchor

frame to the mounting position. Fixing the
anchor frame to the tower.
Mounting the struts.
and must therefore be determined separately

for every concrete individual case. We will be
glad to give a quote of the exact costs for the
laying of the building anchorage on request and
- after receiving specifications
(
Chapter Appendix "Order for the
calculation of the building anchorage") also the complete calculation of the building
anchorage.
Note:
If a building anchorage is to be mounted, the
crane should be equipped with an outside
climbing device and stand on a concrete
foundation with foundation anchors (Version A).
09.01
09.01
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.2 / 00
18.04.

For better comprehension the individual
components of the building anchorage are
illustrated below:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
09.01
Tower stiffening strut

Chain for securing theanchor frame
Bores for tension rods to transfer the forces to
the construction
Anchor pad I (for horizontal installation)
Anchor pad II (for horizontal installation)
Strut I
Strut II
Adjusting bolt
Pin connection
Anchor frame I
Anchor frame II
Bolt connection
Bolt connection
Threaded bar
Wedge
Bolt connection
Location for shims
09.01
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.2 / 00
18.04.

Attach tower stiffening struts to the tower
frame and mount anchor pads on the
building
GV 18 /1 9/ 20 / 211 / 212 / 213
To mount the tower stiffening struts and the

anchor pads, the following steps must be
carried out:
Attach tower stiffening strut I to the crane

on which the building anchorage is
mounted (alternatively attach to the
assembly crane). Lift the tower stiffening
strut to mounting height and bring it to the
mounting position with a chain pull if
necessary.
Note:
Repeat the last two operating steps with

the second tower stiffening strut I.
Attach the tower stiffening strut II to the

crane on which the building anchorage is
mounted (alternatively attach to assembly
crane). Lift the tower stiffening strut to
mounting height and bring to the mounting
position - with a chain pull if necessary.
Clamp the tower stiffening strut (4)

between the corner posts of the tower and
connect with tower stiffening strut I.

the second tower stiffening strut II.
The tower stiffening struts must always be

mounted at a node point (1, see following
diagram).
Mount tower stiffening strut (2) and secure

it with a special fastener (3) against falling
down. In principle all tower stiffening struts
are clamped between the corner posts of
the tower - independently of the tower
system used and the appropriate building
anchorage.
GV 14
!ATTENTION
The tower stiffening struts prevent
twisting and bending of the tower due to
the effects of torque. When using a
building anchorage the tower stiffening
struts must be mounted at every anchoring
point.
09.01
09.01
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.2 / 00
18.04.
Place the anchor pads in their mounting

positions on the building, if necessary
using the crane to which the building
anchorage is fixed.
GV 14
GV 18
GV 19
GV 20
GV 211
GV 212
GV 213
GV 14
GV 18
GV 19
GV 20
GV 211
GV 212
GV 213
Tension rods
Bolts
Nuts
Washers
8 x M24x75
8 x M24x75
12 x M27x180
8 x M24
8 x M24
12 x M27
16 x B25
16 x B25
24 x 28
NOTE:
8 x M30
8 x M30
10 x M30
Lift the anchor frame into the mounting

position and fix to the tower.
Attach half of the anchor frame, lift to

mounting height and bring to the mounting
position - with a chain pull if necessary.
Fix the frame half in the mounting position

with chains (see diagram on page 2, part
no. 3).
DANGER
Before ensuring that the frame half is
protected against falling down, the
attachment devices may not be removed.
The enclosed lining plates must be inserted in

the frame connection if necessary. If the
anchor frame is not in contact with the belts of
the corner posts, lining plates must be inserted
here too.
Connect the anchor frame to the tower

section. To do this a tension rod must be
inserted in the wedge connections at
every corner post of the tower. After
tightening and locking the nuts of the
tension rod connection, the anchor frame
must be in contact with the frame without
clearance. The connections for clamping
the wedge connection are listed in the
following table.
Building
anchorage
Bolts
Nuts
Washers
GV 14
GV 18
GV 19
GV 20

the second half of the anchor frame.
09.01
Bolt the two frame halves together (see

the following table for connections).
Building
anchorage
Fix the anchor pads to the respective

mounting position. The following tension
rods must be used for this (per anchor
pad):
Building anchorage
GV 211
4 x M24x380
GV 212
4 x M24x380
GV 213
4 x M24x500
8 x M24
8 x BM24
8 x M24
8 x BM24
16 x M24
16 x B25
16 x B25
16 x B25
Remove the chains for fixing the anchor

frame.
09.01
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.2 / 00
18.04.

Mounting the struts
Then the struts must be connected to the

anchor pads on the building.
Attach strut to the mounting crane (crane

which is to be anchored or auto-crane)
and lift to the height of the anchor frame.
Bolt strut to the anchor frame and secure

the bolts.
Note:
Connect struts to the anchor pads.

Secure all pin connections.
The eyebolts on the struts enable the length to

be adapted - depending on the building
anchorage - approx.
30 - 50 mm / 1'' 2''.
Fix the unfastened end of the strut to the

building (e.g. with chain).
Remove attachment device from the strut.
Note:
Repeat the last four operating steps with

the other two struts.
If a strut cannot be connected to the

appropriate anchor pad, fix the shackle of a
chain or cable pull to the end of the strut and
use it to pull the strut into the right position.
To avoid forces acting on the building

anchorage from the start, the crane must be
torque-free. To balance the crane so that no
torques are produced, an appropriate
balancing weight must be attached to the load
hook of the crane and this driven to an exactly
defined radius. Only then is the crane torquefree and the struts can be connected with the
anchor pads on the building.
Attach balancing weight to the crane.
Drive the balancing weight to the correct

length by actuating the appropriate control
lever on the control stand (
Chapter
Accessories "Torque balancing of the
crane").
09.01
Remove the chains (or similar tools) for

temporary fixing of the struts to the
building.
All other anchor frames of the building

anchorage are mounted in the same way.
09.01
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
3.1 / 0
19.04.
09.85 1/1 Weights of upper crane for climbing process

The weight of the complete upper crane
including counterweight is necessary for the
static calculation. The load on the climbing
frames and therewith on the building must be
calculated and checked before the crane is
permitted to climb.
Weight of upper crane by length of jib with counterweight
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
SK 315
85 050 lbs
38 570 kg
88 600 lbs
40 170 kg
94 750 lbs
42 970 kg
98 000 lbs
44 440 kg
104 200 lbs
47 240 kg
101 800 lbs
46 150 kg
107 950 lbs
48 950 kg
L8
L9
SK 405
120 300 lbs
54 540 kg
134 700 lbs
61 090 kg
143 500 lbs
65 080 kg
145 100 lbs
65 810 kg
149 500 lbs
67 810 kg
151 400 lbs
68 670 kg
SK 575
142 650 lbs
64 700 kg
148 150 lbs
67 200 kg
154 550 lbs
70 100 kg
159 200 lbs
72 200 kg
170 200 lbs
77 200 kg
166 200 lbs
75 400 kg
173 050 lbs
78 500 kg
167 800 lbs
76 100 kg
176 800 lbs
80 200 kg
Floor climbing
weight of upper crane + all tower sections
(TS) + climbing unit (IE) + balance weight +
10 % friction
External (top) climbing

weight of upper crane + tower section
(TSK / intermediate frame) + one tower
section (TS) + climbing unit (SE)
09.85
SN 166
91 000 lbs
41 270 kg
92 060 lbs
41 750 kg
93 140 lbs
42 240 kg
94 200 lbs
42 720 kg
95 280 lbs
43 210 kg
SN 406
180 100 lbs
81 660 kg
183 700 lbs
83 320 kg
192 700 lbs
87 390 kg
198 000 lbs
89 800 kg
09.85
PEINER
T O W E R
Operating manual
C R A N E S
SK / SN
1.2 / 00
18.04.
09.90 1/1 Tower section TSK

(for crane climbing with external climbing unit SE)
First of all, the tower section TSK is used
instead of an intermediate frame for crane
climbing with an external climbing unit SE. A
tower section TSK can also be used in the
same way as a regular tower section TS,
means to raise the hook height of the crane. In
each case, the position of the tower section
TSK must always be just below the slewing
ring support as the uppermost tower section of
the crane.
09.90
c:\eigene dateien\betriebsanleitungen\sprache\englisch\sk_sn\kp09\kp0990a.doc
09.90
PEINER
TOWER
CRANES
SK, SN
Operating manual
1.1 / 97
10.03.
09.94 3/4 Hydraulic system (of external climbing unit SE

211/212/213)
2. Last checks before and during taking the hydraulic system into operation
Some important things has to checked each time before the hydraulic system is permitted to be taken into
operation:
Is the rotation direction of pump (7) and motor (5) setted correctly? If it is not, set reverse rotation direction.
The correct rotation direction is indicated by an arrow on the electric motor.
Are there leaking points at the bolt connections of the hydraulic system? If there are, eleminate them by
Danger
Never try to tighten the bolts when the hydraulic system is under pressure. Danger for life!
tightening the referring bolt.
! Attention
Do not take the hydraulic system into operation before it is sure that everything, which is mentioned
above, is alright.
During taking the hydraulic system into operation, the operator of the hydraulic unit has to take care that a good
ventilation of the system is guaranteed at any time. It is also recommended, that the system should be run
through a few times in a tipping operation.
3. Extending the piston (climbing)

To extend the piston the following steps must be carried out:
Actuate the hand lever of the control valve (8) into position I, that means into end position of direction a.
Now the pressure oil flows from connection P at the control valve (8) to connection A and further via the
locking brake valve (10) into the piston chamber of the cylinder. The piston extends, pressing the oil out of
the cylinder ring chamber via connection B of the control valve to the filter (4) into the tank.
Observe the climbing procedure and stop climbing immediately if something is wrong.
4. Retracting the piston (climbing down)
To retract the piston the following steps must be carried out:
Actuate the hand lever of the control valve (8) into position II, that means into end position of direction b.
Now the pressure oil flows from connection P at the control valve (8) to connection B and further to the ring
chamber of the cylinder. A control line from the B-line to the connection at the locking brake valve (10) is
installed. If the pressure in the cylinder ring chamber raises to approx. 30 bar / 425 psi, the locking brake
valve starts opening, giving way to the oil via control valve and filter (4) into the tank.
Observe the climbing down procedure and stop climbing down immediately if something is wrong.
PEINER
TOWER
CRANES
SK, SN
Operating manual
1.1 / 97
13.03.
09.97 1 / 6 Climbing down process

(external climbing unit SE 211/212/213)
Important instructions concerning the climbing process
Only skilled personal with special training must be entrusted with the climbing of the crane.
All persons being involved in the climbing process have to wear safety-clothing and to use safety equipment
as prescribed. The national regulations concerning accident prevention must be adhered to.
All components of the climbing unit must be in technically perfect condition.
The permissible wind speed for external crane climbing is 14 m/s or 50 km/h (46 ft/s or 31 mph), which is
similar to wind speed class 6 on the Beaufort scale. The only exception is if the wind blows with constant
force absolutely parallel to the jib: Then the permissible wind speed is 20 m/s or 72 km/h (65 ft/s or 45 mph),
which is similar to wind speed class 8 on the Beaufort scale.
1. Preparing the climbing down process

If the climbing unit is positioned at the bottom of the tower, it has to be pulled up first. Else Preparations (page 2).
Pulling up the climbing unit
To pull up the climbing unit, the following steps must be carried out:
Slew the crane to the backside of the climbing unit.
Only valid for SK-crane types:
Move the trolley to the inner end of the jib by actuating the function Trolley back at the appropriate control
lever of the control stand.
Only valid for SN crane types:
Luff the jib to the shortest working radius by actuating the function Luffing up at the appropriate control
lever of the control stand.
Attach the climbing unit to the hook of the block assembly. Fasten the attachment device to the cross bar
(taking up bar of the locking bars).
! Attention
Make sure that the locking bars are disengaged and stay disengaged before pulling up the climbing
unit.
Pulling up the climbing unit by actuating the function Hoist up at the appropriate control lever of the control
stand as far as the diagonal pull of the hoist rope permits.
Set down the climbing unit on the climbing traverse.
Remove the attachment device.
09.97
e:\eigene dateien\betriebsanleitungen\sprache\englisch\sk_sn\kp09\kp0997b.doc
09.97
PEINER
TOWER
CRANES
SK, SN
Operating manual
1.1 / 97
13.03.

Slew the crane by approx. 180.
Climb the climbing unit to the top of the tower ( Chapter Accessories Climbing process).
Now the climbing unit is in the right position.
Preparations
Check the oil level in the oil tank of the hydraulic aggregate.
Prepare the weight to balance the upper crane. Weight details Chapter Accessories Balancing
weight
Advance the climbing unit against the turntable (TS 213) or tower section TSK (TS 211, TS 212) and secure
both components with pins by means of securing plugs.
Fold down the platform with the assembly carriage and fasten the suspension to the tower.
Adjust the guideway for the assembly carriage at the suspension so that the inner end of the guideway is in a
little higher position than the outer end. This little angle at the guideway makes it easier to advance the tower
section on the assembly carriage out of the tower.
Unlock the assembly carriage fixed at the guideway.
Slew the upper crane into climbing down position by activating the slewing gear.
Change the position of the railings at the top erection pedestal of the climbing unit so that the railings have
the required height for crane climbing (down).
! Attention
It is very important, that by this point of time the crane does not slew any more. Else the railings of the
top erection pedestal could be damaged by the upper crane.
Adjust the guide rollers. The adjustment of the guide rollers must be adapted to the existing wind conditions
and weight tolerances. A basic adjustment rule follows:
The front guide rollers should contact the tower section.
1
The rear guide rollers should have a clearance of about 5 mm / /4.
The left-hand top guide rollers should contact the tower section.
1
The left-hand bottom guide rollers should have a clearance of about 5 mm / /4.
The right-hand top guide rollers should have a clearance of about 5 mm / /4.
The right-hand bottom guide rollers should contact the tower section.
1
09.97
09.97
PEINER
TOWER
CRANES
SK, SN
Operating manual
1.1 / 97
13.03.

2. Removing the uppermost tower section TS
Applies only for the first tower section TS to be dismounted:
Only valid for SK-crane types with two trolleys:
Attach the balancing weight to the inner trolley.
Only valid for SK-crane types with one trolley or SN-crane types:
Attach the balancing weight to the hook of the block assembly.
To remove the uppermost tower section TS, the following steps must be carried out:
Loosen the bolt connection between intermediate frame (TS 213) or tower section TSK (TS 211, TS 212)
1
and tower by turning back the hexagon nuts by about 40 mm / 1 /2. This measure reduces the danger which
may arise to the crane due to wrong weight at the hook or wrong working radius.
Retract the hoist cylinder completely by actuating the hand lever of the control valve into direction b.
Pull up the actuating device for the climbing traverse which will then slew in.
Extend the hydraulic cylinder slowly. For this the hand lever at the control valve has to be actuated slightly in
direction a, but not the whole way to the end position I.
Carefully watch the behaviour of the upper crane when it starts lifting off the guide plugs of the tower. If it is
necessary, a moment distribution can be carried out by moving the trolley (SK-crane types) or luffing the jib
(SN-crane types). When the upper crane starts inclining laterally, lower again the upper crane onto the tower
and readjust the guide rollers of the climbing unit accordingly. Repeat the procedure of extending the
hydraulic cylinder and watching the behaviour of the upper crane.
Climb down the upper crane again by actuating the hand lever of the control valve in direction b until the
intermediate frame (TS 213) or the tower section TSK (TS 211, TS 212) is placed on the tower.
Remove all tower connecting elements (TS 211, TS 212: giant bolts; TS 213: tension rods) between the
uppermost tower section TS and the one just below.
Remove four bolts (one per each corner) of the bolt connection between intermediate frame (TS 213) or
tower section TSK (TS 211, TS 212) and tower. Tighten the other four bolts.
Extend the hydraulic cylinder by actuating the hand lever of the control valve in direction a only so far that
the assembly carriage can enter. At tightly bolted tower, the upper guide rollers of the climbing unit must be
positioned at approx. 350 - 400 mm / 1-2 - 1-4 below the upper edge of the uppermost tower section.
Move the assembly carriage to the inside.
Climb down the upper crane by actuating the hand lever of the control valve in direction b until the
uppermost tower section TS rests on the assembly carriage.
09.97
09.97
PEINER
TOWER
CRANES
Operating manual

Remove the bolt connection between intermediate frame (TS 213) or tower section TSK (TS 211, TS 212)
and uppermost tower section TS.
Move the assembly carriage with the tower section TS to the outside.
Check whether the assembly carriage can be locked with the guideway or not. If it is possible, lock it.
Check the upper crane again for absence of moments and adjust the guide rollers once more if necessary.
Retract the hydraulic cylinder again by actuating the hand lever of the control valve in direction b until the
climbing unit is set down on the locking bars.
3. Climbing down process

First climbing down step
Swing out the climbing traverse by pushing down the actuating device for the climbing traverse.
Extend the hydraulic cylinder by actuating the hand lever of the control valve in direction a.
Slew in the climbing traverse by pulling up the actuating device for the climbing traverse right before finishing
the climbing step. One climbing step is approx. 2 m / 6-7.
Continue to extend the hydraulic cylinder by actuating the hand lever of the control valve in direction a until
the locking bars can be disengaged.
Disengage the locking bars by means of the hand lever and hold them in this position until they can no
longer contact the tower truss.
climbing unit is set down on the locking bars.
Second and third climbing down step

Second and third climbing step are similar to the first one and are carried out in the same way as described
before.
Fourth climbing down step

upper crane is resting on the bolted-up tower.
09.97
09.97
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK, SN
1.1 / 97
13.03.

Taking away the dismounted tower section TS
Bolt the intermediate frame (TS 213) or the tower section TSK (TS 211, TS 212) free from play to the
uppermost tower section TS using four of the eight tower connecting elements (one per each corner; TS
211, TS 212: giant bolts; TS 213: tension rods).
Applies only for the first tower section TS which is dismounted:

Place the balancing weight at the hook of the block assembly on the ground.
Applies for all other tower sections TS which are dismounted:
Place the tower section TS at the hook of the block assembly (SK-crane types with two trolleys: at the inner
trolley) on the ground.
Only valid for SK-crane types with two trolleys:

Attach the tower section TS on the assembly carriage to the inner trolley. Some crane types give the
possibility to pin the hook from the outer to the inner trolley, other crane types do not. However, the tower
section TS must definitely be attached to the inner trolley.
Only valid for SK-crane types with one trolley or SN crane types:
Attach the tower section TS on the assembly carriage to the hook of the block assembly.
Now there are two possibilities to go ahead:
Climbing down the crane once more
Finishing crane climbing (down)
Climbing down the crane once more
Applies to all SK-crane types:
Lift up the attached weight to nearly the same height the climbing unit is mounted.
Position trolley(s) at the prescribed working radius ( Chapter Accessories Balancing weight).
Only valid for SN-crane types:
Lift up the attached weight and luff the jib to the prescribed working radius ( Chapter Accessories
Balancing weight).
Now go ahead as described in paragraph 2 (Removing the uppermost tower section TS) and repeat the
climbing down process for the next tower section TS.
Finishing crane climbing (down)

Place the tower section TS at the hook of the block assembly (SK-crane types with two trolleys: at the inner
trolley) on the ground.
09.97
09.97
PEINER
TOWER
CRANES
SK, SN
Operating manual
1.1 / 97
13.03.

Complete the bolt connection between the intermediate frame (TS 213) or the tower section TSK (TS 211,
TS 212) and the tower by inserting the missing four tower connecting elements (TS 211, TS 212: giant bolts;
TS 213: tension rods). The bolts must only be hand-tightened.
09.97
09.97
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK
1.1 / 00
01.02.
40.10 1/2 Counterweight block BG 1.45 t (3 200 lbs)

Concrete quality B 25 as per DIN 1045
Specific gravity = 2.5 t / m (154.4 lbs / ft)
+5%
+5%
(3 200 lbs )
Total weight = 1.45 t
Note:
The finished elements must be weight prior to use.
For the relevant working drawing see page 2.
1550 / 5'-1''
40.10
800 / 2'-7''
1910 / 6'-3''
1970 / 6'-6''
190 / 0'-8''
40.10
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK
1.1 / 00
01.02.
40.11 1/2 Counterweight block BG 3.1 t (6 800 lbs)

+2%
+2%
(6 800 lbs )
Note:
1810 / 5'-11''
1550 / 5'-1''
1970 / 6'-6''
4500 / 14'-9''
1850 / 6'-1''
190 / 0'-8''
40.11
40.11
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
01.02.
40.17 1/2 Foundation block BF 6.6 t (14 550 lbs)

+5%
+5%
(14 550 lbs )
Note:
750 / 2'-5''
3000 / 9'-10''
1250 / 4'-1''
1200 / 3'-11''
500 / 1'-7''
500 / 1'-7''
1250 / 4'-1''
A-A
40.17
40.17
PEINER
TOWER
Operating manual
CRANES
SK / SN
1.1 / 00
01.02.
40.18 1/2 Base ballast block BZ 6.6 t (14 550 lbs)

+5%
+5%
(14 550 lbs )
Note:
400 / 1'-4''
1900 / 6'-3''
880 / 2'-11''
900 / 2'-11''
450 / 1'-6''
2050 / 6'-9''
2150 / 7'-1''
A-A
170 / 0'-7''
90 / 0'-3 1/2''
4500 / 14'-9''
40.18
40.18
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
Operating manual
SK, SN, SMK, SMH
Edition '69
2.1 / 98
10.07.
50.01 1/6 Rules for accident prevention - tower cranes (extract)

37 Tower cranes must be erected and operated according to the manufacturer's instructions under experted
control and supervision. The instructions must always be available at the area of application.
38 The required ballast, (central ballast, counterweight) is to be built in safely. By usage of loose materials (for
instance stones, grit, sand) as ballast it must be guaranted that no ballast reduction occurs.
39 Before starting to operate it is necessary to investigate tracks and the crane of its operation security and to
remove defects, before the crane is put into operation.
40 Tower cranes may only be operated by trustworthy persons who have reached the age of 18 years, and who
are educated and aquainted with the mechanical and electrical installations (driver of the crane).
41 The driver of the crane has to control that the crane is in perfect condition and to take care of sufficient
lubrication of the gear, mechanism, pullies, ropes a.s.o. Overload security, emergency switch and brakes
have also to be checked by the driver of the crane before the crane is operated.
42 (1) The driver of the crane is obliged to register all defects of the tower crane into the tower control book (to
buy at the Trade Union), which is to be kept at the operation estabishment, and to inform the authoried
person or his reliever.
(2) At defects, which endanger the operating security, the operation must be stopped immediately (for
instance by failure of the brakes or the emergency switch, by damage of the ropes, by sloping down of a
rope off the drum, and if knots and slings occur).
43 Gear shiftings, which are in slow running position, may not be undertaken with load.
44 (1) Steering gears with extension devices are only to be operated from the operation platform and only with
support of the steering wheels
(2) Before the crane is put into operation all steering gears are to be put into starting position.
(3) Smoothly running of the crane is to be achieved. It is not permittable to retard the last runnings by
means of counter current.
(4) If a breakdown occurs during movements of the ballast the operation switch must be turned off
immediately.
(5) When leaving the operation platform the load is to be deposited and the load hook pulled up: switch off
operation switch.
45 When the case arises, the driver of the crane is obligated to show an off-flag signal before starting to
50.01
c:\eigene dateien\betriebsanleitungen\sprache\uvv\uvv_e.doc
50.01
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
Operating manual
SK, SN, SMK, SMH
Edition '69
2.1 / 98
10.07.
operate, or after a working break, or after an interruption of the work.

46 By all movements of the crane the driver must be observe especially the load and the load lifting media when
dead driving.
47 If the driver of the crane is not able to observe from his operation platform the loading and unloading wharf,
he must communicate by means of using a signal post.
48 (1) Loads may only be moved by the tower crane when a sign of a chainer or of a signal post or, another
authorized person is given, if it is not assured that the movements can be carried out without danger.
(2) If signals for communications for the driver of the crane used it must be pre-arranged. (see hand signs for
operation of the crane.)
49 It is prohibited to heave up jammed loadings and the diagonal pulling and grinding of the load. It is also
prohibited to move with the tower crane any kind of vehicles.
50 Working in range of action and turning capacity of the toewr crane are only allowed when the driver of the
crane has been informed. The people concerned have to communicate with the driver.
51 If possible, loadings shall not be lead above persons.
52 (1) It is prohibited to take passeners on the lower platform of the tower crane and to transport any persons
with the load or lifting media.
(2) The transportation of persons in the basket and the working form these baskets is only permitted under
special circumstances and when a written permission of the Trade Union is given.
53 (1) Tower cranes in operation may only be entered or left when the driver of the crane has been informed and
the crane is in stagnation.
(2) The driver of the crane is not permitted to allow any unauthorized person to climb up the crane.
54 By a prolonged period of interruption of operation and when finishing the work the undercarriage on rails
dirven tower crane is to be secured by means of wind security. The jibs are to be brought into the widest
extension position and to be put into wind direction. They may not be fixed. If, however, the wind drifts the
jibs against buildings or steel structures, then the jibs have to be lowered or tied tension-proof by means of
concrete component parts.
55 If storm comes up the tower cranes are immediately to be stopped. The restriction according to the
regulations must be met - 54.
50.01
50.01
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
Operating manual
SK, SN, SMK, SMH
Edition '69
2.1 / 98
10.07.

56 According to 27 paragraph 1, the deposting of construction materials a.s.o. besides the rails must meet
the described safety zone of 0.50 m (1'-8''). This applies to tower cranes with gantry, also for depositing of
construction materials and other goods between the rails.
57 Repair and maintenance
(1) Repair and maintenance may only be carried out by persons who have expert knowledge of this type of
work.
(2) By repair and maintenane of the tower crane, its electric energy must be switched off and be parted from
the network. It is necessary to assure that there is no tension by mistake.
50.01
50.01
PEINER
TOWER CRANES
Operating manual
SK, SN, SMK, SMH
Edition '69
2.1 / 98
10.07.

The examination of the tower cranes apply to German rules for accident prevention as follows:
1. Rules for the prevention of accidents - slewing tower crane 33
By each erection of the tower crane and whenever required - at least once a year - the crane
must be checked by an experienced person.
Experienced persons are: Mechanical engineer, mechanical operator of the own or another
factory, especially of the manufacturer.
34
At least every 4 years it is necessary to check the crane by an experienced person. These
experienced persons are employed by the technical construction office or, are accepted as
experienced persons by the Trade Union.
2. Regular inspections
According to 33 the regular inspections are:
a) Component parts and mechanical facilities
b) Elctrical equipment
c) Hoisting equipent
The following will be inspected
1.
a)
Runway of crane
Rail (track gauge, rejection, drive limitations a.s.o.)
b)
Construction of the crane (undercarrige, slewing, jib tower) steel frame, supports for wheel breakage,
caw catcher, rail clamps (wheel locks) slewing rings, platforms, girders, bars, joints.
c)
Ascent
Walkways
steps, tread, handles, covering of gangway, platform a.s.o. railing, intermediate bars, backrest,
specified plates and signposts if necessary, indication of danger.
d)
Ballast
central ballast, counterweight
e)
Drivers cabin and operation platform

covering, lower boards, doors, windows, seating accomodation, heating.
f)
Gearing (chassis, winch a.s.o.)

wheels and bearings of the wheels, shafts, clutches, drums, rollers, counterweight, compensating
roller with bolts, gear wheels, worm gear, thrust bearings, screws, nuts, keys, safety of detachable
parts, safety of gearing, mechanical device installation, mechanical parts of the limit switches and
overload safety control.
50.01
50.01
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK, SN, SMK, SMH
2.1 / 98
Edition '69
10.07.

g)
Brakes
disbrake, friction brake, ribbon brake, support brake lifting sets, weights, bolts, springs
h)
Lubrication
accessibility of the lubrication equipment and points of lubrication, efficiency of lubrication, marking of
lubrication.
2. Electric equipment
a)
Controller
power switch, crane control switch, control members, relays, emergency switch, overload safety
device, fuses and excess current protection device.
b)
Wiring
Movable connection circuits, current collector line, insolations, current collector, metalbraided and
connected wiring.
c)
Current utilization device

motors, brake magnets, resistors, lightning, heating, electrical warning - and signal equipment.
d)
Preventive measure
covering of life parts, preventive measures against too high contact potential, transfer of the protective
conductor, isolation.
3. Suspending devices
(ropes, chains and reeved load lifting members 1)
a)
Inspection of the ropes in its total length, also the conclealed lying paarts, for instance bearings on
rollers, pressure mark under drilling clamp and the fixing of the rope end.
Estimation of the rope security based on:
Type of manufacture, fret, corrosion pit, corrosion, loosening of the outside lay of wire, twistings,
looping of flexible wires and wires, displacement of twists, cork-screw, loops, pinches.
Number of visible wire breaks at a length of 6-fold rope diameter (approx. 1 wire length of twist 2).
Number of wire breaks at a length of 30-fold rope diameter (approx. 5 wire length twists 2).
Nests of wire breakage, beak of flexible wire.
Findings of the rope diameters in connection with the condition of the grooved rollers on drums and
rollers.
Concerning the worn out, see special instructions.
b)
Round iron chains

investigation of round iron chains.
c)
Sprocket chain
extension, wear,
50.01
cracks,
safety
of
the
bolts
by
means
of
rivet
head,
ring
a.s.o.
50.01
PEINER
Operating manual
TOWER CRANES
SK, SN, SMK, SMH
Edition '69
2.1 / 98
10.07.

d)
Load hooks
Deformation of the complete hook.
Local cold wirking and crushing in the chap, cracks, wear, rust, fusing of the hook nut, protection
against slipping of the load.
1) Concerning the checking of the ropes, chains and reeved load lifting members, see also the
"Direction for round iron chains, ropes and load lifting member of hoising operation", which can be
purchased from the Main Union of the Trade Union, Central Agency for accident prevention, Bonn,
Reuterstr. 157/159 order No. ZH/1/212.
2) Permissable number of wire break see DIN 15020, page 2.
Replacing of the wire rope.

A rope is a ready to be replaced, if one or serval of the following points are fulfilled:
1. Breaks of the wire
The regular lay rope is to be ejected as soon as 10% of all rope wires are broken within a length of
measurement of 25 x rope diameter.
If, however, it is a longitudinal rope the limit is to be drawn by a third of these declared values. These figures
are only occures on one flexible wires. If it only occures on one flexible wire, the designation does not apply to
the figure of the wire in the rope, but of all wires in one flexible wire (the figures of wire and flexible wires are
given in the schedule of ropes).
2. Break of a flexible wire
If a break of a flexible wire occurs, the rope must be immediately taken off.
3. Demage of the hemp core
a)
If a deformation of the roope occurs and the hemp heart is pressed outwards, the rope must be taken
off.
b)
If it can be assumed that the hemp core is demolished by means of outcoming hemp fibres, the rope
must also be taken off.
4. Damage of the rope

If the rope is so heavely damaged by means of a mesh welding so that the flexible wires are sharp-edged bend
in, the rope is to be taken off.
5. Erosion of the rope
If the surface on the external wires have reached a width of 80 - 85 % of the wire diameter, which has occured
by erosion, the rope has to be taken off.
6. Corrosion
The rope must be taken off when heavy corrosion of the rope has been noticed and the first wire breaks are
indicated.
7. Loops
The rope must be taken off when deformation of a loop in the rope has occured and the diameter of the
deformation is smaller than the diameter of the drum.
50.01
50.01

Grúa Torre Terex SKS575

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Grúa Torre Terex SKS575

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

PEINER

Year of construction: 2000

TEREX PEINER GmbH

Terex Germany GmbH & Co. KG

Control and crane operation

Lubrication and maintenance

00.00 1/7 Table of contents

Tower crane overview and nomenclature

Version A Hook heights (not climbable)

Version A Forces and moments (on foundation / n. climb.)

Version A Hook heights (climbable)

Verison A Forces and moments (on foundation / climb.)

Version E Hook heights (not climbable)

Version E Corner loads and horizontal forces (n. climb.)

Version E - Hook heights (climbable)

Version E - Corner loads and horizontal forces (climb.)

Version F Hook heights (not climbable)

Version F Corner loads and horizontal forces (n. climb.)

Version F - Hook heights (climbable)

Version F - Corner loads and horizontal forces (climb.)

00.00 2/7 Table of contents

Construction site and assembly preparation

Distance from buildings

Safety distances between cranes

Version A foundation anchorage

Version E preparing the crane track

Version E rails on concrete strip foundation

Version E rails on sleepers

Version E rails on I-beams

Version E SRS crane track system

Version E track-laying in curves

Version E crane track tolerances

Version E end-of-track safeguards

Version E contact rail for emergency end stop switch

Version E earthing of crane tracks

The assembly crane

Danger zone near electrical transmissions lines

Important instructions concerning crane erection

Usual hand signals

Tools and accessories

Bolt and nut conversion table

Version A mounting the crane substructure

00.00 3/7 Table of contents

Version E mounting the crane substructure

Attachment points and weights undercarriage

Version F mounting the crane substructure

Mounting the tower sections

Attachments points and weights tower sections

Notes on tower connecting elements

Mounting the turntable

Mounting the counterjib

Place erection counterweight in position

Notes on jib assembly

Pre-assembly of the rear part of the jib

Notes on pre-assembly of the front part of the jib

Pre-assembly of the front part of the jib L1

Pre-assembly of the front part of the jib L2 L9

Configuration of jib suspension

Attachment points and weights jib

Mounting the complete jib

Trolley travel rope reeving

Hoist rope reeving

Winding up the hoist rope

Completing the counterweight